Zilog System 8000 Hardware reference

Zilog System 8000 Hardware reference
System 8000™
Bardware Reference Manual
-
-II
II
-II
III
II
III
II
III
Zilog
.
.'.
~
63-3237-04
December 1982
Copyright 1982 by Zilog, Inc. All rights reserved. No part of
this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system,
or transmitted, in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without the prior
written permission of Zilog.
The information in this publication is subject to change
notice.
without
Zilog assumes no responsibility for the use of any circuitry
other than circuitry embodied in a Zilog product. No other circuit patent licenses are implied.
ZILOG
[
NOTICE TO OWNER
FEDERAl, COMMUNICATIONS COMMISSION
RADIO FREQUENCY INTERFERENCE
STATEMENT
Warning: This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions manual, may cause interference to radio communications. As temporarily permitted by regulation it has not been tested for compliance with the limits for
Class A computing devices pursuant to Subpart J of Part 15 of FCC Rules, which are designed to
provide reasonable protection against such interference. Operation of this equipment in a residential
area is likely to cause interference in which case the user at his own expense will be required to take
whatever measures may be required to correct the interference.
SYSTEM 8000 HARDWARE REFERENCE MANUAL
03-3237-011
HRM
Zilog
HRM
Preface
This manual contains the inform$tion necessary to install,
operate, and maintain Zilog's System 8000 Model 21, Model 31
microcomputer. This manual addresses field engineers (FE),
service technicians, and all others who require knowledge of
the hardware aspects of the system.
This manual and the related manuals listed below provide the
technical documentation of the System 8000.
Title
Zilog Number
ZEUS System Administrator Manual
ZEUS Utilities Manual
ZEUS Reference Manual
03-3246
03-3196
03-3195
CPU Hardware Reference Manual
03-3200
System 8000
iii
is a registered trademark of Zilog, Inc.
ZilOg
iii
HRM
Zilog
HRM
iv
Zilog
iv
HRM
2ilog
HRM
Table of Contents
SECTION 1
OVERVIEW............ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-1
1.1. System Description
1-1
1.2. Functional Relationships
1-2
1.2.1. CPU Board (CPU)
1-2
1.2.2. Winchester Disk Controller (WDC)
1-3
1.2.3. Storage Module Device Controller (SMDC) .. 1-4
1.2.4. Tape Cartridge Controller (TCC)
1-4
1.2.5. Memory Subsystem
1-4
1 . 2 . 6. Sec 0 ndar y Se ria 1 Bo a r d s (S SB)
1- 12
1.3. System Expansion .....•........................ 1-12
SECTION 2
SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS
2-1
2.1. Introductiorl
2-1
2.2. Electrical Specifications ................•.... 2-1
2.3. Performance Specifications
2-1
2.4. Modules ....'. '. . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
2.4.1. I/O Connectors
2-8
2.5. Backplane (ZBI) Pin Assignments
:
2-11
SECTION 3
INSTALLATION
3-1
3.1. Introductiofl ........•...••••.•.................
3.2. Unpacking, Inspection, Reship~ent Procedures ..
3.2.1. Shipping Container .....•.......•........•
3.2.2. Unpacking and Inspection Procedures
3.2.3. Internal Inspection
3.2.4. Reshipment Procedures ...............•....
3.3. Installation Procedures ....•......•...........
3.3.1. Site preparation .............•...........
3.3.2. System Interconnection ....•.............•
3.4. 32 MB Winchester Disk Drive Configurations
3.4.1. Drive Cabling
3.4.2. Drive Configuration Procedures .....•.....
3.4.3. Initial Checkout and Startup Procedure
3.5. SMD Winchester Drive Configuration
3.5.1. SMD Disk Addressing ...••....•.•..••....•.
3.5.2. SMD Disk Status Indicators •.....••.•.....
3.5.3. SMD Configuration ......•....•............
3.5.4. SMD Cabling ....................••.......•
3.5.5. Head Lock Actuator ...•.•...... ; .........•
v
2ilog
3-1
3-1
3-1
3-1
3-2
3-6
3-7
3-7
3-8
3-14
3-14
3-15
3-17
3-18
3-18
3-21
3-23
3-25
3-26
v
HRM
Zilog
HRM
3. 5.6. Cable Termination
'
3.6. Line Printer Installation Procedures
3.7. System power-Up Diagnostics (SPUD)
3.8. System Expansion
3.8.1. Installing Additional Terminal Ports
3.8.2. Adding A Disk Module
3.8.3. Adding SMD Disk Module #1 to Model 31
3.8.4. 1 Mbyte Memory Array Board
Segment Setting
SECTION 11
3-42
THEORY OF OPERATION
4-1
4 • 1. Ge n era 1
L~.2.
3-27
3-28
3-30
". 3-35
3-35
3-37
3-40
"....
4-1
System Bus....................................
4-1
4.3. Bus Conventions
4-1
L~ •
4- 2
4. Bu s Si g n a1 s
oJ.............................
4.5.1. CPU Module
4.5.2. Winchester Disk Controller
4.5.3. Storage Module Device Controller
4.5.4. Cartridge Tape Controller
4.5.5. Tape Controller Operation
4.5.6. Memory Subsystem Controller
4 • 6. Sy stem Res e t
4.7. Non-Maskable Interrupts (NMI)
4 • 7 . 1. Ma nua 1 NM I
4 . 7 . 2. Po we r- Fa i I NM I .........•.............:.....
4.7.3. ECC Memory Error NMI
4.7.4. 'NMI Identifier
4~8·. Vectored Inter~upts
i.
4.9. Memory Management Unit (MMU) ....•.............
4.9.1. MMU Operation (Non-Segmented)
4.9.2. MMU Operation (Segmented)
4.9.3. MMU Configurations ....•.............•.•..
4.9.4. Break Registers ....................•.....
4 • 9 • 5. Sys t em Ac c e sst 0 Use r Spa c e
4.9.6. System Segments and Protection
4.5. Bus Modules
It
Sl':C~ION
5
••
,
••
MAINTENANCE................................
. '5.1. Introduction
5.2. Preventive Maintenance
;
5 . 3. Ta pe Dr i v e Per i 0 d i c Ma in ten a nc e ...............'
5.3~1. Magnetic Head Cleaning .•...... ~
5.3.2. Tape Cleaner Cleaning ......•... ~ ....•....
5.3.3. Motor Capstan Cleaning ...•...•.•.........
5.3.4. Heat Sink, Circuit Board,
Sensor Hole Cleaning ..........••..•......•......
5.4. Disk Drive Assembly Cleaning..................
vi
Zilog
4-9
4-9
4-16
4-26
4-43
4-54
4-57
4 - 58
4-58
4- 62
4- 62
4-63
4-63
4-63
4-66
4-66
4-67
4-67
4-68
4- 69
4-70
5-1
5-1
5-1
5- 1
5-1
5-2
5-2
5-4
5-4
vi
HRM
Zilog
HRM
5.5. Disk Drive Mounting
.
5 . 6. Dr i ve Ca b 1 in, g •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
5-5
5-7
5-9
5-9
5-9
5-10
5-11
DC Vol tage Test ...........• .- • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-13
5-14
5-14
5.7. Disk Power ON Procedure
.
5.8. Power Supply Voltages .....•...................
5 . 8 . 1. AC In put Vol tag e Ch e c k ...........•........
5.8.2. CPU Module' DC Voltage Test
.
5.8.3. Disk/Tape Module DC Voltage Test
.
5.8.4. Disk/Tape Module (Module 31)
5.9. System 8000 Monitor
,..........•
5.9.1. Monitor Program Debug Environment
.
5 . 9 . 2. Mo nit 0 r pr 0 gram ..........................•
5.9.3. Monitor Mode Commands
.
5.9.4. Download Mode Commands .....•.............
5.9.5. System Parameters ........•...............
5.10. Monitor I/O Procedures
.
5.10.1. I/O Pr'ocedures
.
5.11. SADIE ..
It
••••••••••••
·.,
5-16
5-34
5-38
5-41
5-41
5-44
. 5-44
••••••••••••••••••••••••
5 . 11. 1. Pu r po s e 0 f SAD IE
5.11.2. Organization and principles
of Operation ..•...................................
5.12. SADIE Tape Organization
.
5.13. SADIE Program Initialization
.
5.14. SADIE Diagnostic Functions
.
5.14.1. Console Interactions ••.....
5.14.2. START and RESET Interactions
.
5.15. Command Level Test Functions
.
5.15.1. Command Level T:
Choose and run a single TEST . ....
5.15.2. Command Level R:
REPEAT previously loaded test ...•......•.•.... :.' ...
5.15.3. Command Level'L:
Run current tE~st LIST ......••.....•.............
5.15.4. Command Level C:
CHOOSE and run a test list •...•.......••..........
5~15.5. Command Level E:
0
A
EDITt est 1 i s t~ • -. • '.' • • • •
5-16.
• • • • • • • • • • • • •
••••••••••••••
5-45
5-45
5-46
5-47
5-47
5-50
5-51
5-52
5-55
5-55
5-56
~. ~
+' -. ._ i:.•.' • 5-57
5.15.6. Command Level D:
DISPLA Y error log .••...•.....•.......•....•..... 5-61
5.15.7. Command Level A:
Cum ul at i veer r~or log ........•.•....~ ". ,.. ',~ '. ;...."... '~.. ~.. S~:6·l'·.
5.15.8. Command Level M:
Do Ta pe Ma in ten a nc e ..•..........•.... ,:. .. . . •. . . . . . " 5- 6 2
5.15.9. Command Level Q:QUIT..... ~ •.. ~! • • • • • • • • • 5-62
5.16. SADIE Test Line. and Control statem~nts
,. 5-62
5.16.1. SADIE Test List ...••.•......
e • • • • • • ,.~
5-62
5.16.2. Control Statements •.... ~.~ ... ~ .. ~ ..•• ~ .. 5-62
e,
•
•
•
•
• -.
•
•
.'
•
':'
'.
'i
5.17. Using
vii
.• ' .
•
•
'., ..
SAD+~ ••••••••••,_ •••••• '"•••••••••••• ~. '"'
ZilQg
5-64
vii'
HRM
Zilog
HRM
APPENDIX A SADIE TEST DESCRIPTIONS
A-1
APPENDIX B WINCHESTER DISK CONTROLLER COMMANDS
B-1
B.'. General ............•...•...•..•....•..........
B-1
B.2. Format/UNIT/
B • 3. Re ad S-e c tor •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
B.4. Write Sector..................................
B.5. Read Detailed Status/UNIT/ ADDRESS/
B.6. Restore/UNIT/
B • 7. Nu 11 ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
B.8. Seek/UNIT/CYLINDER/
B.9. Set Strobe/Offset/UNIT/SO/
B.10. Set Write Protect/UNIT/SURFACES/
B.11. Format Read/UNIT/HEAD/CYLINDER/
/SECTOR/ADDRESS/
B.12. Set Interrupt Address/SECTOR/
B-1
8.13.
8.14.
8.15.
B.16.
Self Test . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Format Verify/UNIT/HEAD/CYLINDER/
Unit Format Verify/UNIT/ •....................
Command Notes
APPENDIX C CARTRIDGE TAPE ERROR CONDITIONS
C .1.
viii
~General
•••••.•....•.••.••.•.•......•..........
Zilog
B-1
B-2
B-3
B-3
B- 3
8-4
8-4
B-4
8-5
8-5
B-5
8-6
8-6
8-6
C-1
C-1
viii
HRM
Zilog
HRM
List of Illustrations
Figure
1-1
1-2
1-3
1-4
1-5
1-6
1-7
1-8
1-9
2-1
2-2
2-3
2-4
2-5
2-6
3-1
3-2
3-3
3-4
3-5
3-6
3-7
3- 8
3-9
3-10
3-11
3-12
3-13
3-14
3-15
3-16
4-1
ix
sy 3 t em 8 aa0
1-3
System 8000 CPU Board (CPU)
. 1-5
System 8000 Winchester Disk Controller
. 1-6
System 8000 Storage Module
Device Controller (SMDCA)
. 1-7
System 8000 Storage Module
Device Controller (SMDCB) .•................. 1-8
System 8000 Tape Cartridge Controller (TCC) . 1-9
System 8000 ECC Controller ••................ 1-10
1M Byte Memory Array (MEM) ~
. 1-11
System 8000, Functional Relationships
. 1-13
II
•
•
•
•
•
•
;8
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Processor Module Controls and Indicators .... 2-6
Mo d uleD im ens ion s (W i tho ut Sid ePa ne I 3) ••••• 2-7
Model 21 Processor Module
I/O Connector Panel
2-8
Model 31 Processor Module
I/O Connector Panel
2-9
Backplane Assignments .....•................. 2-14
Model 31 Backplane Slot Assignments
2-15
Switch Selectable AC Line Voltages,
Processor Module
Switch Selectable ACLine Voltages
Disk/Tape Module
~ .....•............
Model 21 Connector Identification
Model 31 Connector Id.entification
Model 21 System Intermodule Cabling
Model 31 System Intermodule Cabling
FINCH Power and Signal
Connector Orientation .............•....•....
FINCHAd apt e r Bo a rd. .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
Rotary-Arm Shipping Lock Orientation
Mode Select Switch Location •................
84 MB SMD Configuration ..............•......
Mounting Positions of SMD Connectors
SMD Interface Cabling
SMD Mounting Bracket
with Head Lock Actuator ...................•.
SMD Cable Terminators ..•....................
EXisting Model 21 and
Expanded System Configurations
System 8000, Functional Relationships
Zilog
3-4
·3-6
3-10
3-11
3-12
3-13
3-14
3- 16
3-17
3-19
3-24
3-25
3-26
3-27
3-28
3-37
4-2
ix
Zilog
HRM
l~
-2
L~_
3
L~ -
4
L~ -
5
1l-6
1l-7
l~ -
8
1~-9
4-10
4-11
4-12
4-13
4-14
4-15
5-1
5-2
5-3
5-4
5-5
5-6
5-7
5-8
x
HRM
CPU Board, Functional Relationships
Winchester Disk Controller,
Functional Relationships
Disk Controller Command
Command status (C/S) Registers
Disk Controller, I/O Space
SMD
Controller Functional Relationship
Cartridge Tape Controller
Functional Relationships
Cartridge Tape Controller
I/O Address Space
'
Cartridge Tape Controller,
Command Processing
Memory Subsystem Controller,
Functional Relationships
Memory Organization
Byte Translation
Word Translation •...........................
Long-Word Translation
Interrupt Priority Connections
Location of Parts
Requiring Periodic Cleaning
FINCH Major Components
Disk Drive Mounting
SMD Mounting Bracket '.
Power Supply Voltage
Test Points, CPU Module
Voltage Test points,
Finch DC Power Connector
Voltage Test poin~s,
SMD Power Connector
Power Supply Voltage
Adjustments (Model 31)
Zilog
'...
.
. ..
4-11
4-17
4-18
4~19
4-27
4-45
4-46
4-56
4-59
4-59
4-60
4-61
4-62
4-66
5-3
5-5
5-6
5-7
5-12
5-12
5-13
5-14
x
HRM
Zilog
HRM
List of Tables
Table
2-1
2-2
2-3
2-4
2-5
2-6
2-7
2-8
2-9
2-10
2-11
2-12
2-13
2-14
2-15
2-16
3-1
3-2
3-3
3-4
3-5
4-1
4-2
4-3
4-4
4-5
4-6
4-7
4-8
4-9
4-10
4-11
4-12
4-13
4-14
4-15
}.J-16
4-17
xi
Electrical Specifications
System Performance Characteristics
32MB Winchester Disk Drive
Performance Characteristics
SMD Performance Characteristics
Tape Cartridge Drive
Performance Charactetistics
I/O Connectors
,
TTY Connector, Pin Assignments
Printer Connector, Pin Assignments
ZBI Backplane Connector Pin Assignments
CPU Board, Connector P2/J21, Slot 1
Secondary Serial Board
Winchester Disk Controller, Connector
Tape Cartridge Controller, Connector
Storage Module Device Controller Board A
Storage Module Device Controller Board B
System 8000 Memory Bus
.
.
2-2
.
.
2-4
2-5
. 2-6
. 2-9
. 2-10
. 2-10
2-12
. 2-16
. 2-17
. 2-18
. 2-19
. 2-20
. 2-21
. 2-22
SMD Disk' A.ddressing
.
Fault Indicator
'
.
SPUD Diagno'stics Error List
.
Segment Address Settings
on 1 MBy t e Mem0 r y .................."....'.'....
Memory Array Jumper Selection
,.' .
Bus Lines
-
.
ZBI Status Lines, Transaction Coding
.
Data Width Codes: Byte, Word, and Long Word.
CPU I/O Bus, Signal Definitions
.
CPU Board Jumper Selection .........•...•....
Parallel Printer Output, port A ..•..........
Parallel Printer Input, Port A
.
Parallel Printer Data, Port B
.
Serial I/O Devices and Channel Assignments ..
Serial Channels and Baud-rate Generators ....
Baud Rate and Primary
Boot Device, Switch U70 .............•.......
I/O Channels and Their Addresses
.
Disk Contrc)ller and Disk Drive,
.
Command and Command-Status Registers •.......
Jumper Settings
Command & CiS Registers .••..•...•...........
Disk Controller Jumper Settings for Memory .•
Disk Command and Status Words ....•..........
Zilog
2-1
3-20
3-22
3-32
3-42
3-42
4-3
4~8
4-8
4-9
4-11
4-12
4-12
4-13
4-13
4-14
4-14
4-15
4-20
4-22
4-24
4-25
4-26
xi
HRM
Zi10g
HRM
4-18
4-19
4-,20
4-,21
4-22
4-23
4-24
4-25
4-26
ZBI Tape Controller Interface Registers
4-41
Tape Controller Jumper Selection
4-48
Tape Interrupt Vector, Bit Definitio~s
4-50
Host-Tape Controller Commands
4-50
Status Register, Bit Definitions
4-52
Master Interrupt Control
4-53
Tape Controller to Drive Interface Signals .. 4-53
Tape Drive to Controller Interface Signals .. 4-55
Device Priority Scheme
4-65
5-1
5-2
5-3
5-4
Cleaning Schedule
Interface Cables
Program Status Area
System Hardware I/O Port Addresses
C-1
Cartridge Tape Error Conditions
xii
Zilog
5-1
5-8
5-40
5-41
C-1
xii
HRM
Zi log'
HRM
SECTION 1
OVERVIEW
1.1.
System Description
The System 8000 is a multiuser free-standing unit, based on
Zilog's 16-bit Z8001A microprocessor and running the ZEUS
Operating System at 5.5 megahertz. The System 8000 product
line consists of several different models.
The Model 21 and
Model 31 are both similar in appearance having four or more
separate stacked modules.
The Model 21 contains a 32 MB
Winchester Disk Drive within the Disk/Tape module.
The
Model 31 is equipped with an 84 MB Storage Module Drive
(SMD). Both the t-I[odel 21 and Model 31 have a 17 MB Cartridge Tape Drive and will accomodate additional Disk or
Disk/Tape modules. Figure 1-1 shows the modules that make up
the system.
The top Processor Module controls the system and contains
the the CPU and various system controller boards within its
ten-slot card cage. The system communication is over the
32-bit Z-Bus Backplane Interconect (ZBI). Two I/O panels
located at the re?r of the processor module interconnect
with the lower modules ,I/O panels and provide disk, tape and
terminal communication.
The Disk/Tape module beneath the top module has either a
32-megabyte Winchester 9isk drive or an 84-megabyte SMD and
a 17-megabyte cartridge tape drive. Disk and Tape I/O connectors are provided on the rear I/O panel.
The remaining two modules can be additional Disk/Tape or
Accessory modules that are 'interconnected to the above Disk
and/or Disk/Tape Modules. Terminal distributIon panels for
serial terminal and parallel printer connection can be added
to these modules.
Both the Model 21 and 31 system can be expanded from 8 to 24
users by installing two Secondary Serial Boards (SSB) and
terminal distribution panels.
1 -1
Zilog
1 -1
HRM
Zilog
HRM
The basic system contains five or six printed circuit boards
in the ten-slot card cage.
These boards (Figures 1-2
through 1-8) are:
the CPU
the Winchester Disk Controller (WDC)
or Storage Module Device Controller Boards A and B
the Cartridge Tape Controller
and the Memory Subsystem
including ~he ECC Controller
and one or more Memory Arrays.
The lower three slots of the card cage are normally dedicated to the memory sUbsystem; with the addition of more
memory boards, the basic system can have a physical memory
of 2 megabytes, not including the small bootstrap memory on
the CPU board. An optional memory configuration uses the
lower five slots of the card cage for a maximum physical
memory of 4 megabytes.
An expansion chassis module will be available that can be
added to the system increasing the number of cards attached
to the bus from 10 to 18. This allows still more options.
1.2.
Functional Relationships
The diagram in Figure 1-9 shows the functional relationships
of the boards that make up the basic system. These elements
communicate with one a~other over Zilog's Z-Bus Backplane
Interconnect (ZBI), a high-speed, 32-bit, semisynchronous
bus. The following paragraphs briefly describe the functions of each element on the bus.
1.2.1. CPU Board (CPU): The CPU is the host of the System
8000; it controls the ZBI and terminal communications into
and out of the system. The CPU supports eight
serial I/O
ports and a parallel I/O port (Figure 1-9). The serial
ports are compatible with RS232-C. The parallel port, with
the appropriate jumpers inserted, is compatible with the
line printer standards of either Centronics or Data Products.
1-2
Zilog
1-2
HRM
Zilog
Figure 1-1
HRM
System 8000
1.2.2. Winchester Disk Controller (WDC): The disk controller enables the CPU to communicate with up to four 24 or
32 MB Winchester disk drives.
An intelligent bus module
with an on-board Z80B microprocessor, the controller can be
polled or interrupt-driven by the CPU.
The appropriate
jumper arrangement determines the controller's mode of
operation. The disk is organized into 512-byte sectors.
A
single command can cause the transfer of up to 128 512-byte
sectors. In addition, the disk controller uses a full-track
1-3
Zilog
1-3
HRM
Zilog
HRM
buffer which permits the transfer of 24 512-byte sectors in
one disk revolution.
1.2.3. storage Module Device Controller (SMDC): The SMDC
is a high performance controller (1.8 MB/second max. data
rate) linking the system ZBI backplane to the industry standard storage Module Device (SMD) interface. The SMDC consists of two cards, SMDC A and SMDC B. Card A connects to
the ZBI at the 96-pin board connector P1. It also connects
to the SMD A daisy-chain cable at plug P2.
Card B connects
to four SMD B radial cables. All drive connections are
through the P2 backplane connector.
Bit slice processor and sequencer logic control all the
operations of the SMDC.
The SMDC can control up to four
eight inch drives that have SMD interface.
SMDC features
include packet control, overlapped seek, automatic error
recovery, data buffering, flagged sectors, long writes and
reads, and self-test on power-up or system initialization.
The SMDC can be interrupt driven or operate in the polled
mode to the host when a packet is complete.
It gives a complete status report of the SMD and the controller.
1.2.4. Tape Cartridge Controller (TCC):
The tape controller is the intelligent interface between the CPU and up
to four cartridge tape drives. A Zilog Z80B microprocessor
controls the operation of the controller. The controller
uses direct-memory access (DMA) to transfer data between the
cartridge tape drive and the CPU. When the CPU wants to
initiate an operation, it sends a command to the controller.
The controller completes the specified operation and then
interrupt~ the CPU to notify it that the ope~ation is
complete.
1.2.5. M4~mory Subsystem: The Memory Subsystem includes an
Error Checking and Correcting (ECC) Controller board and one
or more Memory Array boards.
The ECC Controller can control the operation of up to 4
megabytes of dynamic read/write memory. The data can be
t ran s fer r l~ d as by t e s (e i g h t bit s), wo r d s (1 6 bit s), 0 r I o n g
words (32 bits); the controller translates the width of the
data and places the data in the proper locations. The controller transparently corrects all single-bit errors (soft)
and detects all double-bit errors (hard).
The controller
uses a soft-error logging system that counts soft errors in
each 64K-byte block of memory.
1-4
Zilog
1-4
Zilog
HRM
SEGMENTED/NIDN·SEGMENTED
OPERATING SYSTEM
CONFIGURATICIN JUMPERS
E1-E12
HRM
rEST POINTS
Z8001A
MICROPROCESSOR
BAUD RATE
GENERATORS
4 PROM
MONITORS
PARALLEL
PORT
CONSOLE BAUD RATE
SELECTOR SWITCH
AND BOOT DEVICE
8 SERIAL I/O
CHANNELS
3 MEMORY
MANAGEMENT
UNITS
PRINTER JUMPERS
E16,17,18
Figure 1-2
1-5
System 8000 CPU Board (CPU)
Zilog
1-5
HRM
Zilog
Figure 1-3
1-6
HRM
System 8000 Winchester Disk Controller (WDC)
Zilog
1-6
HRM
Zilog
HRM
Figure 1-4 System 8000 Storage Module
Device Controller (SMDC A)
1-7
Zilog
1-7
HRM
Zilog
HRM
Figure 1-5 System 8000 Storage Module
Device Controller (SMDC B)
1-8
Zilog
1-8
HRM
Zilog
Figure 1-6
1 -·9
HRM
System 8000 Tape Cartridge Controller (TCC)
Zilog
1-9
HRM
Zilog
Figure 1-7
1-10
HRM
System 8000 ECC Controller
. Zilog
1-10
HRM
Zi10g
Figure 1-8
1-11
HRM
1M Byte Memory Array (MEM)
Zi10g
1 -11
HRM
Zilog
HRM
In addition to data storage space, the memory arrays have
storage for the check bits used by the error checking and
correcting logic.
During memory transactions, all data
passes through the memory controller; ,the memory has no
direct connection to the system, bus (ZBI)
(Figure 1-9).
Instead, a high-speed, 32-bit bus connects the Memory Array
board to the ECC Controller board.
1.2.6. Secondary Serial Boards (SSB):
Up to two are- permitted in certain optional configurations. Each SSB provides for eight additional input/output (I/O) asynchronous
full duplex serial channels for terminal distribution to
TTYs 8 15 and 16
23.
Each SSB also provides a
Centronics/Data Products parallel printer port. The SSBs
are connected to the system backplane and supplement the
serial and parallel I/O on the CPU board. The Z8001A
microprocessor on the CPU board acts as the host and controls the SSB via the system Z-Bus Backplane Interconnect
(ZBI) .
1.3.
System Expansion
The System 8000 can be expanded by adding:
~
Disk drives up to a total of four,
~
Cartridge tape drives up to a total of four,
~
Memory Arrays up to a total of 4 Mbytes,
~
SSBs up to a total of 24 users and two parallel printer
ports.
Consult your sales representative for specific details
cerning optional configurations.
1-12
Zilog
con-
1-12
HRM
HRM
Zilog
UP TO 3 ADDITIONAL DRIVES
UP TO 24 TOTAL USERS
!
!
OPTION
r---,
r----,
I
I
I
I
L
/ -, I
,----------,
UP TO 3 TOTAL PORTS
,-L...
r.l-------.,.....,
rL...--------,
I
ILJ
DISK
DRIVE(S)
L
r-I::=:==:=:'i
I I
I I I
I I I
TAPE
DRIVE(S)
LJ
I
I
It
I I I
I
I
L
LJ J
J
DISK DRIVE
INTERFACE
(96·PIN FLAT
RIBBON CABLE)
TAPE DRIVE
INTERFACE
(96·PIN FLAT
RIBBON CABLE)
'r-~_-_------'-.lo_
SSB2
I
I
I
SECONDARY
SERIAL
BOARD
CARTRIDGE
TAPE
CONTROLLER
WINCHESTER
DISK
CONTROLLER
CPU
Z·BUS BACKPLANE INTERCONNECT (ZBI)
UP TO 3 ADDITIONAL
MEMORY ARRAY BOARDS
r--------.,I
I
SMDCA
CONTROLLER
EC'C
CONTROLLER
MEMORY ARRAY
I
I
I
9·TRACK TAPE
CONTROLLER
J
32·BIT ECC MEMORY BUS
r
I
I
L
SMD
TAPE DRIVE
DRIVE(S)
9·TRACK
_
....
_....I
UPTO 4
l
: UP TO 8
..J
FUTURE OPTION
00387
Figure 1-9
1-13
Syste~
8000, Functional Relationships
Zilog
1-13
HRM
1-14
Zilog
Zilog
HRM
1-14
Zilog
HRM
HRM
SECTION 2
SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS
2.1.
Introduction
This section contains information on the electrical, physical, and environmental specifications for a System 8000 having a single Disk/Tape module arid Processor module. The ZBI
backplane pin assignments are included for the printed wiring assemblies mounted in the processor card cage.
2.2.
Electrical Specifications
Table 2-1 lists the electrical specifications for the System
8000. All voltages in the following table are single phase,
and 47 to 63 hertz.
Table
2-1~
Electrical Specifications
JAPAN
PARAMETER
NOMINAL LINE
VOLTAGE
CURRENT (SUSTAINED)
CURRENT (SURGE)
FWSE MODULE
SYSTEM
U. S.A.·
EUROPE
UNITED
KINGDOM
CHARACTERISTICS
240 Vac
10%
+/-
100 Vac
10%
+/-
1 1 7 Vac
10%
+/-
220 Vac
10%
+/-
5A, . max.
5A, max.
3A, max.
3A, max.
8A, max.
8A, max.
4A, max.
4A, max.
3A
10A
1 .5A
5A
1 .5A
5A
3A
.10A
NOTE: Current requirements may change with variation
of system c()nfiguration.
2.3.
Performance·Specifications
Tables 2-2, 2-3, 2-4, and 2-5 define the performance characteristics of the system, Winchester disk, SMD, and cartridge
tape drives.
2-1
Zilog
2-1
HRM
Zilog
HRM
Table 2-2. System Performance Characteristics
ITEM
CHARACTERISTIC
Processor:
Segmented 48-pin Z8001A CPU
CPU Clock Frequency:
5.5 MHz
I/O:
Up to 24 RS-232C serial I/O ports and
three parallel printer ports (factory
set for Centronics Interface)
Baud
Rate:
From 110
software)
to
19,200
baud
(set
by
Front Panel:
Cutouts for keylock ON/OFF switch,
RESET
switch,
and
START switch.
Translucent plastic for three indicator lamps: POWER (+5V DC), USER (CPU
is in normal state), and DMA (CPU is
giving up the bus for Direct Memory
Access devices).
Refer to Figure 2-1.
Rear I/O Panels:
Up to seven 96-pin I/O Panel connectors. interface the CPU Module to other
Disk/Tape Module I/O Panels and terminal distribution panels. Each terminal distribution panel supplies' eight
25-pin (TTYO-TTY23) user terminal connections and one 25-pin printer port.
TTY1 is labeled console for System
Administrator.
CPU Module Power Supply:
35A Max, +5Vdc +/-0.4%
4A Max, +12Vdc +/-0.2%
2A Max, -5Vdc +/- 0.2%
DISK/TAPE Module Power Supply:
7.6A Max,
3.5A Max,
0.6A Max,
4.0A Max,
5.0A Max,
2.0A Max,
2-2
Zilog
+5Vdc +/-0.2%
-5Vdc +/-0.2%
+12Vdc +/-1.0%
-12Vdc +/-0.2%
+24Vdc +/-0.2%
-24Vdc +/-0.2%
2-2
Zilog
HRM
HRM
Environmental:
Operating temperature:
50 degrees F (10 degrees C) mInImum
104 degrees F (40 degrees C) maximum
Relative humidity: 80% noneondensing
Cabinet Size:
(Free Standing)
Height: 33 inches (84 em)
Width
19 inches (48 cm)
Depth: 24 inches (61 cm)
Total Weight:
Approximately 250 pounds (114 kg)
Rack Mount:
Overall Si ze :
Height: 5 ft. 8-1/2 inches (173.6 cm)
Width: 22-1/4 inches (56.6 em)
Depth: 31-1/2 inches (70.9 cm)
Total Weight:
Approximately 400 pounds (182 kg)
2-3
Zilog
2-3
HRM
Zilog
HRM
Table 2-3. 32 MB Winchester Disk Drive
Performance Characteristics
ITEM
CHARACTERISTIC
Data Capacity (Unformatted)
Bytes per Track
Bytes per Surface
Total per Disk Drive
13,440 bytes
8,010,240 bytes
32,040,960 bytes
Track Format
Variable
User Defined (refer to Zeus Adm.
Man. for details 03-3246) .
13,440
Number of Byte Clocks
Per Revolution
Recording Mode
Interface
Disks
NRZ
MFM
Data Transfer Rate
6.45 Mbit/s (806 kByte/s)
Data Interface
NRZ DATA
Rotational Speed
3600 r/min +1.5%
Average Latency
8.33 ms
Tracks Per Surface
600
Step Pulse Rate
50 kHz +20%
(20 microseconds
between Step pulses)
Single Track Seek Time
10
IDS
Average Seek Time
(Step Pulse Rate of 50 kHz +20%)
50
IDS
Maximum Seek Time
( 605 Tr ac k s ) ( S t e p P u1 s e
Rate of 50 kHz +20%)
100
+
CLOCK
Max.
IDS
Allowable Read Error Rates:
Hard:
So ft:
<1 in 10 12 bit s
<1 in 10 10 bit s
Allowable Seek Error Rate:
<1 in. 10 6 seeks
2-4
To be supplied
Zilog
2-4
Zilog
HRM
HRM
Table 2-4. SMD Performance Characteristics
ITEM
CHARACTERISTIC
Storage Capacity
84,439,040 Bytes
Number of Cylinders
589
Tracks per Cylinder
7
Cylinder Capacity
143,360 Bytes
Track Capacity
20,480 Bytes
Average Rotational Latency
8.3 ms
Positioning Time
Track to Track
Average
Max imum
5 ms
20 ms
40 ms
Rotational Speed
3600 RPM +-1%
Transfer Rate
1. 229MByte/ sec
Encoding Method
MFM
Interface Data
NRZ
Recording Density
9550 BPI
Track Density
720 TPI
Start/Stop Time
<20/ <40 sec
Interface
SMD
Number of Sectors
128 (maximum)
(refer to Zeus Adm. Man.
for details 03-3246)
Allowable Read Error Rates:
Hard:
So ft:
10 per 10 14
10 per 10 11
Allowable Seek Error Rates:
10 per 10 8 seeks
(correctable)
2-5
Zilog
(Ma x )
bits (Max)
2-5
HRM
Zilog
HRM
Table 2-5. Tape Cartridge Drive Performance Charact,eristics
ITEM
CHARACTERISTIC
Storage Capacity (Unformatted)
17.2 Mbytes max.
Read/Write speed
30 inches per second (ips)
Rewind/Search speed
90 inches per second (ips)
Tracks
4
Recording density
6400 BPI
Data Transfer Rate
192,000 Bits/Sec
Error Ra tes
<1 Error in 10 8 Bits
LOCK
GON
D
D
RESET
-
SYSTEM
aooo
START
POWER
USER
DMA
Figure 2-1
2.4.
The
in
the
its
2-6
Processor Module Controls and Indicators
Modules
modules, with their side panels removed, can be mounted
standard 19-inch racks. In stand-alone configurations,
modules are stacked. The dimensions of the module with
side panel removed are given in Figure 2-2.
Zilog
2-6
HRM
Zilog
HRH
SIDE VIEW
TOP VIEW
LINEAR
POWER SUPPLY
IUNE
FILTER
SWITCHING POWER SUPPLY
f
I
I
...
D
8.05cm
(20.5 inches)
-
~
D
CARD CAGE
...
10-
.\
_ - .- - - - - - - 6 . 8 8 c m
(17.5 inches)
1
_2.85cm_!
(7.25 inches)
\
FRONT VIEW
..
~
-
==
=
-
'"-
t:=:::
t:=:::
--'"-
c=:
~
~
---.
~
I..
-
~
~
Figure 2-2
2-7
CARD CAGE
I"'"'"
==
:==
--:==
=
'==
......
00385
Module Dimensions (Without Side Pan~ls)
Zilog
2-7
HRM
HRM
Zilog
2.4.1. I/O Connectors: Figures 2-3 and 2-4 identIfy the
96-pin terminal, disk, tape, SMD, and optional I/O connectors on the two Processor Module I/O connector panels for
Models 21 and 31. Tte two panels are cabled to the I/O and
terminal distribution panels on the Disk/Tape and Accessory
Modules of the system configuration. Table 2-6 lists the
required mating connector cable and sources.
Table 2-7
lists the pin assignments of the serial (TTY) I/O connectors. Table 2-8 lists the pin assignments of the parallel
printer connectors.
The terminal distribution panel is normally located on the
rear of the Disk/Tape Module. It can be located on other
modules depending on the system configuration (Figures 33,3-5, Section 3).
0
0~
0
?
~
~
~
OPTION
?
DISK OUT
<
~
0~
CARTRIDGE TAPE
OUT
Q
6)
?
OPTION
~
~
~
OPTION
?
OPTION
0<
~
OPTION
Figure ;2-3
2-8
TERMINAL OUT
M
co
Q
M
0
0
Model .21 processor Module I/O Connector Panel
Zilog
2-8
HRM
Zilog
HRM
<9~
~
~
~
~
~
<9 <
~
<9~
<9
<9
TERMINAL OUT
OPTION
OPTION
CARTRIDGE TAPE
OUT
Q
<9
~
~
~
~
~
SMDC·A OUT
<
~
OPTION
Figure 2-4
OPTION
SMDC·B OUT
'l:t
co
Q
M
0
0
Model 31 processor Module IIO Connector Panel
Table 2-6.
I/O Connectors
VENDOR/PART NUMBER
DESIGNATION
DESCRIPTION
Printer
25-pin D Connector
ITT Cannon
DBUE25SBB
TTYO-TTY7
25-pin D Connector
TRW Cinch
DBUE25SBF
Terminal
Expansion
Cable
96-pin Din Connector
(both E~nds)
Zilog Cable
PIN 59-0217
Disk Drive
Cable
96-pin Din Connector
(both E~nd s)
Zilog Cable
PIN 59-0217
Tape Drive
Cable
96-pin Din Connector
(both ends)
Zilog Cable
PIN 59-0217
2-9
Zilog
2-9
HRM
HRM
Zilog
Table 2-7.
TTY Connector, Pin Assignments
SIGNAL KAME
PIN
7
20
4
2
Ground
DTR
RTS
TXD
DSR
CTS
RXD
Table 2-8.
6
5
3
Printer Connector, Pin Assignments
Data P]'ooducts Interface
Signal Name
P2 Bac]<:plane
DATA 0
DATA 1
DATA 2
DATA 3
DATA 4
DATA 5
DATA 6
DATA 7
DATA STROBE
INPUT PRIME
DATA DEMAND
FAULT
READY
ONLINE
SIGNAL GROUND
P2-1C
P2-2C
P2-3C
P2-5C
P2-6C
P2-8C
P2-9C
Not Us,~d
P2-12C
Not USI~d
P2-16C
P2-20C
P2-17C
P2-21C
P2-19C
2-10
Printer Port
Connector
Pins
Printer
Connector
Pins
1
2
3
4
5'
6
B
F
L
R
7
V
Z
n
Not Used
Not Used
9
j
Not Used
Not Used
11
E
12
23
cc
C
24
y
22
X
Zilog
2-10
HRM
Zilog
HRM
Cent.ronics Interface
Slgnal Name
P2 Bac:kplane
DATA 0
DATA 1
DATA 2
DATA 3.
DATA 4
DATA 5
DATA 6
DATA 7
DATA STROBE
INPUT PRIME
ACKNOWLEDGE
FAULT
GROUND
GROUND
GROUND
BUSY
SELECT
P2-1C
P2-2C
P2-3C
P2-5C
P2-6C
P2-8C
P2-9C
Not Used
P2-12C
Not Used
P2-16C
P2-20C
P2-32C
P2-32B
P2-32A
P2-17C
P2-21C
2.5.
Printer Port
Co:nnector .
Pins
Printer
Connector
Pins
1
2
3
4
5
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Not Used
1
Not Used
10
32
24
25
26
11
13
6
7
Not Used
9
Not Used
11
12
18
19
20
23
24
Backplane (ZBI) Pin Assignments
Figure 2-5 and 2-6 show the backplane slot assignments for
Processor Module Printed Wiring Asssemblies (PWA's). The
connectors designated J11 through J20 (on the right) connect
to the ZBI system bus.
The connectors designated J21
through J30 (on the left) are auxiliary connectors. The P2
connectors J22, J25, J26, and J27 are labeled optional and
allow for future board configuration. The pin assignments
of all ZBI connectors are the same. Table 2-9 lists the ZBI
pin assignments.
2-11
Zilog
2-11
lilog
HRM
HRM
Table 2·.. 9. ZBI Backplane Connector Pin Assignments
(J11 through J20)
PIN
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
Row A
SIGNAL
Row B
SIGNAL
Row C
SIGNAL
RESET\
CAI\
BAI\
MMAI\
IEI3
IEI2
IEI1
INT1\
R/W\
S2
SO
ME\
WAIT\
CAO\
BAO\
MMAO\
IE03
IE02
IE01
INT2\
CAVAIL
CPUREQ\
BUSREQ\
GND
MMREQ\
AD31
AD28
AD25
AD22
AD20
AD17
AD14
AD11
AD9
AD6
AD3
ADO
PWRBAD\
+5v
-5v
+12v* 'It
-12v*
GND
S3
S1
AS\
STOP\
GND
INT3\
W/LW\
S4
GND
DS\
N/S\
AD29
AD26
AD23
AD21
AD18
AD15
AD12
AD10
AD7
AD4
AD1
MCLK
+5v
-5v
+12v**
-12v*
GND
GND
AD30
AD27
AD24
GND
AD19
AD16
AD13
GND
AD8
AD5
AD2
BLCK
+5v
-5v
+12v**
-12v*
GND
B/W\
*
-12v is allocated space on the lBI backplane,
not used nor generated by the System 8000
but
is
**
+12V is allocated space on the lBI
not used.
but
is
2-12
.
lilog
backplane,
2-12
HRM
Zilog
HRM
The pin assignments for the PWA'S installed in backplane
connectors P2/J21 through P2/J30 are described in Tables 210 through 2-16.
The following list indicates the tables
and their present respective board assignments:
1. Table 2-10:
Connector J21, CPU Board
2. Table 2-11:
Connector J22, Secondary Serial Board
(Option)
3. Table 2-12:
Connector J23, Winchester Disk Controller Board
(Model 21 only)
4. Table 2-13:
Connector J24, Tape Cartridge Controller Board
5. Table 2-14:
Connector J26, Storage Module Device Controller A
(Model 31 onl y)
6. Table 2-15:
Connector J27, Storage Module Device Controller B
(Model 31 onl y)
7. Table 2-16:
Connectors J28 through J30, are dedicated for the
memory bus
(Memory Subsystem Controller and Memory
boards) .
2-13
Zilog
2-13
HRM
HRM
Zilog
• EXTENDED SERIAL ItO
P2
J2i
I
J221
P1
I
CPU
CPU
Ji1
UNASSIGNED
OPT
Ji21
WDC
Ji3
J231 WINCHESTER D18K CONTRLR.
I
ZBIBUS
ZBIBUS
ZBI BUS
J241
TAPE CONTnOLLER
TCC
Ji41
J2S1
UNASSIGNED
OPT
J1S
J 26 1
UNASSIGNED
OPT
Ji61
ZBI BUS
J271
UNASSIGNED
OPT
J171
ZBIBUS
J2S1
MEMORY CONTROLLER
J291
MEMOR'f 1M
J30
I
MEMORY 1M
I
I
IMEM
I
I
JiS
I
I
MEM
Ji91
MEM
J20
I
ZBIBUS
ZBIBUS
ZSI BUS
ZBIBUS
ZBIBUS
00163
Figure 2-5
2-14
Model 21 Backplane Slot Assignments
for Processor Module PWA's
Zilog
2-14
HRM
Zilog
HRM
• EXTENDED SERIAL I/O
P2
I
P1
I
CPU
I CPU
J11
J221
UNASSIGNED
IOPT
J121
J231
UNASSIGNED
IOPT
J13
J21
J241
J25
I
TAPE CONTROLLER
UNt\SSIGNED
I TCC
I
J14 I
I
J15
OPT
I
ZBI BUS
ZBIBUS
ZBI SUS
ZBIBUS
ZBI BUS
J261
SMDCA
ISMDCA J161
ZBIBUS
J27 [
SMDCB
ISMDCS J171
ZBIBUS
J281
MEMORY CONTROLLER
I
ZBIBUS
J291
MEMORY 1M
I MEM
J191
MEMORY 1M
IMEM
J20
J30
I
ECC
J18
I
I
ZSI BUS
ZSISUS
00382
Figure 2-6
2-15
Model 31 Backplane Slot Assignments
for Processor Module PWA's
Zilog
2-15
HRM
Zilog
Table 2-10.
PIN
')
~-
3
l~
t.)
6
7
l3
9
"0
'1 1
'12
'13
'14
'15
'16
'17
'18
'19
20
:21
~22
:23
24
:25
6
:27
~2
28
29
30
31
32
:2-16
HRM
CPU Board, Connector P2/J21, Slot 1
Row A
SIGNAL
Row B
SIGNAL
Row C
SIGNAL
TXRTNO
TXDO
RTSO
DSRO
TXD1
RTS1
DSR1
TXD2
RTS2
DSR2
TXD3
RTS3
DSR3
TXD4
RTS4
DSR4
TXD5
RTS5
DS·R5
TXD6
RTS6
DSR6
TXD7
RTS7
DSR7
TXRTN3
TXRTN4
+5v
-5v
+12v
-12v
GND
RXDO
CTSO
DTRO
RXD1
CTS1
DTR1
RXD2
CTS2
DTR2
RXD3
CTS3
DTR3
RXD4
CTS4
DTR4
RXD5
CTS5
DTR5
RXD6
CTS6
DTR6
RXD7
CTS7
DTR7
TXRTN5
TXRTN6
TXRTN7
+5v
-5v
+12v
-12v
GND
DATAO
DATA1
DATA2
GND
DATA3
DATA4
GND
DATA5
DATA6
DATA7
GND
DATA STROBE/DATA STROBE\
N.U./INPUT PRIME
TXRTN1
GND
D.D./ACKNOWLEDGE\
BUSY\
TXRTN2
GND
IFVALID/FAULT\
ON-LINE/SELECT
F.P BUSACK INDICATOR
F.P. POWER-ON INDICATOR (GND)
F.P. NORMAL INDICATOR
NMI SWITCH (NORMALLY CLOSED)
NMI SWITCH (NORMALLY OPEN)
SW RESET
F.P. INDICATOR V+ (+5v)
-5v
+12v
-12v
GND
Zilog
2-16
HRM
Zilog
Table 2-11.
PIN
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
2-17
HRM
Secondary Serial Board Connector
P2/J22, Slots 2,5 (Optional)
Row A
SIGNAL
Row B
SIGNAL
Row C
SIGNAL
TXRTNO
TXDO
RTSO
DSRO
TXD1
RTS1
DSR1
TXD2
RTS2
DSR2
TXD3
RTS3
DSR3
TXD4
RTS4
DSR4
TXD5
RTS"5
DSR5
TXD6
RTS6
DSR6
TXD7
RTS7
DSR7
TXRTN3
TXRTN4
+5v
-5v
+12v
-12v
GND
RXDO
CTSO
DTRO
RXD1
CTS1
DTR1
RXD2
CTS2
DTR2
RXD3
CTS3
DTR3
RXD4
CTS4
DTR4
RXD5
CTS5
DTR5
RXD6
CTS6
DTR6
RXD7
CTS7
DTR7
TXRTN5
TXRTN6
TXRTN7
+5v
-5v
+12v
-12v
GND
DATAO
DATA1
DATA2
GND
DATA3
DATA4
GND
DATA5
DATA6
DATA7
GND
DATA STROBE/DATA STROBE\
N.U/INPUT PRIME
TXRTN1
GND
D.D./ACKNOWLEDGE\
BUSY\
TXRTN2
GND
IFVALID/FAULT\
ON-LINE/SELECT
GND
N.V./LP. CaNT
+5v
-5v
+12v
-12v
GND
Zilog
2-17
HRM
Table 2-12.
PIN
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
2-18
HRM
Zilog
Winchester Disk Controller Connector
P2/J23, Slot 3 (Model 21 Only)
Row A
SIGNAL
CBO
CB2
CB3
CB5
CB6
DIRECTION\
CWDO\
CYACK\
INDEX\
WRITE CLK\
DRIVEFAULT\
SYSTEMCLK
UNITACKO\
BI-DATA\
UNITACK2\
READ-ENABLE\
MASTER RESET\
WRITE ENABLE
Row B
SIGNAL
Row C
SIGNAL
CB1
CB4
GND
CB7
GND
CWD1\
ATTN\
SECTOR\
SEEKEND\
WRITE-CLK
ATTACK
SYSTEMCLK\
UNITACK1\
BI-DATA
UNITACK3\
READ ENABLE
WRITE ENABLE\
GND
GND
GND
GND
+5v
-5v
+12v
-12v
GND
+5v
-5v
+12v
-12v
GND
+5v
-5v
+12v
-12v
GND
Zilog
2-18
HHM
Zilog
HRM
Table 2-13. Tape Cartridge Controller,
Connector P2/J24, Slot 4
PIN
Row A
SIGNAL
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
11.1·
15
16
17
18
1a
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
./
2-,19
+5v
-5v
+12v
-12v
GND
Row B
SIGNAL
Row C
SIGNAL
SLD\
RDY\
WND\
FLG\
LPS\
FUP\
BSY\
EWS\
RWD\
REV\
FWD\
HSP\
WEN\
SL1\
SL2\
SL4\
SLG\
RNZ\
RDS\
DAD\
WDE\
WNZ\
TR2\
WDS\
TR1\
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
+5v
-5v
+12v
-12v
GND
+5v
-5v
+12v
-12v
GND
Zilog
2-19
HRM
HRM
Zilog
Table 2-14. Storage Module Device Controller Board A
Connector P2/J26, Slot 6 (Model 31)
PIN
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
1 8.
19
Row B
SIGNAL
Row C
SIGNAL
SELTAGHEADTAG+
CONTAGSEL2+
SEL8SEL4+
SEL1-
SELTAG+
HEADTAGCONTAG+
GND
SEL8+
SEL4GND
BIT2+
BITOBITO+
BIt3+
SPARE-
INDEX+
BIT4+
BIT5+
BIT8BIT6INDEX-
BIT1BIT1+
GND
BIT7BIT7+
BIT9GND
BIT5BIT8+
BI1.6+
GND
OPENCABLESECTORSKERR ..
READYREADY+
+5Vdc
-5Vdc
+12Vdc
-12Vdc
GND
HOLD/PICK+
FAULT+
OPENCABLE+
ONCYLSECTOR+
WPROT+
BUSY+5Vdc
-5Vdc
+12Vdc
-12Vdc
GND
HOLD/PICKFAULTGND
ONCYL+
SKERR+
WPROTBUSY+
+5Vdc
-5Vdc
+12Vdc
-12Vdc
GND
RO'tl A
SIGNAL
CYLTAG+
CYLTAGSEL2SEL1+
BIT2BIT3BIT9+
SPARE+
BIT4-
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
2-20
Zilog
2-20
HRM
HRM
Zilog
Table 2-15. Storage Module Device Controller B
Connector P2/J27, Slot 7 (Model 31)
PIN
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
2-21
Row A
SIGNAL
Row B
SIGNAL
Row C
SIGNAL
3·WRITECLK3.WRITECLK+ .
3.WRITEDATA+
3.WRITEDATA-
3·SERVOCLK3.READDATA3·READCLK3.READCLK+
3.SELECTED+
3·SEEKEND+.
3·SERVOCLK+
3·READDATA+
GND
3·SELECTED3·SEEKENDGND
2.SERVOCLK+
2.READDATA+
2.READCLK2.SELECTED2.SEEKEND1 . SERVOCLK1.SERVOCLK+
1.READDATA+
1.READCLK+
1 . SELECTED+
1.SEEKENDO.SEEKENDO.SELECTED+
O.WRITEDATA+
O.WRITEDATAO.WRITECLK+
O.READCLK+
O.READDATA+
+5Vdc
-5Vdc
+12Vdc
-12Vdc
GND
2.SERVOCLK2.READDATAGND
2.READCLK+
2.SELECTED+
2.SEEKEND+
GND
1.READDATA1 . READCLK1.SELECTEDGND
1.SEEKEND+
O. S"EEKE ND+
O.SELECTEDGND
O.WRITECLKO.READCLKO.READDATAO.SERVOCLK+5Vdc
-5Vdc
+12Vdc
-12Vdc
GND
2.WRITECLK+
2.WRITECLK2.WRITEDATA2.WRITEDATA+
1 . WRITECLK1.WRITECLK+
1.WRITEDATA+
1. WRITEDATA-
O.SERVOCLK+
+5Vdc
-5Vdc
+12Vdc
-12Vdc
GND
Zilog
2-21
Zilog
HRM
Table 2-16.
PIN
')
1_
:3
Ii
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
,20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
2-22
HRM
System 8000 Memory Bus, Connector P21 Jr28
to P2/30, Slots 8 through 10
Row A
SIGNAL
Row B
SIGNAL
MD38\
MD36\
MD34\
MD32\
MD30\
MD28\
MD26\
MD24\
MD22\
MD20\
MD18\
MD16\
MD14\
MD12\
MD10\
MD08\
MD06\
MD04\
MD02\
MDOO\
MA17
MA19
MA21
MA23
RC1\
RC3\
RC5\
+5v
-5v
+12v
-12v
GND
MD37\
MD35\
MD33\
MD31\
MD29\
MD27\
MD25\
MD23\
MD21\
MD19\
MD17\
MD15\
MD13\
MD11\
MDOg\
MD07\
MD05\
MD03\
MD01\
MA16
MA18
MA20
MA22
RCO\
RC2\
RC4\
RC6\
+5v
-5v
+12v
-12v
GND
Row C
SIGNAL
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
RC7\
BD SELECT\
READ\
GND
RAS\
REF\a
CAS\
WRITE\
+5v
-5v
+12v
-12v
GND
Zilog
2-22
Zilog
HRM
HRM
SECTION 3
INSTALLATION
3.1.
Introduction
This section contains detailed information on the following:
~
Receiving, unpacking, and Inspecting the System 8000
~
Installation Procedures
Winchester Disk Drive
Checkout Procedures
and
SMD
Configuration
~
Parallel Line Printer Installation Procedures
~
System power-Up Diagnostics (SPUD)
~
System Expansion
3.2.
and
Unpacking, Inspection, and Reshipment Procedures
The following paragraphs explain how the System 8000 is
shipped to the customer and how to properly unpack ,and
inspect the system. Also included is the method for repacking a system that i~ being returned to the factory.
3.2.1. Shipping Container: The System 8000 is shipped in
the fully .loaded configuration; all Printed Wiring Assemblies (PWAs) are installed. Before shipment: the side and
front panels are installed on each module. The system is
protected by foam inserts. Except for the casters, the complete system is covered by a cardboard box. The box is
secured to a pallet by straps passing under the pallet and
over the box in two directions.
In addition to the system shipping container, another container will be shipped containing the system documentation,
operating system and diagnostic tapes.
3.2.2. Unpacking and Inspection Procedures: The System
8000 is shipped in a reusable container. Save all packing
materials, such as boxes, foam inserts and supports, in case
the system is reshipped.
3-1
Zilog
3-1
HRM
Zilog
HRM
The following unpacking and inspection procedure
per formed:
should
be
(1)
Inspect the shipping container for damage. Request the
carrier'S agent to remain until the inspection and
inventory have been completed.
(2)
Remove the cardboard box from the system by lifting
straight up.
(3)
Remove the foam inserts and spacers.
(4)
Inspect the system cabinet and panels for damage
marks and dents).
(5)
Before accepting delivery of a System 8000, note on the
waybill any obvious external damage found upon inspection, and request the delivery agent to sign the waybill.
Then immediately notify the transfer agent and
submit a damage report to the company and to Zilog Inc.
it
(e.g.
3.2.3. Internal Inspection: Unusual shipping and handling
damage that is not obvious from external visual inspections,
may have occurred. The following internal inspection procedures should be performed on the Processor and Disk/Tape
Modules:
PROCESSOR MODULE
(1)
Remove the front panel and foam insert.
(2)
Loosen the fasteners that secure the top cover; slide
it back from the guideposts, and remove from system.
(3)
Using Figure 2-4 (Card Cage Backplane, Slot Assignments) 1 check each printed wiring assembly by slot, and
type of board installed.
(4)
Examine each board to ensure it is properly
its appropriate backplane connector.
(5)
Remove the sheet metal covers for
power supply.
(6)
Examine all cable harnesses for signs of stress (broken
terminals, loose or broken wires, broken cable straps).
(7)
Examine the Z-Bus Backplane Interconnect (ZBI), on the
rear of the card cage, for signs of stress (cracks,
broken or lifted traces, damaged connectors).
3-2
Zilog
the
card
seated
cage
in
and
3-2
HRM
Zilog
HRM
(8)
Check the I/O connector panel at the rear of the module
for the same stresses described in step 7.
(9)
Verify the AC line voltage set on the power supply with
the AC voltage specified on the module ID plate. If
there is a difference, notify Zilog Field Service.
NOTE
AC line voltages are switch selectable. A SWITCH
POSITION/LINE
VOLTAGE
selection
matrix
is
silkscreened on the power supply cover; shown are
the available line voltages. Refer to Figure 3-1.
WARNING
The line voltage setting must only be performed by
Zilog Field Service personnel. Improper switch
settings could damage the system.
3-3
Zilog
3-3
Zilog
HRM
HRM
This illustration shows switche~ 31, 52 and
line voltage of 110/130.
1115V
I
I I
230V
~
set
for
a
WARNING
51
IMPROPER VOLTAGE SWITCH
SETTING COULD CAUSE SYSTEM
DAMAGE.
130 ~9
~9 ~
90
LINE{
VOLTt,GE
52
SWIlCH{
POSITION
CJ
33
210
2~
250
51
115
115
230
230
52
115
230
115
230
53
115
115
230
230
53
00404
Figure 3-1
AC Line Voltages, Processor Module
After the internal ins~ection of the Processor
complete, proceed to the Disk/Tape Module.
Module
is
DISK/T4PE MODULE
The Processor Module must be removed from the top of the
Disk/Tape Module to access the Disk/Tape module components.
(1)
3-4
Remove the
fr~nt
panel from the Processor Module.
Zilog
3-4
HRM
(2)
Zilog
HRM
Remove the Processor Module as follows:
a.
Unfasten two (2) intermodule captive fasteners
the rear of the module.
on
b.
Slide the Processor Module back and disengage from
the guide posts on the Disk/Tape Module.
c.
Remove the Processor Module and set aside.
(3)
Examine all Disk/Tape Module cable harnesses for signs
of stress (broken terminals, loose or broken wires,
broken cable straps).
(4)
Make sure all harness connectors are securely
to their mating connectors.
(5)
Model 21: Check that the rotary-arm shipping lock on
the FINCH Disk Drive (locate.d atop the environmental
enclosure) is in the SHIP position (heads locked).
Model 31: For SMD drives, check that the locking lever
at the bottom front of the drive is in the SHIPPING
(locked) position.
(6)
Verify the AC line voltage set on the power supply with
the AC voltage specified on th~ module ID plate.
If
there is a difference notify Zilog Fieid Service.
(7)
Reassemble and interconnect
steps 2 and 1.
the
system
by
fastened
reversing
NOTE
. AC line voltages are switch selectable. A SWITCH
POSITION/LINE
VOLTAGE
selection
matrix
is
silkscreenedon the power supply cover; shown are
the available line voltages. Re~er to Figure 3-2.
WARNING
The line volt;age setting must only be per~ormed by
Zilog Field Service personnel. Improper switch
settings could damage the system.
This illustration shows switches S1 and S2 set for
a line voltage of 110/130.
3-5
Zilog
3-5
HRM
HRM
Zilog
SWITCH
POSITION
WARNING:
IMPROPER VOLTAGE SWITCH
SETTING COULD CAUSE SYSTEM
DAMAGE. THE SETTIUG IS TO
BE PERFORMED BY 2:1LOG FIELD
PERSONNEL ONLY.
LINE
VOLTAGE
S1
S2
90·109
115
115
110·130
115
230
210-229
230
115
230·250
230
230
~
I230VI
)
I I
l:::::::::=::===========================================================J!
00290
Figure 3-2
AC Line Voltages Disk/Tape Module
NOTE
If the system is (~onfigured wi th a Disk Modulf~,
repeat the Disk/Tape Module internal inspectic)n
procedure.
3.2.4.
Reshipment Procedures: The following procedures
should be followed if the System 8000 must be reshipped:
( 1)
Unplug the AC input cable from the facility
outlet and on the rear of the Processor Module.
(2)
Un pI ug and remove the AC intermodule jumper cabll=s.
( 3)
Un fasten and open the cable ducts on the
system .
3-6
Zilog
rear
power
of
the
3-6
HRM
Zilog
HRM
(4)
Unplug and remove the terminal distribution,
tape intermodule jumper cables.
(5)
Place the cables removed in steps
Accessory Module.
(6)
Place the operating system tape and the SADIE
tic tape in the Accessory Module.
(1)
Before reshipping the Model 21 system, the Winchester
Disk Drive(s) read/write heads must be locked.
through
4
disk
and
in
the
diagnos-
a.
Model 21: Using the flat end of the lock/unlock
tool, or a screwdriver, lift and disengage the
rotary-arm shipping lock.
Push the rotary-arm
shipping lock toward the rear of the drive until
it locks into the SHIP position. Refer to paragraph 3.4.3.
b.
Model 31: The SMD drives lock the read/write heads
by moving the locking lever to the SHIP position
but the lever is located at the bottom front of
the drives.
(8)
Place the panel key in an envelope and
envelope securely to the top of the system.
tape
the
(9)
Tape or strap foam spacers into position to prevent the
cardboard shipping container from making contact with
the system.
(10) Slip the cardboard shipping container over the system.
3.3.
Installation Procedures
The following paragraphs cover moving the system to the
site,
system interconnection, disk drive configuration
checks, power-up procedures, and System power-Up Diagnostics
(SPUD) .
3.3.1. Site Preparation: After completing the unpacking
and inspection of the System 8000 enclosure and peripherals
for possible damage, the equipment must be moved to the
site.
Ensure that the site has proper ventilation, good lighting,
and that the required voltage is present at the receptacle
that will power the system. When positioning the system,
make sure that it can be easily rolled away from walls or
3-7
Zilog
3-1
HRM
2ilog
HRM
other equipment for maintenance purposes.
3.3.2. System Inter(~onnection: A typical system as shipped
from the factory consists of four stacked m~dules and the
four castor base of the enclosure. CRT terminals and highspeed printers interface to the system by eight RS232C
serial ports and a pHrallel printer port on each of the rear
terminal distribution panels. They are normally located on
the rear of the Disk/Tape Module. Identification of the I/O
Panel and terminal distribution panel connectors is shown in
Figures 3-3 and 3-4 for Models 21 and 31.
The stackable module packaging concept allows additional
peripherals, Disk or DisK/Tape Modules, to be integrated
into the system as dictated by appl ication requiremE~nts.
Interconnect Procedure
(1)
Model 21: Install the tape and disk interface cables
between the CARTRIDGE TAPE OUT and DISK OUT connectors
on the Processor I/O panel and CARTRIIDGE TAPE IN and
DISK IN I/O panel connectors of the Disk/Tape module.
For a second Disk/Tap~ module, I/O panel outputs from
the top Disk/Tape module connect to the disk and tape
inputs on the lowe'r module. Refer to Figure 3-5 for
Model 21 cable orientation.
Model 31: Install the tape and SMD interface cables
between CARTRIDGE TAPE OUT, SMDC A OUT, and SMDC BOUT
on the Processor I/O panels and CARTRIDGE TAPE IN, SMDC
A IN, and SMDC B IN on the Disk/Tape Module. For a
second Disk Module, an OUT connector and separate DRIVE
1,2,and 3 connectors on the SMDC I/O panel are connected to the IN and appropriate DRIVE connections on
the second Disk Module SMDC I/O panel. Refer to Figure
3-6 for Model 31 cable orientation.
(2)
Install the terminal interface cable between the Processor Module TERMINAL OUT and TERMINAL IN on the first
terminal distribution panel.
(3)
Install short AC power cables between modul es from top
to bottom module in daisy-chain configuration. The main
power cord plugs into the Processor Module.
(4)
Position the peripheral components (terminals
and
printers) for easy access to the terminal distribution
panel I/O ports and to the facility AC power.
3-8
2ilog
3-8
HRM
Zilog
(5)
The terminal used for system bootstrap should be
nected to the terminal I/O port labeled CONSOLE.
(6)
Connect the user terminals, as required, to the terminal I/O ports labeled TTYO, or TTY2 through TTY7.
(7)
If the system is configured for the 16 user option,
cable the Processor Module I/O panel OPTION connector
to the second terminal distribution panel TERMINAL IN
connector.
Connect the next eight (8) terminals to I/O
ports TTY8 through TTY15, on the second terminal distribution panel.
(8)
Connect the line printer interface cable to the first
terminal
distribution panel parallel port labeled
PRINTER 1.
(9)
If an additional terminal distribution panel is supplied with the system, connect the printer interface
cable to the I/O ports labelled PRINTER 2.
(10) Connect the system, all terminals,
printer(s) to facility AC power.
3-9
Zilog
HRM
and
the
con-
line
3-9
HRM
Zilog
HRM
1
19
19
<
~
~
19
19
~
~
TERMINAL O U c = J
OPTION
=:J
DISKOUT
~
CARTRIDGE TAPE ~
OPTION
"I:c
~
<
OPTION
~
<
19
OPTION
==:}
o
19
==:}
==:}
OPTION
~
(')
c
...mc
~
/OiD
ee
\
'~
"moo~~]~~~~
19
19
I""
\
~
~
<
~
TERMINAL IN
DISKIN
CARTRIDGE
CARTRIDGE
~
\
PRINTER 1
~
~ ...
o
i'
TAPE~
=:::J
'9
10iD
A
ee
T
IN
~~rn~lrn~~~"
19\
19
~
<
~
1&
<
TERMINAL IN
DISKIN
CARTRIDGE
CARTRIDGE
~
\
PRINTER 2
"
I:
o
c
TAP!~
=:::J
<Sl
10iD
A
ee
IN
[C~l
"m ~ ~ ~I ~ il ~ ~"
t;)
\
TERMINAL IN
~
\
~\
m
19
==::J
c
c
J-
IQ
TAF~
DISK OUT
=t
"I:m
TAP~
DISK OUT
en
J-
l~
"ii
==:J
c
PRINTER 3
...cm
I\)
J-
(')
(')
m
fit
fit
I
o
-<
19
::D
a:
o
c
c
,.m
n
u-
. ..JL
00351
MODEL 21
Figure 3-3
3-10
Model 21 Connector Identification
-- Sample Configuration
Zilog
3-10
HRM
HRM
Zilog
1
(
{-~
~'INALOUT
1
~)PTION
)
~)PTION
?
~
<
CARTRIDGE TAPE OUT
N
~}
n
c
"3:
S>
o
,~,
I
I
I
I
'" c=:::2.PTION
~CAOUT
c:
(')
SMCIC BOUT
~TION
o
C
r-
m
0
IOiEJ
ee
A
"ur
IN
\
.:oJ
""~ISKIN
~)GETAPEIN
?
<
?
CARTRIDGE TAPE OUT
I
<rmlKOUT
<")
II
O~ICBIN
0
~ICAIN
f-
-
~
-
.~
0
-.-
-
-
-
-
.- -
I
-
-
--,
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ .J
~DAISYOUT
0
I
I0
I
lOUT I
DRIVE 3 OUT
DRIVE 2 OUT
DRIVE
-
-
-
-
-
.-
I D-RI~;O-O~TI
0
~,
!'
IOit]
ee
IOit]
ee
IN
r
rn ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~'I
\
0
~)AISYIN
I
c::::JM!E]AISY out
I
.~
f)
5lz
8
0
o
I
I
~.
TERMlr~
\
.~
I
I
PRINTER 1
<')
~~~~~~
~RMIN~
0
\
1°
DRiVe IN
IN
Qr
•n
~'
PRINTER 2
( ')
m
fn
en
IS>
o
::D
-<
3:
o
o
,.cm
I
11
U
r-L
00394
MODEL 31
Figure 3-4
3-11
Model 31 Connector Identification
-- Sample Configuration
Zilog
3 -11
Zilog
HRM
}- -\
I)
\
4
4
I
-
(
~
HRM
,~
G
TE
-
~MINAl
OUT
7
\
OPTION
n
~ DISK OUT
r---
~IDaE TAPE OUT
(9
~~-~
c::==
II
I
~
OPTION
?
OPTIOH
i
C::==0PTlON
)
<==OPTlOH
>
<9
I
I
)
S
."
C
)
~
o
o
,..c
)
10io
'Sl
rn
ee
1
\
4
I
,
j
I
I
I
\
»
LJ ~ ~ ........ l.J
Bm~~~~~
;--,'>
I
--~
is
~
:=
TERMINAL IN
~
I
\
\-
I
- --
-
- -
PAINTER 1
-
DISK OUT
-
TERMINAL IN
<9
~
I \
)
"
---
- -
PAINTER 2
-
I~
<9
J
.-
~
J
\:\
J- -
~~~~~.~~@
<9
J
)
C
-
DISKIN
~~IDaE TAPE OUT
<:=:::
1<9
I
I
1\
~'RIDGE TAPE IN
I
)
'
i""1
:,.
IOia
ee
1°"'=
I~C
ae ~':qT
I
r;:::jj
~
"
,
4
J
I
I
)
I
I
J
4
I
)
DISKIN
~rRIDaE TAPE IN
~RIDaE TAPE OUT
)
C - DISK OUT
>
l<l
I
'~~ill~~~~~'
J
l
- ---
..,
- -
r-
TE~MINAlIN
k>
I
\
PRINTER 3
~
n
n
m
tn
tn
!
o
:a
''''l
00(
i:
o
c
c,..
m
n
I
U
00351
MODEL 21
Figure 3-5
3-12
Model 21 System Intermodule Cabling
-- Sample Configuration
Zilog
3-12
HRM
Zilog
HRM
(
t
------
- -
s)
;<:)
TERMINAL OUT
~
'--~~
c:=
t
t
?
0
?
- -
OPTION
~RIDGE
TAPE OUT
-
;;>
,9
Nc=
I
- -
--
•
I
I
- - -.
-
?
SMDC A OUT
I
:,MDC BOUT
?
flC=
~
o
o
,.c
j
~
OPTION
_
c;>
IDio
t
•
I
I
I
I
I
I
0c==
~TRIDGE TAPE
I
c:§RIDGE TAPE OUT
0
-
)
-
-
- -
c=
C'I.J
-
--
Ie.
IN
IN
T
II
II
SMDC A IN
I
I
DRIVE 3 oUll
l:
,
I- - \ I
• ..
•
\•
•
~
8
>-
l:
TEI~MINAL
)00
l:
IN
-"" I
______
DRIVE 0 ouT'!
>-
l:
1\
0
PRINTER 1
0
IV
<2)
@'
""
I",
'0 ! -
I
~\
\
rio ee~
•t
t
•
•
~
.J
\
-
SMDC DAISY IN
o
L:::IDnIC DAISY OUT
.~
I
<2)
DRIVE 2 OUTI
·~rn~~~ ~~
>-
t
.~
Q
,r - - - - - - . - ,.
L _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ...J
SMDC DAISY OUT
-
-
RTv':
r-----------,
v
- -
I
DISK OUT
SMDC B IN
"
°
~
1.-
I
\
I
DISK IN
I
t
I
m
ee
\
t
I
I
t
-.
OPTION
n
"C
-
I-
I
I
I
0
~mm~~~
TERMINAL IN
r&
I \
IDio
eeUaJ
~.
•
1
en
en
PRINTER 2
( ')
(')
m
o
°
:II
0(
:I
o
o
,..c
m
I
~
U
.T"L.
00394
MODEL 31
Figure 3-6
3-13
Model 31 System Intermodule Cabling
-- Sample Configuration
Zilog
3-13
HRM
3.4.
HRM
Zilog
32 MB Winchester Disk Drive Configurations
3.4.1. Drive Cabling: The required cable connections to
the drive are power and signal cables." All input/output
signals and power exit at the FINCH Adapter Board.
The
adapter board attaches to the drive at the command, DC
power, and data connectors. Refer to Figure 3-7 for power
and signal connector orientation.
PIN 1
~
REAR OF DRIVE
00402
Figure 3-7
FINCH Power and Signal Connector Orientation
Terminator resistor packs are included on each FINCH Adapter
Board.
The terminators consist of a DIP resistor module
which is plugged into a DIP socket. Only the last FINCH in
a daisy-chain configuration requires a terminator resistor
pack for the Command/Data cable; the others must be removed.
A daisy-chain configuration incorporates parallel interfacing of the disk drives on a common Command/Data cable.
A
maximum of four drives may be daisy-chained on the cable.
3-14
Zilog
3-14
HRM
Zilog
HRM
3.4.2. Drive Configuration Procedures: Using the following
procedure, verify the configuration of the FINCH drive:
('1)
Disconnect the 40-pin Command/Data cable connector, and
the power connector, at the top of the FINCH Adapter
Board.
(2)
Using a small Phillips head screwdriver, remove two (2)
4-40 x 1/4 -inch screws securing the Adapter Board to
the mounting brackets.
(3)
Unseat the Adapter Board, and remove.
(4)
Verify that a terminator resistor pack is installed
the Adapter Board, as shown in Figure 3-8.
(5)
On the Unit Selection dip switch, verify that switch
position 1 is ON (refer to Figure 3-8). The other
switch positions must be OFF. The ZEUS software and
SADIE diagnostic firmware will recognize the FINCH as
Dr i ve O.
3-15
Zilog
on
3-15
HRM
Zilog
HRM
.--------2t
POWER CONNECTOR
~~ ~
OL:=:J
COMMAND,DATA CONNECTOR
~
0
o~=:J
40·PIN
OL:=:J
c===J
1
,----l--
0 ----I'D DO
[ 0o? 10>'-------110>
102
o 0>
~t--I ~~
CONNECTOR
.::J
~
Lt
10>
10
~
, - - - >- - '
I CJ
ID>'----'~IDD~
50·PIN
~,
COMMAND CONNECTOR
20·PIN DATA CONNECTOR
RN'
I
,--->
>,---.
0>
D~=:JD
C
----110>
T~zRE:l~t~~R
~~
~~
UNIT SELECTION DIP SWITCH
Figure 3-8
FINCH Adapter Board
(6)
On the FINCH Main PWA, verify that a keyed Unit Select
jumper plug is installed in position 0 on header J3.
The plug can be installed in one of four possible
orientations and will display the unit selected number
to the rear of the drive.
(7)
Reattach the FINCH Adapter Board to the FINCH drive, by
reversing the ste~s of this procedure.
3-16
Zilog
3-16
2ilo:g
HRM
HRM
3 .. 4.3 • Initial Chec:kout and St,artup Procedure: This procedure assumes that drive cabling and configuration procedures of this section have been performed and sati~fied.
(1)
Remove the front panel from the Disk/Tape Module.
(~~)
Place the rotary-arm shipping lock to the OPERATE position.
Refer to Figure 3-9 for drive-to-system orientation.
CAUTION
Figure 3-9 shows the rotary-arm shipping lock in
the locked and operating positions. To prevent
damage to the read/write heads or the disk itself,
place the rotary-arm shipping lock in the OPERATE
position only after installation has been completed.
FRONT OF
SYSTEM
ROTARY·ARM
SHIPPING LOCK
-----l.~;dJ~--------Ll:::::::==:t..J---
00405
Figure 3-9
3-17
Rotary-Arm Shipping Lock Orientation
2ilog
3-17
Zilog"
HRM
HRM
(1)
To place the rotary-arm shipping lock in either the
OPERATE or SHIP position, the use of a head lock/unlock
tool for FINCH Disk Drives is required (part number
31-0092-00) .
(2)
To unlock the read/write heads (OPERATE position):
(3)
a.
Turn off AC power.
b.
Using the crooked end of the head lock/unlock
tool, hook anrl disengage the rotary-arm shipping
lock. Pull towards the front of the drive until it
locks into the OPERATE position.
To lock the read/write heads (SHIP position):
a.
Turn off AC power.
b •
Using the flat end of the lock/unlock tool,
and disengage the rotary-arm shipping lock.
towards thE~ rear of the drive until it locks
the SHIP position.
(4)
After the rotary-arm shipping lock is
OPERATE position, turn on AC powet.
(5)
Run data non~destructive SADIE diagnostics
the operability of" the disk drive.
3.5.
SMD Winchester
Dri~e
placed
to
lift
Push
into
in
the
ensure
Configurations
When the 84 MB SMD i~) installed in the system, the Mode
Select Switch (SW1) is set according to system requirements.
This switch is located on the CNAM PCB assembly (Figure 310) •
3.5.1. SHD Disk Addressing: The Disk Logical Unit Number 0
to 7 is selected by SW1 to the desired disk address by the
three key switches of SW1 (1, 2,and 3) by using the binary
code shown in Table 3-1.
*
3-18
HOTE: Dip switches SW2 and SW3 are set at
and should not be altered by customer.
Zilog
the
factory
3-18
HRM
HRM
Zilog
ROY FPT
5T8 5T4 5T2
5T1
000000
.------------1--------..,
LEOS
26 PIN
SW1
SW1
7c=J1
- - - -..·0
.
6~
5 c=::.
4 c::=3 c::JI
2 c::::JI
1 c::::JI
ON
INTERFACE
CONNECTORS
60 PIN
OFF
SW2*SW3*
1
L
DO
L}
(TOP VIEW)
00391
Figure 3-10
Mode Select Switch Location
Ta,ble 3-1. SMD Disk Addressing
Disk Uni t
Key
Key 2
Key 3
0
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
3-19
Zilog
3-19
Zilog
HRM
HRM
The SMD controller has only one 16 bit I/O port, the address
is set by a dip switch located on SMDC A near the P1 (ZBI)
connector. The functions of each key are described below:
KEY
FUNCTION
1
Re served
Address 01
Address 02
Address 03
Address 04
Add re 0303 05
Address 06
AddrE~ss 07
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
POSITION FOR "7FOO"
ON {ON = O}
ON {OFF = 1 }
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
The I/O por't add re 0303 :.03 "7 FXY", where XY iss pec if i ed by the
dip switch keys 2 thr'ough 8. The I/O address must be even.
The first key is reserved and should be in the "ON" position.
A jumper labelled "Piek" (located at SMDC A) may be optionally grounded (with shunt installed) to prevent the drive
from eye 1 ing down when con troller power is lost.
( Th i s
feature called Pick and Hold only works with drives that
ha vet his f eat ur e . b u i J. tin).
In the cas e 0 f the Z:L log 8 "
SMD disk d~ive, leave pick jumper off (shunt not installed).
At the power up sequence, if pick is grounded (wi th shunt
installed) it will enable the first SMD drive to get up to
speed, then the pick signal is transferred to the ne~t
active SMD drive.
The drives spin up sequentially, one by
one.
SW1
12
3
13
2
C
C
C
14
•
•
•
ON
03
KEY 3
02
KEY 2
01
KEY 1
OFF
1:3 (CNAM)
00406
3-20
Zilog
3-20
HRM
Zilog
HRM
:3MD Board Switch
OFF
SW 1
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
i~~~i~~~~
L..--
---'
~
3.5.2. SMD Disk status Indicators: The drive has six LEDs,
four for status (ST1, ST'2, 3T4, ST8), one for ready (RDY),
and one for file protect (FPT). Drive fault indication is
given by the four status LEDs (ST1, ST2, ST4, ST8) on the
SMD PCB. The indicator LEDs are defined as follows:
FPT (File Protect) switch: SW1-Key 7
This switch inhibits the write operation and should
in the OFF position.
be
RDY (Ready) indicator: Gree,n
This RDY LED indicates that the initial seek has been
performed or indicates the termination of a Seek or RTZ
operation.
FPT (File Protect) indicator: Red
This LED indicates that writing is inhibited
controlled by SW1-Key 7 on the SMD disk.
and
is
code
as
ST1 to ST8 (Status 1 to 8) LEDs: Red
Fifteen fault statuses are visible by
shown in Table 3-2.
3-21
Zilog
binary
3-21
HRM
Zilog
Table 3-2.
Fault Indicator
Status Bit
Fault Status
Code
ST8 ST4 ST2 STI (Hex)
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
3-22
o
o
Fault
Description
DC motor failure
(DMFL)
indicates spindle
motor failure.
VCM over heat
(VCMHT)
indtcates VCM
over'-heating.
Initial seek time
out (INTMOT)
indicates initial
seek has terminated
with time-out.
4
Control check 1
(CTCK 1 )
indi.cates that a
Read/Write command
was issued during
busy status.
5
Control check 2
(CTCK2)
indicates that write
gate was issued
during a fault
condition.
6
Read/write check 1
(RWCK1)
indicates that write
gate was issued
during off-track.
7
Read/write check 2
(RWCK2)
indicates that write
current did not flow
to the head during
a Write operation.
8
Read/write check 3
(RWCK3)
indicates that write
gate was issued
during File-Protected
status.
9
Read/write check 4
(RWCK4)
indicates that write
gate was issued
during a multiheadsel ec ted status..
A
Time-out (TMOT)
indicates that seek
or RTZ sequence was
not terminated within
500 ms.
2
1
o
HRM
Zilog
3-22
HRM
Zilog
Status Bi t.
Fault Status
Code
ST8 ST4 ST2 ST1 (Hex)
o
o
o
o
o
1.
HRM
Fault
Description
B
Seek guard band
( SEKGB)
indicates that a
guard band was
detected during a
direct seek
operation.
C
Linear mode guard
band (LNHGB)
indicates that a
guard band was
detected during
a linear mode.
D
RTZ outer guard
band (RTOGB)
indicates that an
outer guard band was
detected during an
RTZ operation.
E
Ov er- shoot check
(OVSHT)
indicates that the
head overshot the
new cylinder address
during settling time.
F
Illegal cylinder
check' (TLCYL)
indicates that an
illegal cylinder
address (>538) was
issued by the
controller.
3.5.3. SMD Configur~tion:
Figure 3-11 illustrates the fundamental configuration of the SMD with a cutout of the
sealed disk unit. The 84 MB SMD has four platters and seven
read/write heads.
3-23
Zi10g
3-23
Zilog
HRM
HRM
PCB (INTERFACE CIRCUITS)
PCB (R/W, SERVO
C9NTROL CIRCUITS)
5.12"
(130MM)
PCB
(SPINDLE MOTOR
00393
REAR OF DRIVE
Figure 3-11
3-24
84 MB SMD Configuration
Zilog
3-24
Zilog
HRM
HRM
3.5.4. SMD Cabling: Figures 3-12 and 3-13 illustrate the
Interface cabling (Interface cable A and B) to the 60 pin
and 26 pin connectors of the Interface PCB on top and to the
rear of the SMD. The POWER cable connector is also shown.
INTERFACE CABLE (A) CONNECTOR GOP
(INTERFACE PRINTED CIRCUIT
BOARD·UPPER)
PWR CABLE CONNECTOR
(CONTROL PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD-LOWER)
d
BACK OF UNIT
00388
Figure 3-12
3-25
Mounting Positions of SMD Connectors
Zilog
3-25
HRM
2ilog
Figure 3-13
HRM
SMD Interface Cabling
3.5.5. Head Lock Actuator: The SMD mounting bracket has a
head locking and unlocking actuator lever located at the
front of the SMD (Figure 3-14).
1.
To unlock the read/write heads (OPERATE position):
a.
Turn off AC power.
b.
Disengage from shipping lock and position actuator
lever and lock in the OPERATE position.
c.
Turn on AC power.
d.
Run SADIE Diagnostics called SMDCRC (Appendix
to ensure operability of the disk drive.
A)
CAUTION
Certain SADIE diagnostics are DATA-DESTRUCTIVE and
could result in overwriting the disk media.
3-26
Zilog
3-26
HRM
2.
Zilog
HRM
To lock the read/write heads (SHIP position):
a.
Turn off AC power.
b.
Position actuator lever until it
SHIP position.
locks
heads
in
SMD DRIVE
LOCIKING LEVER
00392
SHIP'
Figure 3-14 SMD Mounting Bracket with
Head Locking Actuators
3.5.6. Cable Termination: When the SMD disk drives are
added in a daisy-chain configuration, the A-cable signals
are terminated by four resistor networks (16 pin DIP) on the
interface board of the last disk drive (Figure 3-15). These
resistor DIPs are removed from all disk drives except for
the last in the system configuration.
3-27
Zilog
3-27
HRM
Zilog
HRM
CN1
CNAM PCB ASSEMBLY
00390
Figure 3-15
3.6.
SMD Cable Terminators
LinEl Printer Installation Procedures
This proc€!dure provides information for the hardware interface betv.leen the printer and the host system. The ZEUS
Operating System can support two (2) printers with either a
Centronics or Data Products interface. The line printer
d r i v e r has b e en t est E~ d wit h the f 0110 win g pr in t e r s :
Zilog PRZ 2/10
- Centronics interface
Zilog PRZ 3/30
.. Centronics interface
Zilog PRZ 3/60
.. Centronics interface
The installation procedure is as follows:
3-28
Zilog
3-28
HRM
HRM
Zilog
(1)
Disengage the thumbscrews, and open the cable covers on
all modules.
(2)
Attach the line printer interface cable to the connector labeled PRINTER 1, on the terminal distribution
panel. Refer to Figures 3-3 and 3-4 for connector
identification.
If a second line printer is used with the system
(requiring an SSB option), attach that interface cable
to the connector labeled PRINTER 2, on the second terminal distribution panel (refer to Figures 3-3 and 34) .
(3)
Dress the line printer interface cable(s) flush to
system, and close the cable covers on all modules.
the
(4)
Remove the Processor Module front panel.
(5)
Unseat and remove the CPU Board' from slot 1 of the card
cage.
NOTE
The printer port on the first terminal distribution panel is controlled' by jumpers on the CPU
'Board.
(1)
Verify that printer configuration jumpers are installed
on the CPU Board as follows:
PRINTER INTERFACE
JUMPER GROUP
Centronics
E13 to E14
E17 to E18
Data Products
E14 to E15
E16 to E17
(1)
Reseat the CPU Board into slot 1.
(2)
If the system is configured for two (2) line printers,
'unseat and remove the Secondary Serial Board (SSB) from
slot 2 of the card cage.
3-29
Zilog
3-29
.HRM
Zilog
HRM
NOTE
The printer port on the second terminal distribution panel is controlled by jumpers on the first
of t~ro possible optional SSB boards.
(1)
Verify that printer configuration jumpers are installed
on the SSB as follows:
PRINTER INTERFACE
JUMPER GROUP
Centronics
E2 to E3
E4 to E5
Data pr'oducts
E1 to E2
E5 to E6
( 1)
Res eat the SSB :L nto s lot 2.
(2)
For line printer software consideration refer to paragraph 7.1, Line Printer Information, in the ZEUS System
Administrator Manual (03-3246).
3.7.
Sys1~em
Power-Up Diagnostics (SPUD)
The System power-Up Diagnostics (SPUD) reside in a ReadOnly-Memory (ROM) on the CPU board.
These diagnostics
automatically execute in response to pressing RESET and
START during system turn-on.
They can also be initiated
from the CPU Monitor by pressing RESET and entering T <CARRIAGE RETURN).
SPUD tests the prima~y functions of the CPU and peripheral
components.
The diagnostics verify the system's ability to
execute a limited number of instructions, and to communicate
with Winchester Disk and Tape Cartridge Controllers. The
specific functions of SPUD are:
(1)
System 8000 Instruction
instructions are tested.
(2)
MMU Test - All 3ccessible internal
segment trap functions are tested.
(3)
Memory Test - All memory locations are tested for
and write functions.
read
2ilog
3-30
3-30
Test
Specified
registers
system
and
the
HRM
Zilog
HRM
(4)
ECC Test - Tests the system's error detection capabilities.
(5)
Peripheral Equipment Test - Does a cursory check of the
Winchester Disk and Tape Cartridge Controllers.
If SPUD detects a problem with the system, an error message
is displayed on the console of the system administrator
(ZEUS super-user). Table 3-3 lists the error messages .and
descriptions.
A possible solution to a power-up error condition is to
check that all cable connectors are properly mated, and that
all system boards are seated in their backplane connectors.
If problems still exist, run the SADIE diagnostics described
in Section 5, Maintenance.
3-31
Zilog
3-31
HRM
Table 3-3
SPUD
PI
P2
P3
0001
SEG II
ADDR
RD
0100
0101
0102
0103
0104
SEG
SEG
SEG
SEG
II
II
II
II
ADDR
ADDR
ADDR
ADDR
TD
TD
TO
TO
0100
0101
0102
0103
SEG
SEG
SEG
SEG
#1
/1
ADDR
ADDR
ADDR
ADDR
TD
TD
TD
TD
ERROR
Diagnostics Error List
P4
CHRS *
PRINTED
DESCRIPTION
P
0
No External Memory··
Seg. Addr Fault ••
RD
RD
RD
RO
W
Mem. Addr Fault
Data Line Fault
'As' Data Fault
•5s' Data Fault
No Good Segments Above Zero u
RD
RO
RD
RD
E
Segment Zero Memolry Test
(Descriptions As Above)
R (sp)
U
P (sp)
ECC
ECC
ECC
ECC
D
MMU's Not Individually Addressable
#
‫סס‬oo
fI
fI
0200
0201
0202
0203
SEG fI
ADDR
0300
MMU
SDR
0303
PORT #
MMV
PORT #
MMC
PORT #
MMU
FIELD #
SDR
FIELD #
SDR
FIELD #
TD
0304
CMD #
REG #
TD
0301
0302
0305
HRM
Zilog
SDR #
MMU
ID #
TD
RD
TD
RD
SAR or DSCR Indexiing Fault
TO
RD
SOR 'As' or '5s' Data Fault
RO
MMU Control Register 'As' Qr
'5.5' Fault
RD
System/Normal Break Register
'As' or '5s' Fault
Stack MMU Did Not Trap On
Limit Test
Unexpected Trap
Unexpected Trap
Data MMU Did Not Trap On
Limit Test
Stack MMU Did Not Trap On
Read-Only Test
Data MMU Did Not Trap On
Read-Only Test
Translation Fault On Data MMU
VDAT
0305
0305
0305
A
G
N
0305
0
0305
S
0306
0307
0308
0309
0310
0311
0312
3-32
MMU
Port iF
MMU
PORT
MMU
PORT
MMU
PORT
MMU
PORT
MMU
PORT
MMU
PORT
Single-bit Corre'ction Failure
two-bit trap failure
two-bit error not reported
Check Byte RAM error
SDR #
TD
SDR #
VDAT
SDR #
TD
SDR #
VDAT
SDR #
TD
SDR #
VDAT
RD
T
Unexpected Trap
#
Translation Fault On Stack MMU
RD
#
Unexpected Trap
#
RD
C
Translation Fault On Code MMU
#
Unexpected Trap
#
S (sp)
SDR #
#
Zilog
No Trap On Code MMU Limit
Test
3-32
HRM
HRM
Zilog
Table 3-3
ERROR
SPUD biagnostics Error List (Continued)
PI
P2
P3
P4
DS1
DS2
DS3
DS4
REG #
REG #
IV
REG
IV
REG
TD
TD
STATO
REG
STATO
REG
RD
RD
MIC
REG
MIC
REG
#
1000
1001
1002
2000
2001
2002
2003
2004
2005
3000
3001
3002
3003
3004
3005
3006
3007
3008
3009
3010
3011
3012
3013
3014
3015
3016
3017
3018
4000
4001
4002
4003
DESCRIPTION
No WDC Board In System
WDC Self Test Error
WDC Drive 0 Error
No TCC Board In System
Busy Bit Always Set***
'5s' Data Fault
'As' Data Fault
TCC Self-Test Error***
TCC Hardware Error***
MDC Not Responding
RAM Error (P 1 holds location)
PROM Checksum Error
Time Out Condition
Read ABORT Error
Wait ABORT Error
Parity Error
Not Used But Reserved
Seek Not Complete Error
Cylinder Not Found
Drive Not Selected
Head/Secter Not Found
Invalid Command
No Track 0 Found
Drive Not Ready
Bad Interrupt
Bad MAP
Illegal Cylinder Selected
BEP Error
ADDR
SMC Not Responding
SMC Initialization Error
SMC RAM Error
SMC Self Test Timed Out Host
Waiting (PI holds SMC status
register)
Drive 0 Not Selected
Drive 0 Not Ready
Drive 0 Not On Cylinder
Drive 0 Read Only
Drive 0 Drive Fault
Drive 0 Seek Error
Drive 0 Not Formatted (Can't Size
Disk)
STATUS
4004
4005
4006
4007
4008
4009
4010
Last Characters of SPUD Message
COMPLETE
3-33
CHRS *
PRINTED
Zilog
3-33
Zilog
HRM
Table 3-3
•
••
HRM
SPUD Diagnostics Error List (Continued)
Characters of SPUD message:Jrinted before entering test
Fatal errolr preventing further It!emory-related tests from being run
*•• - The TCU test may take up to two minutes if the drive is busy or if the 'busy' status bit is stuck. The
last two TCU error messages cump out the contents of the status registers for troubleshooting.
Pn - Test parameters of error prinwd (in hexadecimal):
SEG#
segment :1Umber
ADDR
address c ffset
TD
test data
RD
returned data
MMU PORT #
full work port number of MMU under test
MMUCMD#
MMU port number with command 'ored' in
SDR FIELD #
indicates a particular SDR in the range 0-255
MMUID,II
ID of MMU(s) returned from a segment trap
1 = code MMU
2 = data MMU
4 = s(lck MMU
SDR#
logical segment number or set of SDR's (0-63)
VDAT
violation data from a single MMU trapping
(HB)- bus cycle status register data
(LB)- violation type register data
DSI
WDC derailed status - disk ready register
DS2
- disk status register
DS3
- operation error status
DS4
- self-test error status
REG #
register port number of unit under test
no parameter printed
STATUS
SMC status port contents
When the diagnostics are complete, th·;: maximum available segment number will be displayed as follows (xx in
hexadecimal):
POWER UP DIAGNOSTICS
ACTIVE PERIPHERALS:
WDC
TCC (MODEL 21)
ECC (STD CONFIG)
COMPLETE
MAXSEG= <xx>
3-34
POWER UP DIAGNOSTICS
ACTIVE PERIPHERALS:
SMC (MODEL 31)
TCC (STD CONFIG)
ECC
COMPLETE
MAXSEG = < xx >
Zilog
3-34
HRM
Zilog
3.8.
System
HRM
Expans~on
This section explains the installation
of
additional
hardware to support the expansion or upgrading of an existing system.
3.8.1.
Installing Additional Terminal Ports: The following
instructions allow systems to be upgraded from 8 to 24
users. This capability requires the addition of the following items:
NOTE
The assumption is made that any of these system
expansion options (listed in sub-sections 3.8.1
through 3.8.4) are being installed in a standard
configured system. If the system has already been
configured for another option, consult your local
Zilog field representative and any notes sent with
the upgrade kits for in~egration details •.
PART NUMBER
DESCRIPTION
05-8002-XX
Top Assembly, 16 User Upgrade
05-0177-XX
Top Assembly, 24 User Upgrade
To install the 16 user upgrade, proceed as follows:
1.
Follow the necessary procedures for an orderly shutdown of the system (See "Down( M)" and "Hal t( M)" commands in the Zeus System Administrator
Part # 033246).
2.
Power down the system.
3.
Remove the front panel and top cover from the Processor
Module.
4.
Remove the topmost blank plate from the topmost System
8000 module.
Save the mounting hardware for assembly
of the terminal distribution panel for secondary I/O.
5.
Install the second terminal distribution panel for TTY8
to TTY15 (part number 08-0165-XX). Use the mounting
hardware removed in step 3. Refer to the Installation
Note, 03-0215, contained in the upgrade kit 05-8002-XX.
3-35
Zilog
3-35
HRM
2ilog
HRM
6.
Attach the terminal expansion cable assembly (part
number 59-0217·-00) from I/O port connector OPTION, on
the Processor Module, to I/O port connector TERMINAL
IN, on the expansion terminal distribution panel.
Refer to Figures 3-5 and 3-6.
7.
Configure the Sf~condary Serial Board for use
following printl~r interfaces:
PRINTER INTERFACE
JUMPER GROUP
Data Pl'''oducts
E1 to E2
E5 to E6
Centronics
E2 to E3
E4 to E5
with
the
8.
Plug the Secondary Serial Board into slot 2 of the card
e-age .
9.
Unseat and remove the CPU Board from slot 1.
Replace
the PROM at location U74 with the 16 user PROM (part
number 34-0719-00.
10.
Verify the p~inter configuration
Board as follows:
j0mpers
PRINTER INTERFACE
JUMPER GROUP
Data Products
E14 to E15
E16 to E17
Centr-'on ic s
E13 to E14
E17 to E18
on
CPU
,4-11
and
11.
Verify CPU switc~h settings (U70) with
reseat the CPU :3oard in-to slot 1.
12.
Replace the Processor Module front panel.
13.
Remove two (2) backplane jumpers at E12-B and E12-D for
16. users.
14.
Replace the top cover.
15.
Power up the system and run· the appropriate SADIE diagnostics test.
3-36
2ilog
Table
the
3-36
HRM
16.
Zilog
HRM
On completion of the diagnostic test, perform the
software modification procedure for adding terminals.
This procedure is contained in the ZEUS System Administrator Manual (03-3246) paragraph 7.4, Adding Additional Terminals.
For the 24 user upgrade, refer to the Installation Note
(03-0215).
The upgrade is to be done only be Zilog Field
Service.
3.8.2. Adding A 32MB Disk Module: The following instructions allow Model 21 systems to be upgraded by adding a Disk
Module. This requires the addition of the following items:
PART NUMBER
DESCRIPTION
05-0096-00
Front Panel, Disk Module
08-0169-00
Subassembly, Disk Module
98-8017-00
Stud, Ball, Threaded
QUANTITY
4
Use the following procedure to install the Disk Module, and
to modify the configuration of the FINCH Disk Drive in the
present Disk/Tape Module. Install the added Disk Module
between the Disk/Tape Module and the Accessory Module.
Figure 3-16 shows the configurations for an existing and an
upgraded system.
3-37
Zilog
3-37
HRM
Zilog
PROCESSOR
MODULE
DISKITAPE
MODULE
HRM
PROCESSOR
MODULE
0
DISK/TAPE
MODULE
~
DISK MODULE
TWO SINGLE
ACCESSORY
MODULES
....
•
.. ~:5
SINGLE
ACCESSORY
MODULE
MODEL 21 WITH
ONE (1) 32 MB
WINCHESTEJl DISK
...
00
....._ - - - _ . _ - _.. §
EXPANDED SYSTEM
WITH TWO (2) 32 MB
WINCHESTER DISKS
Figure 3-16 Existing Model 21 and
Expanded System Configurations
To install the Disk lv1odule, proceed as follows:
CAUTION
Before the Disk/Tape Module can be removed
the
present
system,
.the
FINCH Disk
read/wri te head::; must be locked.
(1)
3-38
To lock the FINCH Disk Drive read/write heads:
a.
Follow the necessary procedures for an orderly
shutdown of the system.
Refer to Down(M) and
Halt(M) commands inthe ZEUS System Administrator
<03-3246) .
b •
Turn off AC power switch and remove AC power
from outlet.
cord
c.
Using the flat end of the lock/unlock tool,
and disengage the rotary-arm shipping lock.
toward the rear of the drive until it locks
the SHIP position.
lift
Push
into
Zilog
3-38
HRM
(2)
(3)
3-39
Zilog
HRM
Disassemble the system by removing the Processor and
Disk/Tape Modules from the Accessory Modules.
Proceed
as follows:
a.
Disengage the thumbscrews and open the cable
ers on all modules.
b.
Remove the disk and
Refer to Figure 3-4.
c.
Remove terminal and printer cables from the terminal distribution I/O ports.
d.
Loosen the captive fasteners on the
Processor and Disk/Tape Modules.
e.
Disengage the Processor Module from the guide
posts on the front of the Disk/ Tape Module, and
remove.
f.
Disengage the Disk/Tape Modul e from the guide
posts on the front of the Accessory Module, and
remove.
tape
Configure the FINCH drive in the
follows:
intermodule
new
Disk
cables.
of
Module
mounted
the
as
a.
Remove the FINCH Adapter
rear of the drive.
b.
Verify
that a terminator resistor
pack
is
installed on the Adapter board in location RN3
(refer to Figure 3-6). The FINCH drive in the new
Disk Module will be configured as the last drive
in the Data/Command cable daisy chain.
c.
The Unit Selection Dip Switch on the Adapter board
must be set with switch position 2, ON. All other
switch positions must be set to OFF.
This dip
switch specifies the unit address which ZEUS
software and SADIE firmware will recognize.
d.
On the FINCH Main PWA, verify that a Keyed Unit
Select jumper plug is installed in position 1 on
header J3.
The plug establishes the logical unit
designation; and can be installed in one of four
possible orientations displaying the unit selected
number to the rear of the drive.
e.
Reinstall the Adapter board.
Zilog
Board,
rear
cov-
.on
the
3-39
HRM
(4)
Zilog
HRM
Reconfigure the FINCH drive in the
Module as follows:
original
Disk/Tape
a.
Remove the FINCH Adapter Board.
b.
Remove the terminator resistor
RN3 (refer to Figure 3-8).
c.
Verify that position 1 of the Unit Selection Dip
Switch is set to ON. All other switch positions
must be set to OFF.
d.
On the FINCH Main PWA, verify that a keyed Unit
Select jumper plug is installed in position 0 on
the header J3.
e.
Rein~tall
pack
in
location
the Adapter board.
(5)
Assemble the Disk Module, Disk/Tape Module, and Processor Module in the order shown in Figure 3-16 (Expanded
System) .
(6)
Unlock the drives read/write heads. Using the crooked
end of the head lock/unlock tool disengage the rotaryarm shipping lock. Pull towards the front of the drive
until the arm locks into the OPERATE position.
(7)
Attach all intermodule power
Figure 3-5 and 3-6).
(8)
Run data non-destructive SADIE diagnostic WDCCRC on the
FINCH drive in the Disk/Tape M6dule to ensure operability.
(9)
Run SADIE diagnostic tests WDCTST3, WDCTST7,
WDCMEDIA on the FINCH drive in the Disk Module.
and
signal
cables
(see
and
The addition of disk drives t6 an existing system requires
that each new drive be configured to allow access by the
ZEUS so ft\o/are . Re fe::-- to the "Add ing Ad di t ional Di s ks" pro-'
cedures specified in the ZEUS System Administrator Manual
(03-3246 ),
3.8.3. Adding SMD DIsk Module 11 to Model 31: Use the following procedures to add additional SMD Disk Modules to the
System 8000.
1.
3-40
Follow the necessary procedures for an orderly shutdown
of the system. Refer to Down(M) and Halt(M) commands
in the ZEUS System Administrator Manual (03-3246).
Zilog
3-40
HRM
Zilog
HRM
2.
Power down the system, turn off AC power
remove AC input power cord from outlet.
swi tch
and
3.
Remove front panels from CPU and
existing
Disk
Module(s) and lock heads by positioning Head Locking
Actuator Lever in SHIP position.
Ensure lever is
locked in SHIP position.
4.
Disassemble the. system as follows:
a.
Disengage the thumbscrews, open cable covers
remove intermodule cables from system.
b.
Remove terminal and printer cables from I/O
ports.
c.
Loosen captive fasteners on the rear of
cessor and Disk/Tape Modules.
d•
Disengage the Processor Module from the guide
posts on the front of the Disk/Tape Module, and
remove.
and
panel
the
pro-
5.
On new Disk Module, locate SMD Mode Select Swtich (SW1)
exposed through top cover of SMD drive (Figure 3-10).
Set d'rive uni t number using first three swi tch posi tons
(SW1) (Table 3-1). SW2 and SW3 are factory set and are
not to be changed.
6.
On original Disk or Disk/Tape Modul~s (last one in system), remove the SMD metal cover exposing switches and
terminators by loosening two screws at rear of SMD.
Remove four cable terminator s (Figure 3-14). These
terminators are used in last drive only.
7.
Reassemble system starting with new Disk Module which
should be assmembled as the the bottom most Disk Module
in the system (Figure 3-4).
8.
Position SMD read/write heads in
position.
9.
Attach all intermodule power and signal cables (Figure
3-5, 3-6).
Reconnect terminal and printer cables to
terminal distribution panels.
10.
Connect system to AC power outlet.
1t.
Power-up the system (Refer to ZEUS System Administrator
(03-3246» .
3-41
Zilog
unlocked
or
OPERATE
3-41
HRM
Zilog
12.
HRM
Run non-destructive SADIE diagnostics SMDCRC command on
SADIE tape.
The addition of SMD disk drives to an existing system
requires that each new drive be configured to allow access
by the ZEUS software.
Refer to the "Adding Additional
Disks" procedures in the ZEUS System Administrator Manual
(03-3246).
3.8.4.
1 Mbyte Memory Array Board Segment Setting:
Each
Memory Array has a DIP switch (S1) located near the edge
connector at the center of the board. This switch has eight
individual switches normally set at the factory.
However,
if a board is replaced or additional Memory Arrays added,
these
switches
must be set for the correct segment
addresses. Table 3-4 gives the option to be selected for 1
MByte to 4 MByte memory. Switches 1-4 are used to set the
mega-segment offset on the memory board.
Table 3-4.
MEMORY
SegmeJ1t Address Settings on 1 MByteMemory
SEGMENTS
3W1
SW2
SW3
SW4
SW5
S'W6
SW7
SW8
1MB
O-F
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
2MB
10-1F
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
3MB
20-2F
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
4MB
30-3F
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ME~mory
3-42
Array Switch S 1
Zilog
3-42
HRM
Zilog
HRM
SECTION 4
THEORY OF OPERATION
4.1.
General
This section discusses the theory of operation of the System
8000 based on block diagrams of various levels of complexity. The discussion begins with the basic building blocks
of the system, system bus, the board modules on bus, bus
conventions, and, :its input/output. The text goes more deeply into the operation of the system: interrupts, addressing, 32 MB Winchester and 84 MB SMD disk and cartridge tape
operations and interface, and peripheral connection. For
the most part, this discussion does not cover the internal
operation of the system boards.
_.2.
System Bus
The block diagram in Figure 4-1 shows all the major elements
of the System 8000 connected to the 32-bit Z-Bus Backplane
Interconnect (ZBI). The ZBI is the system bus over which
all communication between the elements on the bus take
. place. On the backplane of card cage, the ZBI is connected
to connectors J11 through J20. On the logic diagrams and
assembly drawings for the printed circuit boards, the signal
lines of the ZBI are connected to the P1 connectors.
The CPU is the bus controller, and any other element on the
bus that needs to gain control of the bus must request control from the CPU.
4.3.
Bus Conventions
Signals on the bus may be active in either a high or a low
state. All signals that use the bus have names or mnemonics
that identify them. These names also indicate the active
state of the signal; for example, the signal AS\ (address
strobe) is an active low signal because it has a back slash
appended to it. If the signal appears as AS with no backslash, it is active high. The back-slash is the same notation as the over bar that indicates the logical complement
of a signal. Sometimes, active-low signals have a minus
sign appended to them as in AS-. The over-bar, the backslash, and the minus sign all mean the same thing.
This
text uses the back-slash; some of the drawings use either
the over-bar or the minus sign (-).
4-1
Zilog
4-1
Zilog
HRM
HRM
UP TO 3 ADDITIONAL DRIVES
r--------...,
/
,-'---------, I
, ... - - - - - - - . . , I I
I I I
I I I
DISK
DRIVE(S)
ILJ
LJ
"'"
r1::::::::::'i
r""'------.J--; ::
L
I I I
J
I
TAPE
DRIVE(S)
J
DISK DRIVE
INTERFACE
(96·PIN FLAT
RIBBON CABLE)
I
J ~
TAPE DRIVE
INTERFACE
(96·PIN FLAT
RIBBON CABLE)
SSB2 r~~••
- _-_-,_..
I
I
SECONDARY
SERIAL
E10ARD
I
---CPU
[
WINCHESTER
DISK
CONTROLLER
CARTRIDGE ]
TAPE
CONTROLLER
s
Z·BUS BACKPLANE INTERCONNECT (ZBI)
S"OC.
~l
UP TO 3 ADDITIONAL
MEMORY ARRAY BOARDS
,---------l
I
I
IFMDCA
LLITROLLER
ECC
CONTROLLER
MEMORY ARRAY
[
I
I
9·TRACK TAPE]
CONTROLLER
J
32·BIT ECC MEMORY BUS
r
:
TAPE DRIVE
[SMD
DRIVElS)
L __
9-TRACK
-_-_--.1..,...
J
l .
I
I UP TO 8
..J
L-
UPTO 4
FUTURE
OPTIO~I
00387
Figure 4-1
4.4.
System 8000, Functional Relationships
Bus Si.gnals
Table 4-1 lists all the ZSI signal lines and their definitions.
One signal name can designate more than one signal
line; in this case, the signal name is followed by numbers
in angles brackets «» which indicate the quantity of lines
and their designations" For example, the signal designated
AD<31:0> is the name for the 32 address and data lines (ADO
through AD31) that are part of the bus. Within the angled
brackets, the 31 indicates the most significant line.
4-2
Zilog
4-2
HRM
HRM
Zilog
The status lines, ST<4:0>, and the data width lines, B/W\
and W/LW\, form specific codes that cause a number of
discrete operations to occur. Tables 4-2 and 4-3 list the
various codes on the status and data width lines respectively, and the operations that the codes initiate.
Table 4-1
SIGNAL
NAME\
MNEMONIC
NUMBER
OF
LINES
AD<31:0>
32
Bus Lines
FUNCTION
Multiplexed Address/Data lines:
These lines are driven by the
bus master. The address strobe
(AS\) and data strobe (DS\)
determine when the information
on these lines is valid.
Memory Error:
During a memory access, if the
memory controller detects an
uncorrectable error, the
controller sends the ME\ signal
to the bus master.
ST<4:0>
5
Status Lines:
These active-high lines indicate
the type of transaction currently
occurring on the bus. (See Table
4-2 for the various codings and
their associated transactions.)
R/W\
Read-Write:
This is a dual-purpose line. When
this line is high, it indicates
that the current operation is a
read operation; when the line is
low, the operation is a write
operation.
N/S\
Normal-System:
Indicates the mode of operation
of the master that is currently
controlling the bus.
4-3
Zilog
4-3
HRM
SIGNAL
NAME\
MNEMONIC
Zilog
NUMBER
OF
LINES
HRM
FUNCTION
B/W\
Byte-Word Select:
This signal is used with signal
W/LW\ (listed below) to define
the data access width. (See Table
4-3 for coding.)
W/LW\
Word/Long-Word Select:
This signal is used with signal
B/W\ (listed above) to define
the data access width.
(See
Table 4-3 for coding.)
AS\
Address Strobe:
The bus master drives this line
low to initiate a bus transaction.
The rising trailing edge indicates
that the current address and status
are valid.
DS\
Data Strobe:
The bus master uses this signal to
time the movement of data to and
from itself along the data bus.
WAIT\
Wait:
By forcing this line low, a bus
slave causes the bus master to
suspend operation while the slave
completes its activity.
STOP\
stop Line:
This line, when driven low by an
EPU device causes a Z8000 CPU to
generate null transactions. During
a null transaction, the data strobe
(D:3\) remains high.
BAI\
Bus Acknowledge In:
This signal along with BAO\ forms
the bus priority chain.
BAO\
Bus Acknowledge Out:
This signal along with signal BAI\
forms the bus priority chain.
4-4
Zilog
4-4
HRM
SIGNAL
NAME\
MNEMONIC
Zilog
NUMBER
OF
LINES
HRM
FUNCTION
BUSREQ\
Bus Request:
A module uses the BUSREQ\ signal
to gain access to the bus. This
signal is part of the priority
scheme that is set up by the
connection of signals BAI\ and
BAO\.
CAI\
CPU Acknowledge In: .
Not currently implemented--the
CAI, CAO, CPUREQ, CAVAIL signals
are designed to allow multiple
CPUs to share a single bus. They
may be used on a future S8000 product
and should be considered reserved.
CAO\
CPU Acknowledge Out:
Not currently implemented-Ireserved
CPUREQ\
CPU Request:
Not currently implemented-reserved
CAVAIL
CPU Available:
Not currently implemented-reserved
INT1\
Level-1 Interrupt:
This interrupt line has the
highest priority in the system.
This line when driven by a
slave generates a non-maskable
tnterrupt (NMI).
INT2\
Level-2 Interrupt:
This interrupt line has the
second to the highest priority
in the system. This line, when
driven by a slave, generates a
vectored interrupt.
Zilog
4-5
Zilog
HRM
SIGNAL
NAME\
MNEMONIC
NUMBER
OF
LINES
HRM
FUNCTION
INT3\
Level-3 Interrupt:
This interrupt line has the
lowest priority in the system.
This line, when driven by a
slave, generates a non-vectored
int.errupt.
IEI1
Level-1 Interrupt Enable In:
This signal works with Level-1
interrupt enable out to form
the NMI acknowledge daisy chain.
IE01
Level-1 Interrupt Enable Out:
IEI2
Level-2 Interrupt Enable In:
This signal works with Level-2
interrupt enable out to form
the VI acknowledge daisy chain.
IE02
Level-2· Interrupt Enable Out:
IEI3
Level-3 In terrupt .Enable In:
This signal works with Level-3
in~errupt ~nable out to form
the NVI acknowledge daisy chain.
IE03
Level-3 Interrupt Enable Out:
MMREQ\
MMAI\
4-6
1
Multimicro Request:
When this signal is active a
module can request the use of
a common resource. The MMREQ\
signal works with signals MMAI\
and MMAO\.
Multimicro Acknowledge In:
This signal works with signal
MMAO\ to form the resourcerequest daisy chain.
Zilog
4-6
HRM
3IGNAL
NAME\
MNEMONIC
2ilog
NUMBER
OF
LINES
HRM
FUNCTION
MMAO\
Multimicro Acknowledge Out:
This signal works with signal
MMAI\ to form the resourcerequest daisy chain.
p~rRBAD\
Power Bad:
The processor power supply
generates this as an early
warning to the system that the
DC power will soon disappear.
MCLK
Master Clock:
This signal is the system clock
and is the foundation for all
timing in the system. The
frequency of the MCLK signal is
four times (4X) that of the bus
clock (BCLK).
BCLK
Bus Clock:
The system derives this clock
from the master clock (MCLK).
The BCLK is one fourth the
frequency of the master clock
and synchronizes the operation
of the elements in the system
that require synchronization.
All bus transfers are
synchronized to this clock.
The system CPU board is the
generator of this clock and
'MCLK above.
RESET\
:Reset:
This is the master reset signal
for the entire system. This
signal is generated by the front
panel master reset switch or
upon power-up by the power-up
reset circuit. When it is
forced low, it initializes the
E~n tire system.
4-7
2ilog
4-7
Zilog
HRM
Table 4-2
ZBI status Lines, Transaction Coding:
S4
S3
S2
S1
SO
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
X
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
B/W\
1
1
1
0
0
0
1
0
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
X
X
X
Table 11-3
HRM
TRANSACTION
Internal operation
Memory refresh
I/O reference
Special I/O reference
Segment trap acknowledge
INT 1 Interrupt acknowledge
INT 3 Interrupt acknowledge
INT 2 Interrupt acknowledge
Data memory request
Stack memory request
Transfer between data memory and an EPU
Transfer between stack memor'y and an EPU
Program reference, nth cycle~
Program reference, 1st c yc Ie
Transfer between CPU and EPU
Reserved
Reserved
1
1
1
Data Width Codes: Byte, Word, and Long Word
W/LW
DATA WIDTH
Sets the' data width to byte
width, 8 bits, data on lines
AD<7:0>
Sets data width to word size,
16 bits, data on lines AD<15:0>
0
0
Sets data width to double-word
size, 3 c.. bits, data on lines
AD<31 : 0)r
0
4-8
0
,
Reservec,
Zilog
. 4-8
HRM
4.5.
Zilog
HRM
Bus Modules
The bus modules are the major blocks that communicate
directly with the CPU over the bus. The one exception is
the ECC Memory Array module whose communications path to the
bus is through the Memory Subsystem Controller. The following paragraphs deal more closely with the
individual
modules.
4.5.1. CPU Module: The CPU module is the bus controller,
sometimes called the host, which initiates and controls
transactions on the bus. Also as shown in Figure 4-2, the
CPU connects directly to and controls the I/O bus. All
transactions with the outside world pass through either the
parallel port or one of the eight serial I/O ports. The I/O
lines from the CPU module pass through mating connectors P2
and J21, located on the CPU module and backplane, respectively. Table 4-4 lists the lines on the CPU I/O bus and
their definitions.
Table 4-4
CPU I/O Bus, Signal Definitions
.SIGNAL NAME
DEFINITION
TXD7 to TXDO
Transmit Data, 8 bits
RXD7 to RXDO
Receive Data, 8 bits
CTS7 to eTSO
Clear to Send
DTR7 to DTSO
Data Terminal Ready
RTS7 to RTSO
Request to Send
DSR7 to DSRO
Data Set Ready
TXRTN7 to TXRTNO
Transmit Return
DATA7 to DATAO
PIO Data
DATA STROBE
Data Products Data Strobe
DATA STROBE\
Centronics Data Strobe, Active low
4-9
Zilog
4-9
HRM
Zilog
HRM
SIGNAL NAME
DEFINITION
DATA DEMAND/
ACKNOWLEDGE\
Demand (Data Products) when high
Acknowledge (Centronics) when low
BUSY\
Printer Busy
IFVALID
Interface valid (Data Products)
FAULT\
Paper empty indication (Centronics)
ON-LINE/SELECT
ON-LINE (Data Products), SELECT (Centronics)
F.P. BUSACK
INDICATOR
(Front Panel)
DMAin process
Disk or tape controller in
control of bus
F.P. POWER-ON
INDICATOR (Gnd)
(Front Panel)
Ground for power-on indicator
F.P. POWER-ON
INDICATOR V+
(Front Panel)
Indicates system is on
F.P. NORMAL
INDICATOR
(Front Panel)
CPU running user. process
SWITCH N.C. START
(Front Panel)
Auto boot
SWITCH N.D. START
(Front Panel)
Auto boot
SWITCH RESET
(Front Panel)
Resets system
Hardware jumpers on the CPU board can be set for either a
Centronics or Data Products printer interface. Refer to
Table 4-5 for possible jumper configurations.
4-10
Zilog
4-10
HRM
Zilog
HRM
TTY7
TTYO
SERIAL
1/0 PORT
RS232C
SERIAL
I/O PORT
RS232C
PARALLEL
PRINTER
I/O PORT"·
L.----~J-------,c.---"CENTRONICS OR DATA PRODUCTS
CPU
BOARD
P1/J11
Z·BUS BACKPLANE INTERCONNECT (ZBI)
00160
Figure 4-2 . CPU Board, Funotional Relationships
The System 8000 CPU board is currently configured for a
non-segmented operating system. A segmented mode configuration is shown for future consideration only.
Jumpers E1
through E12 (refer to Figure 1-2) determine the operating
mode. Support of both segmerited and nonseg~ented users is
provided and is not determined by these jumpers.
Jumpers are factory set for nonsegmented operation
lows:
Table 4-5
fol-
CPU Board Jumper Selection
NON-SEGMENTED
E2 to E3
E4 to E~5
E7 to EB
E11 to E12
SEGMENTED (FUTURE)
E 1 to E2
E6 to E5
E8 to E9
E10 to E12
JUMPERS E1 THROUGH E12 ARE PROPERLY SET BY FACTORY
NOT TO BE CHANGED BY USER.
4-11
as
Zilog
AND
ARE
4-11
Zilog
HRM
For either a Data Products or Centronics interface,
Jumpers E13 through E18 as follows:
CENTRONICS INTERFACE·
HRM
connect
DATA PRODUCTS INTERFACE
E13 to E14
E17 to E18
E14 to E15
E16 to E17
4.5.1.1 I/O Bus: The CPU board I/O bus connects the System
8000 with the outside world. All devices that control both
the serial and parallel I/O are on the CPU board;
functionally, these devices form eight serial I/O channels and two
parallel I/O channels. The serial channels support the RS232C standard and the parallel ports can be configured for
either the Data Products or Centronics standard. One parallel port, Port B of a Z80-PIO, is the data-out port; port A
handles status and control information. Table 4-6 lists the
control signals for the parallel printers. Table 4-7 lists
the status signals for the printers, and Table 4-8 lists the
data output of port B.
Table 4-6
BIT NUMBER
0
1
2
3
Parallel Printer Output
Control Signals, Port A
CENTRONICS
Data strobe\
not used
not used
not used
DATA PRODUCTS
Data strobe
not used
not used
not U'sed
Table 4-7 Parallel Printer Input
status Signals, Port A
BIT NUMBER
4
5
6
7
4-12
CENTRONICS
DATA PRODUCTS
Busy\
Select
Fault\
Acknowledge\
Busy\
Online
Interface Valid
Data Demand
Zilog
4-12
Zilog
HRM
Table 4-8
HRM
Parallel Printer Data, Port B
BIT NUMBER
CENTRONICS
DATA PRODUCTS
Bi.t
Bi.t
Bi.t
Bi.t
Bi.t
Bit
Bi.t
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
Bit
Bit
Bit
Bit
Bit
Bit
Bit
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
Bit
Bit
Bit
Bit
Bit
Bit
Bit
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
4.5.1.2 Serial I/O: The serial 1/0 comprises 4 Z80B-SIO/2
devices.
Each device has two channels; Table 4-9 lists the
devices and their assigned channels.
Table 4-9
Serial I/O Devices and Channel Assignments
DEVICE NUMBER
CHANNEL ASSIGNMENT
SIO
SIO
SIO
SIO
Channels
Channels
Channels
Channels
0
1
2
3
0
2
4
6
and
and
and
and
1
3
5
7
Each channel of the serial IIO connects to its own baud-rate
generator.
These generators are channels in Z80B-CTC devices. The SIO channels and their corresponding baud-rate
generators are listed in Table 4-10~ The baud rate clock
comes from an independent baud-rate oscillator.
The frequency of the baud-rate clock is 1.2288 megahertz.
4-13
Zilog
4-13
Zilog
HRM
Table 4-10
HRM
SerLal Channels and Baud-rate Generators
SIO
SIO CHANNELS
BAUD NO.
CTC NO.
CTC CHANNEL
0
0
1
0
1
2
0
1
2
0
0
0
0
1
2
1
2
2
3
4
5
3
4
5
3
3
6
7
6
7
0
1
2
2
2
0
1
Serial channel 1 (console), with two exception, is identical
to every other serial channel.
The first exception is that the on-board monitor on the CPU
board uses channel 1 to communicate with the system operator
when the system is turned on. The initial baud rate for
channel 1 is factory set for 9600 by switch U70. It can be
set to one of the four values listed in Table 4-11.
These
settings permit the use of a variety of terminals as the
system console. After the system has been booted, the console baud rate can also be changed under software control.
The 4-pole dip swtic~ on the CPU board selects the primary
boot device setting the baud rate for the monitor console.
The primary boot devi6e will always be listed and tested
first by the SPUD Diagnostics. System error messages are
sent to the console. This is the second exception.
Table 4-11
SWITCH
(ON = 0)
B;aud Rate and Primary Boot Device
S'~itch Setting (SW U70)
BAUD RATE
1, 4
0
1
0
1
0
0
1
1
SWITCH
PRIMARY BOOT DEV!CE
2, 3
300 Baud
1200 Baud
9600 Baud
19200 Baud
1
0
1
0
1
1
0
0
8" Disk
5.25" Disk
SMDC
Reserved
System software can access the I/O channels using standard
Z8000 I/O instructions. Table 4-12 lists the I/O addresses
of the I/O channels.
4-14
Zilog
4-14
HRM
HRH
Zilog
I/O Channels and Their Addresses
Table 4-12
I/O ADDRESS
I/O DEVIeE AND eHANNEL
FF81
FF83
FF85
FF87
SIO
SIO
SIO
SIO
0.,
0,
0:,
0:,
channel
channel
channel
channel
o ~ data
FF89
FF8B
FF8D
FF8F
SIO
SIO
SIO
SIO
1,
1,
1"
1,
channel
channel
channel
channel
2 , data
3, data
2 , control
3, control
FF91
FF93
FF95
FF97
SIO
SIO
SIO
SIO
2,
2,
2,
2,
channel
channel
channel
channel
4 , data
.FF99
FF9B
FF9D
FF9F
SIO
SIO
SIO
SIO
3,
3,
3,
3,
channel
channel
channel
channel
6 , data
7 , data
6 , control
7, control
1 , data
o , control
1 , control
5, data
4 , control
5, control
FFA1
FFA3
FFA5
FFA7"
eTe 0, channel 0 (baud 0 for SIO 0, channel 0)
eTe 0, channel 1 (baud 1 for SIO 1 , channel 1 )
eTe 0, channel 2 (baud 2 for SIO 1 , channel 2)
eTe o, channel 3
FFA9
FFAB
FFAD
FFAF
eTe 1, channel 0 (baud 3 for SIO 1 , channel 3 )
eTC 1 , .channel 1 (baud 4 for SIO 2, channel 4) .
eTe 1 , channel 2 (baud 5 for SIO 2, channel 5)
eTC 1 , channel 3
FFB1
FFB3
FFB5
FFB7
eTe
·eTe
eTe
eTe
2,
2,
2,
2,
channel
channel
channel
channel
0 (baud 6 for SIO 3, channel 6)
FFB9
FFBD
FFBB
FFBF
PIO
PIO
PIO
PIO
0,
0,
0,
0,
channel
channel
channel
channel
A,
A,
B,
B,
4-15
1 (haud 7 for SIO 3., channel 7)
2
3
Zilog
data
control
data
control
4-15
HRM
Zilog
HRM
4.5.2. Winchester Disk Controller: The Disk Controller
controls the fully buffered transfer of data between the CPU
(host) and a selected disk drive. The block diagram in Figure 4-3 shows the relationship between the controller and
both the ZBI and the disk drives. All transactions between
the controller and the host pass through connectors P1 and
J13 and over the ZBI. Transactions between the controller
and a selected disk drive pass through connectors P2 and
J23, the drive bus. The signals on connector P1 are the
standard ZBI signals; the signals on P2 are common to only
slot three on the back plane. Table 4-13 lists the interface signals between the disk controller and the disk
drives.
.
4.5.2.1 CPU Interface: The CPU communicates with the controller through 16 8-bit command registers and an 8-bit
command-status (CIS) register (Figure 4-4).
Each register
has a specific command assignment and a specific address.
The CPU writes commands into command registers xxOO through
x x0F ;
the con t roll err e ad s the s ere g is t e r san d per f 0 r~m s the
specified commands. The controller places the results or
status of the specified command in the CiS register which
the CPU reads. Table 4-14 lists the command and CiS register s.
The command and CiS registers reside in the CPU's IIO space
on any 256-word boundary. Within this 256-word block, the
command registers are at "relative addresses xxOO to xxOF
hexadecimal and the CIS register at address xx10. The two
most significant hex values of the address, xx, can be set
by j urn per son the c () nt roll e r boa rd. Ta b 1 e 4- 15 1 i s t s the
jumpers and the bits (15 through 8) that the jumpers control.
This scheme allows more than one controller within
the same IIO space.
Figure 4-5 shows a segMent of IIO space, containing three
256-word blocks. The two most significant hexadecimal nibbles (AA, BE, and CC) of the addresses can be set by using
the jumpers listed in Table 4-15.
For example, in the
address AAOO, if AA is to equal FF hex, then no jumper is
connected in any of the jumper groups, and all the lines are
high. When a jumper is connected in any jumper group, the
jumper shorts its associated line to ground, a low level.
The controller can accommodate either 2716 or 2732 EPROMs.
Jumpers on the control:er board permit the selection of both
the type of EPROM and any necessary wait states. Tabl~ 4-16
lists the jumpers for memory selections.
4-16
Zilog
4-16
Zilog
HRM
DISK
DRIVE
DISK
DRIVE
0
1
~
HRM
DISK
DRIVE
2
~
DISK
DRIVE
3
AUXILIARY CONNECTOR
WINCHESTER
DISK
CONTROLLER
s
ZBIBUS
00161
Figure 4-3 Winchester Disk Controller,
Functional Relationships
4-17
Zilog
4-17
HRM
Zilog
HRM
r - - - -DiSKCoNTROLl:ER- - - -
"l
I
I
I
I
C:OMMAND REGISTER
I
I
I
DRIVE REGISTER
I
HEAD REGISTER
CYLINDER LOW
REGISTER
CYLINDER HIGH
REGISTER
SECTOR REGISTER
RESERVED
RESERVED
TRANSFER WORD
COUNT, BITS 7·0
TRANSFER WORD
COUNT, BITS 15·8
XXOA
'--_":"'-_-'\
YRANSFER ADDRESS
BITS 7-0
XXOB
TRANSFER ADDRESS
BITS 15·8
XXOC
l"RANSFER ADDRESS
BITS 23·16
RESERVED
RESERVED
RESERVED
I
L
-.l
00177
Figure 4-4 Disk Controller Command and
Command status (CIS) Registers
4-18
Zilog
4-18
HRM
Zilog
HRM
HIGH
CG10
CGOO
B810
BEIOO
AA,10
AAOO
16 WORD
BLOCK 3
COMMAND AND
CIS REGISTERS
111"1111,'111111
16 WORD
BLOCK 2
COMMAND AND
CIS REGISTERS
16 WORD
BLOCK 1
COMMAND AND
CIS REGISTERS
LOW
o0
Figure 4-5
1 7 5
Disk Coniroller, I/O Space
~.5.2.2 Controller/Drive Interface:
Communications between
the disk controller and a selected disk drive travel over
the P2/J23 mating connectors. Table 4-13 lists and defines
the signals on these lines. The disk controller can control
either a CDC or Finch drives. All drives attached to any
controller must be of one type. Table 4-17 lists the codes
for the command and status words on the control bus between
the disk controller and the disk drive.
4-19
Zilog
4-19
Zilog
HRM
Table 1t-13
HRM
Disk Controller and Disk Drive, Interface
Signals, Connector P2/J23, Slot 3
SIGNAL NAME
FUNCTION
Control Bus
CB7 to CBO
These eight signal lines are bidirectional.
Control signals from the Controller to the
selected drive are transmitted on these lines.
The DIRECTION\ signal controls the direction
transfer.
DIRECTION\.
This signal determines the direction of transfer
over the control bus (CB7 through CBO). When
DIRECTION\ is high, the controller reads st.atus
information from one of the four status registers.
When this line is low the controller is sending
commands to the selected drive.
o
Control Words
and 1, CWDO
and CWD1
These signals identify one of four bytes that
can be 0 nth e con t r 01 bus. Th e DI R:E CTI O.N \
signal identifies the current byte as a c6mmand
or :status byte.
Attention :'
ATTN\
The controller sends this signal to all drives
to initiate handshaking.
Cycle Acknowledge CYAK\
Each drive generates the CYAK\ signal in .
res)onse to the ATTACK signal.
Attention
Acknowledge
ATTACK
The selected drive generates this active-high
signal in response to the ATTN\ signal from
the controller. ATTACK then causes the
selected drive to generate the CYACK signal.
INDEX\
The selected drive generates an index pulse
for each revolution of the disk. Each cylinder
produces a pulse which is 2.5 microseconds long
and which occurs every 16.67 milliseconds.
Sector 00 immediately follows the pulse.
SECTOR\
The selected drive generates this 2.5 microseconds signal.
SEEK END\
The selected drive generates this signal at
the end of a seek operation.
DRIVE FAULT\
The selected drive generates this signal to
indicate an error condition within the
drive itself.
4-20
Zilog
4-20
HRM
Zilog
SIGNAL NAME
HRM
FUNCTION
Unit Acknowledge 0 to 3
UNITACKO\ to
UNITACK3\
The selected drive places its binary address
on these lines.
READ ENABLE\
The controller generates this signal to read
the selected drive at the current cylinder.
Before activating this signal the controller
must send a control word 2 and then wait until
the selected drive returns the CYACK signal.
WRITE ENABLE\
The controller generates this signal to write
to the selected drive at the current cylinder.
If the heads are write-protected, a fault
results. The controller must send a control
word 2 and then wait until the selected
drive retunrs the CYACK signal.
MASTER RESET\
A high-to-low transistion on this line resets
all internal latches and output ports.
BI-DATA\
These lines form a bidirectional, differential
pair that transmits NRZI read data from the
currently selected drive to the controller
whenever READ ENABLE\ is active.
SYSTEM CLK\
A pre-recorded pattern on the surface of one
of the disks on the drive generates this
signal. The selected drive sends this sigDal
to the controller: the controller derives
the write clock (WRITE CLK\) from system
CLLX. The controller sends the WRITE CLK\
to the selected drive.
WRITE CLK\
This is a differential signal which the
controller derives from the SYSTEM CLK\.
4-21
Zilog
4-21
Zilog
HRM
Table 4-14
REGISTER
ADDRESS
HRM
Command and Command-Status Registers
DEFINITION
NAME
xxOO
Command Register
The CPU sends specific commands
to the controller through this
register. This must be the last
register the CPU writes too, for
it clears the status byte to
enable handshaking between th~
CPU and the controller and
begins the operation.
xX01
Unit Register
The CPU uses this register to
specify which unit (drive) it
wants to participate in I/O
activity. One of four drives
(0, 1,2, or 3) can be specified.
xx02
Head Register
The CPU uses this register to
specify the read-write head it
wants for the current operation.
xX03
Cylinder Address
Low Register
The C·PU stores the lo\.-.r-order 8
bits (7 to 0) of the 16-bit
cylinder address in this register.
xX04
Cylinder Address
High Register
The CPU stores the high-order
8 bits (15 to 8) of the cylinder
address in this register. With
the aurrent disk drives, only
bits 8 and 9 are used.
xX05
Sector Register
The CPU stores in this register
the number of the sector it
wants to read from or write to.
xx06
Reserved
For expansion
xX07
Reserved
For expansion
xX08
Transfer Word
Count
8i ts 7 to 0
This register contains the
loworder byte of the transfer
word count.
xxog
Transfer Word
Count
:B its 15 to ·3
This register contains the
highorder byte of the transfer
word count.
4-22
Zilog
4-22
HRM
REGISTER
ADDRESS
xxOA
Zilog
NAME
HRM
DEFINITION
Transfer Address
Bits 7 to 0
This register contains the
loworder byte of the 3-byte
transfer address. The transfer
address is the location of the
first word of a block of memory
allocated for the transfer.
Data can be leaving memory or
coming to it.
The command from the CPU
determinis the direction of
transfer. The Read Sector
command moves data from disk
to main memory. The Write
Sector command moves data from
main memory to disk.
xxOB
Transfer Address,
Bits 15 to 8
The CPU stores the intermediate
byte of the transfer address
in this register.
xxOC
Transfer Address
The CPU stores the high-order
byte of the transfer address
in this register.
xXOD
Reserved
For transfer address bits 32
to 24.
xxOE
Reserved
xxOF
Reserved
xx10
Command-Status
(CIS) Reglster
4-23
Zilog
4-23
HRM
HRM
Zilog
Table 4-15
Jumper Settings for Address of
Command and CIS Registers
JUMPERS
PURPOSE
CONNECTION AND RESULT
E10,E18
Causes bit 15 of address
E10 to E18: bit 15 low
to be either a high or low
level
E11,E19
Causes bit 14 of address
E11 to E19: bit 14 low
to be either a high or low
level
E12,E20
Causes bit 13 of address
E12 to E20: bit 13 low
to be either a high or low
level
E13,E21
Causes bit 12 of address
E13 to E21 : bit 12 low
to be either a high or low
level
E14,E22
Causes bit 11 of address
E14 to E22: bit 11 low
to be either a high or low
level
E16;E23
Causes bit 10 of address
E15 to E23: bit 10 low
to be either a high or low
level
E15,E24
Causes bit 09 of' address
E16·to E24: bit 09 low
to be either a high or low
level
E17,E25
Causes bit 08 of address
E17 to E25: bit 08 low
to be either a high or low
level
4-24
Zilog
4-24
HRM
Zilog
Table 4-16
HRM
Disk Controller Jumper Settings for Memory
JUMPER
GROUP (E)
PURPOSE
CONNECTION AND RESULT
E1,E2,E3
E41,E42,E43
Permit inserting
one watt state
whenever any
on-board memory is
accessed or whenever
only on-board EPROMs
are accessed.
E2 to E3 and E42 to E43:
Inserts one wait state
during access of any
on-board memory.
E1 and E3 and E42 to E43:
Inserts one wait state
during access of EPROM
only.
E41 to E43:
No wait states for controller on-board RAM or EPROM.
E4,E5,E6
E7,E8,E9
Permit selecting
either 2716 or
2732 EPROMs.
E4 to E6
Use 2716
E5 to E6
Use 2732
and E7 to E9:
EPROMs.
and E8 to E9:
EPROMs.
4.'5.2.3 Command and status Words: The disk drive control
bus contains a command word when the direction line is
activated, otherwise it contains a status word. The number
of the command or status words is determined by the coding
of CWDO and CWD1.
Command Word O--Command Word 0 is used to select one of fifteen.drives by a four bit unit address (uA).
Command Word 1--Command Word 1 is used, together with the
two low-order bits of Command Word 0, to establish the
binary address of the desired cylinder specified by the
Cylinder Address Register (CAR).
Command Word 2--Command Word 2 has three basic purposes:
(1) select forward or reverse offset, (2) select early or
late data strobe, and (3) select one of three possible head
positions by the HARD and HAR1 bit positions.
Command Word 3--Command Word 3 enters a Diagnostic mode,
Customer Engineering (CE) mode, Rezero (Return the heads to
cylinder zero), clears a fault, or establishes which heads
are to be write protected.
4-25
Zilog
4-25
HRM
Zilog
HRM
Status Words--The control bus contains a status word when
the direction line is deactivated for four possible standard
status words. Status Word O--Status Word 0 communicates
eight specific error conditions to the Controller-Formatter
when a fault condition exists.
Status Word 1--Status Word 1 signals seven
different
error/exception conditions to the Controller-Formatter.
Status Words 2 and 3--Together cont~in the contents of the
Position Address Register (PAR) for current locations of the
heads.
Table 4-17.
..... 0
QQ
~ ~;~
QU U
C
0
M
M
A
N
D
S
T
A
T
U
S
Disk Command and Status Words
(MSB)
Bit 1
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
(LSB)
Bit 0
UNIT
ADDR2
UNIT
ADDRI
UNIT
ADORa
SPARE
a·
SPARE
a
CARS
100
UNIT
ADDR3
CARS'
WaRDa
WORD 1
1 a 1
CAR7
CAR6
CARS
CAR4
CAR3
CAR2
CARl
CARa
WORD 2
1 1 a
SERVO
OFFSET
REV
SERVO
OFFSET
FWD
STROBE
LATE
STROBE
EARLY
SPARE
a
SPARE
a
HARl
HARO
WORD 3
1 1 1
DIAG
MODE
CE
MODE
REZEHO
FAULT
CLEAR
SPARE
SPARE
EXT
PROTl
EXT
PROTu
WORD a
a a a
NOT
READY
SERVO
ERROR
R/W
FAULT
SPEED
ERROR
PWR
LOSS
WRITE
PROTO
SEEKING
RZRNG
WORD 1
a a 1 GUARD
BAND
PLO
ERROR
UNSAFE
INVAL
CMND
TIME
OUT
PORI
MR
SPARE
ILL
ADDR
WORD 2
a 1 a
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
PAR9
PARS
WORD 3
a 1 1
.PAR7
PAR6
PARS
PAR4
PAR3
PAR2
PARI
PARO
NC)T
ON
CYL
4.5.3.
storage Module Device Controller: The
storage
Module Device Controller (SMDC) is a high performance controller that links the ZBI system bus to each storage Module
Drive (SMD) interface board.
The SMDC consists of two
boards (SMDCA and SMDCB). Board SMDC A is the ZBI control
signal connection to the I/O panel SMDCA OUT connector.
External cabling to SMDC A IN on the Disk/Tape Module connects the ZBI signals through a 60-pin SMD A cable I/O connector to the SMD Interface board. The SMDC B board is the
data I/O connection through I/O panel SMDC B OUT on the processor and SMDC B IN on the Disk/Tape Modules. I/O Data to
and from the Processor Module is provided at the SMDC B
panel connectors that connect up to four 26-Pin SMD B cables
directly
to the interface of each SMD drive.
Local
4-26
Zilog
4-26
HRM
Zilog
HRM
interface signals between the two boards are cabled on a
flat 40 pin cable to the front of both boards. All drive
connections are made by cabling backplane connectors to the
SMD A and SMD B I/O connectors on the processor SMDC I/O
panel and from the I/O panel to the SMDC A and SMDC B inputs
on the Disk/Tape Module. Figure 4-6 shows the SMDC A and
SMDC B Functional Relationships. The SMDC A ZBI connection
is through P1/J16.
All data transfers and input/output
addresses are 16 bits. All data addresses are 24 bits. The
interrupt vector is programmable, by the host CPU.
DRIVE 1
CONTROL
CABLE
110
PLATE
LOCAL INTERFACE
SMDCA
SMDC B
;A
~r------------,
ZBI BUS
Figure 4-6
4-27
00380
storage Module Device Controller
Functional Relationship
Zilog
4-27
HRM
Zilog
HRM
4.5.3.1 Command Packet Cont"rol: Commands are sent to the
controller in the form of 32-byte packets that describe the
operation to be performed. At any given time, the controller
may be executing one command packet for each SMD. Upon completion of the command, the packet is written back into main
memory and the appropriate status registers are updated. The
controller maintains a separate packet address for each SMD.
Most commands are sent to the SMDC in a packet of 32 bytes.
However, certain information, such as packet address and
interrupt controls, is communicated by one 16-bit write-only
command and one 16-bit read-only status register that share
a common address.
Command Register
7
DTA
: INIT
NAME
BITS
CR:CMD
0-2
6
3
2 1 0
: RI I DI : EI I WK : CMD
FUNCTION
COMMAND
o - nap
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
4-28
4
5
read packet addresses from DT
reserved
reserved
dispatch table address byte 0 (lsb)
dispatch table address byte 1
dispatch table address byte 2 (rnsb)
interrupt vector
CR:WK
3
wakeup
CR:EI
4
enable interrupts (reset by IUS)
CR:DI
5
disable interrupts
CR:HI
6
reset IP and IUS
CR:INIT
7
initialize controller
CR:DTA
8-15
dispatch table address byte
or interrupt vector
Zilog
4-28
Zilog
HRM
HRM
Status Register
15 14 13 12 11 10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
o
2
: DRV :ES: ending status: NDT l 0 : 0 : 0 : 0 : IP : IUS I BZ
NAME
BIT
MEANING
SR:BZ
o
controller busy from CR:CMD
interrupt under service
SR:IUS
2
interrupt pending
3-6
reserved
SR:NDT
7
no dispatch table/interrupt vector
SR:ES
8-13
packet ST or self test code
SR:DRV
14-15
drive number 0-3
SR:IP
Self-test
On power-up or after a controller initialization (CR:INIT),
the controller will be busy (SR:BZ) until the self test routine and initialization are complete. If the setftest fails,
the SMDC will remain busy. The status register (SR:ES) may
contain one of the following error codes:
8:
9:
A:
2910 sequencer error
2901 ALU error
internal memory error
The status register should be examined only after it has
been determined that the busy bit was not reset. The
selftest takes ,less than a second when successful.
Power-Up
The SMDC's SR:NDT status bit will be on after power-up or
controller initialization (CR:INIT). This indicates that the
dispatch table address and interrupt vector have not yet
been sent by the host. The four bytes are sent with the CR
command. After each byte is sent, the controller will
briefly be busy (SR:BZ) while the byte is absorbed. The host
waits until SR:BZ goes to zero after sending each byte. The
read-packet-addresses command is then given. When all five
commands have been given, SR:NDT is reset.
4-29
Zilog
4-29
Zilog
HRM
HRM
When a packet command is complete and the SMDC command
register CR:EI bit is set, the SMC interrupts the host.
The
interrupt acknowledge vector is:
Interrupt Acknowledge Vector
15 14 13 12 11 10
: DRV:
9
ending status
8
7
.•. 0
: vector
NAME
BITS
CONTENTS
IV:VEC
0-7
vector from CR
IV:ES
8-13
packet command ending status
IV:DRV
14-15
drive number 0-3
Dispatch Table
The dispatch table provides the address and status of each
of four packets .. If fewer than four drives are present, the
dispatch table ~ntries corresponding to nonexistant drives
should be present.but set-to zero. The dispatch table may
not cross a 64 kilobyte boundry. Before the dispatch table
address is sent to the controller, all packet status entries
should be initialized to IDLE(O). All packets should also
be initialized to O.
4-30
Zilog
4-30
HRM
2ilog
DISPATCH TABLE
15 14 13 12 11 10
HRM
9
8
6
5
4
3
00 PSO
packet status - drive 0
02 PS1
packet status - drive 1
04 PS2
packet status - drive 2
06 PS3
packet status - drive 3
08 PHO
packet address msh - drive 0
OA PLO
packet address Ish - drive 0
OC PH1
packet address msh - drive 1
OE PL1
packet address Ish - drive 1
10 PH2
packet address fish - drive 2
12 PL2
packet address Ish - drive 2
14 PH3
packet address msh - drive 3
16 PL3
packet address Ish - drive 3
DT:PS VALUES:
0
1
2
4
= IDLE
= GO
= BUSY
= DONE
(set
(set
(set
(set
by
by
by
by
2
1 0
host)
host)
SMDC)
SMDC)
When an operation is to be initiated, the control information must be loaded into the appropriate packet and the
.corresponding dispatch table status word (DT:PS) set to GO.
A command word is then issued with CR:WK (wakeup) and
optionally CR:EI (enable interrupt). Wheh the controller is
idle, it interrogates the wakeup bit, sees it turned on,
turns it off, and reads the dispatch table.
Any dispatch
table entries with packet status = GO cause the corresponding packets to be read into the SMDC's internal packet
tables and DT:PS to be set to BUSY.
Internally, seeks are initiated on any drive with an active
packet requiring a seek. When a seek is complete, or if no
seek is required (e.g. select command), the command is performed and the packet in host memory updated with status,
the dispatch table status set to DONE and IP posted. The
host may be scanning SR:IP or waiting for an interrupt with
CR:EI set.
4-31
2ilog
4-31
HRM
Zilog
HRM
Once IP is turned on or the interrupt acknowledged, the host
reads SR and then issues CR:RI to reset IP and IUS regardless of whether the interrupts were enabled. Once IP is
reset, the controller may interrupt again. The interrupt
enable flag in the controller is reset by CR:DI, which may
be issued with CR:RI if desired.
Ending status and interrupting drive number are made available in the high order byte of the interrupt vector returned
by the controller during an interrupt acknowledge transaction.
The drive number is also available in SR:DRV until
CR:RI is issued.
Packet
15 14 13 12 11 10
00 CM
9
7
8
6
5
o
3
lRZIRTlEC:
SKE
SEL
:SMlXM:BZIROIFTISElOClRY\
08 CT
byte by sector count
OA AH
dma address 23-16
OC AL
dma address 15-0
OE UN
unit
10 CY
cylinder
12 HD
14 VS
16 SC
head
-------------------------------------------------lFSINWl
: head bias & volume select
sector
1 8 OF
1A-1E
:0-:0.. :
:SLlSE\
reserved
15 14 13 12 11 10
4-32
0
: 0 10 : ending status
04 SB
06 DS
2
CMD
lNRlNE:NOl
02 ST
4
9
Zilog
8
7
6
5
4
3
')
c_
o
4-32
HRM
2ilog
HRM
CM defines the current operation by the CMD code and several
command modifier flags.
CM:NR:
no retries; use OF
CM:NE:
no error correction
CM:NO:
no offsets during retries
CM:CMD:
0: nop
1 : write RAM
2 : read RAM
3 : select drive
4:
5:
6:
7:
8:
9:
A:
B:
C:
D:
E:
F:
priority select
release
reset fault
position ( seek/rezero)
write format
write long
write
reserved
read format
read long
read
size disk
COMMANDS
NOP is provided for diagnostic purposes; IP is posted
immediately. The microcode revision is returned in CT.
WRITE RAM copies data from the specified host memory address
to the data buffer space of the controller from location 0
up to local variable and packet storage. Provided for diagnostic purposes.
READ RAM copies data from controller memory, starting at
location 0, to host memory. Provided for diagnostic purposes.
SELECT causes the specified drive to
status returned in DS.
be
selected
and
its
PRIORITY SELECT is provided for dual access support.
RELEASE is provided for dual-access support.
RESET FAULT is provided for diagnostic and error recovery.
A RESET FAULT command is issued to the specified drive.
4-33
Zilog
4-33
HRM
Zilog
HRM
POSITION - For diagnostic purposes, a seek is performed to
the specified cylinder. If CY is -1 a rezero and reset-fault
rather than seek occurs.
WRITE FORMAT initializes the ID and data fields of one or
more sectors in a track. The host prepares the IDS contiguously in a buffer, four words per sector. CT is set to the
number of sectors to be formatted; SC specifies the starting
sector. Sector numbers may be arranged as desired. One or
more sectors may be flagged as bad or as spare.
The sector IDs buffer prepared by the host contains the following 4 words for each sector to be formatted:
15 14 13 12 11 10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
0
\ET1EC\EP\
CYLINDER
HEAD
lFLISPl
SECTOR
ID:ET
flags last sector on a track
ID:EC
Flags last sector on a cylinder
ID:EP
flags last sector on a pack
ID:FL
flags a sector" as bad
ID:SP
flags a sector as a spare
WRITE" causes data to be written to a specific location on a
specified drive.
If a partial sector is written with WRITE
or WRITE LONG, the contents of the remainder of the sector
are undefined.
WRITE LONG is similar to WRITE except that the data ECC
field is written from the four bytes following the data
instead of being internally computed. This command is provided for diagnostic purposes.
READ FORMAT is the inverse of WRITE FORMAT, except that the
ID EGG is read along with each ID. Six words are returned
for each sector specified. Sectors are read in physical
order starting with the sector specified by SG. ID contents
are passed directly without error checking.
4-34
Zilog
4-34
HRM
Zilog
HRM
READ LONG causes sectors to be read along with their ECCs,
which are appended to the end of each data block. Provided
for diagnostic purposes to test error correction, the host
writes a sector with a normal WRITE, reads it back with READ
LONG, induces an error by switching one or more bits, writes
the erroneous buffer with WRITE LONG, and then reads the
sector with a normal READ command.
READ causes the specified sector(s) to be
read
and
transferred to host memory. If necessary and not suppressed,
error correction and retry procedures are invoked.
SIZE DISK causes the controller to examine the specified
drive and return in the packet cylinder, head and sector
words, the number of cylinders, heads, and sectors on the
drive.
The controller finds the size by scanning the IDs
and looking for end-of-track, cylinder, and pack ID flags.
This command takes several seconds. If the controller scans
past cylinder 4096 without finding an end-of-pack bit, a
pack overflow error is declared.
4-35
Zilog
4-35
HRM
Zilog
HRM
SECTOR ID FORMAT
15 14 13 12 11 10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
0
lETlEC:EP:
CYLINDER
HEAD
:FLlSP:
SECTOR
ECC MSH
ECC LSH
ID:ET
flags the last sector on each track
ID:EC
flags the last sector on each cylinder
ID:EP
flags the last sector on the pack
ID:FL
flagged (bad) sector
ID:SP
spare (unused) sector
SECTOR FORMAT
Each sector contains an ID field and a data field separated
by gaps. The gap sizes depend on the drive type , as does
the number of sectors per track. One sector on each track is
reserved to serve as a spare sector. If a bad sector is
found, it is fl~gged and the spare is substituted. The SMDC
finds sectors by searching for a matching ID (cylinder, head
and sector)~ The formatter program can implement sector
reassignment and sector interleaving when it formats a track
by properly setting up the ID fields. The gap figures given
are for SMD and may vary for other drives.
4-36
Zilog
4-36
Zilog
HRM
ITEM
BYTES
DESCRIPTION
SECTOR MARK
-1
marks beginning of each sector
GAP
8+16
head scatter
1
+
PLO lock time
ID SYNC
2
x'OOFO'
ID
8
flags, cylinder, head, sector
ID ECC
4
IO error checking
CA. P 2
DATA SYNC
DATA
DATA ECC
GAP 3
4-37
HRM
1+16
write splice + PLO lock time
x'OOFO'
2
512
4
1+8
data error detection and correction
pad
Zilog
+
end of track
4-37
Zilog
HRM
HRM
ST is returned by the SMDC when the operation is complete.
It contains an error identification·code. For some errors,
it is necessary to refer to S8 and DS below for details.
0:
1:
2:
3:
no error
initialization error (no DT or IV)
CR:CMD 4-7 and 1 must be given
sector overrun error
read or write gate on at end of sector
DMA memory error (ME) returned in SR:ES*
*
4:
5:
6:
7:
8:
9:
10:
11:
12:
13:
14:
15:
32:
33:
34:
35:
36:
37:
38:
39:
40:
4-38
NOTE: When the SMDC detects a parity
error, it does NOT rewrite the
packet, nor does it update the
packet status in the dispatch
table to DONE. A ME code in
SR:ES is the only indication
of a DMA parity error.
select error
no drive or multiple drives selected
CT (count) invalid
SMD dual access busy
multiple rezero error
rezero didn't correct SMD fault
SMD status error (see DS)
odd DMA address
pack overflow
multiple-sector read/write past end of pack
power failure detected during read/write
undefined operation (CM:CMD)
unrecovered data error
sector not found
write protect violation
timeout errors:
idle loop
waiting for IP and IUS to clear
waiting for DMA to complete
waiting for SMD on-cylinder
waiting for SMD servo clock
waiting for SMD data clock
waiting for sector/index mark
waiting for ID sync
waiting for data sync
Zilog
4-38
HRM
Zilog
HRM
SB contains status bits:
NAME
BIT
MEANING
SB:EC
0
error correction attempted
SB:RT
SB:RZ
retry attempted
rezero required to clear fault
2
OS contains status bits returned from the selected drive.
The bit assignments for DS:SKE and DS:SEL correspond to
ports 0-3, not drives 0-3. In order for the drives and ports
to correspond, drive 0 is plugged into port 0, drive 1 into
port 1, etc.
NAME
BIT
MEANING
OS:RY
o
selected drive
DS:OC
ready
selected drive on cylinder
DS:SE
2
selected drive seek error
DS:FT
3
selected drive fault
'OS: RO
4
selected drive read only
DS:BZ
5
selected drive busy (dual access)
OS:XM
6
index mark (internal use only)
DS:SM
7
sector mark (internal use only)
DS:SEL
8-11
ports 0-3 selected
DS:SKE
12-15
ports 0-3 seek end
CT is the number of bytes to be read or written in
read/write operations or the number of sectors to be read or
written in read/write format operations. If a CT byte count
is odd, the command is rejected. A NOP command returns the
microcode revision in CT.
4-39
Zilog
4-39
Zilog
HRM
HRM
AH and AL form the 'DMA starting address for operations
involving a data transfer. If AL is odd the command is
rejected.
UN is the SMD unit number 0-15 to be used for the operation.
CY is the starting cylinder number O-n.
HD is the starting head number O-n.
VS contains control information for multi-volume drives.
For SMD it is set for O. VS:HB is ORed into the head ID
field during a format write.
VS:FS
force seek for volume select (CMD)
VS:NW
no wait for on-cylinder (MMD fixed heads)
VS:HB
head bias (volume select for CMD)
SC is the starting sector number O-n.
OF specifies four bits of head offset and strobe timing data
to be used if CM:NR(no retry) is set.
OF:O+
OF:OOF:SE
OF:SL
servo offset plus
servo offset minus
data strobe early
data strobe late
4.5.3.2 SHD Interface: The SMDC interface signals to the
SMD drives consist of the address and control functions that
are transferred on the Bit 0 through Bit 9 signals on the
SMDC A. The information on these lines is indicated by the
the individual CYLTAG,SELTAG, HEADTAG, and CONTAG tag lines
when true. CYLTAG- When true low, the ten bus lines carry
the cylinder address to the SMD. Since it is a direct
addressing device, the SMDC need only place the new address
on the lines and strobe the lines with CYLTAG-. The SMD must
be On Cylinder before CYLTAG- is sent. The bus lines should
be stable throughout the tag time.
HEADTAG- When true low, this signal is
selected by the bits on the bus line.
4-40
Zilog
the
head
address
4-40
HRM ..
.lilog
HRM
CONTAGThis signal enables the following individual control bits and must be true for the entire control operation.
1. Write Gate (Bit 0)
2.
The Write Gate line
the write driver.
Read Gate (Bit 1)
3. Servo Offset
enables
Enables the digital read data
on the transmission lines.
(Bit 2)
When true, the actuator is.
offset from the nominal On
Cylinder position toward the
spindle.
4. Servo Offset - (Bit 3)
When true, the actuator is
offset from the nominal On
Cylinder position away from
the spindle.
5. Fault Clear (Bit 4)
A pulse is sent to the device
to clear the fault if condition no longer exists.
6. AM Enable (Bit 5)
The Address Mark (AM) Enable
tog~ther
with Write Gate.or
Read Gate allows the writing
address
or
recovering
of
marks.
7. RTZ
A Return to Zero (RTZ)
pulse
when sent to the device will
cause the actuator to seek
track 0, reset the head register, and clear the Seek Error
flip-flop.
( Bi t
+
6)
8. Data Strobe Early
(~it
7)
When true, ,the device PLO Data
Separator will strobe data at
a time earlier than normal.
9. Data Strobe Late (Bit 8)
When true, the device PLO Data
Separator will strobe the data
at a time later than normal.
10. Bit 9
Reserved
SECTOR - The sector mark is derived from the servo track.
Timing integrity is maintained throughout seek operations.
The number of sectors per revolution is switch selectable
and determined by dibits/sector clocks.
4-41
Zilog
4-41
HRM
Zilog
HRM
FAULT - When true, a fault condition exists in the SMD. The
following types of faults are detected: DC Voltage, Head
Select, Write, Write or Read while Off Cylinder, and Write
Gate during a Read operation. The line may be cleared by
Control Select or Fault Clear with the CONTAG enable.
SKERR - When this line is true, a Seek Error has occurred.
This line indicates the unit was unable to complete a move
within 500 ms or that the carriage has moved to a position
outside the recording field or received an illegal track
address. A Return to Zero (RTZ) clears the Seek Error and
returns the heads to cylinder zero while enabling the ONCYL
signal to the controller.
ONCYL - The On Cylinder status indicates the servo has positioned the heads over a track. The status is cleared with
any seek instruction causing carriage movement or zero-track
seek.
INDEX - The signal occcurs once per revolution and its leading edge is considered the leading edge of sector zero.
Timing integrity is retained throughout seek operations for
all SMDs.
READY - When true, with the device selected, this line indicates: the SMD is up to speed, the heads are positioned over
the recording tracks, and no fault condition exists within
the SMD.·
OPENCABLE - The open cable detector circuit disables the
interface when the SMD A interface cable is disconnected or
controller power is lost.
SELTAG - Using SEL1 through SEL8, the Unit Select Tag gates
the desired binary logic number of the unit selected into
the logic number compare circuit.
SEL1,SEL2,SEL4,SEL8 - These four lines are binary coded to
select the logical number of one of sixteen devices. The
individual unit number (0 - 15) is selectable by a logic
plug on the units operator panel.
SELECTED- (1.- 4.) - When the four (SEL1, SEL2,SEL4,SEL8)
select and compare the logical number with the selectable
individual unit and the SELTAG is received, the SELECTEDline becomes true and transmitted to the controller on the
SMD B cable.
WPROT - Enabling the Write Protect function inhibits the
writer under all conditions, illuminates an LED, and sends
the WPROT- signal to the SMDC A controller. The Write
4-42
Zilog
4-42
HRM
Protect
panel.
2ilog
function
is
enabled
HRM
by
a switch on the operator
SEEKEND - Seek End is a combination of On Cylinder or
Error indicating that a seek operation has terminated.
Seek
HOLD/PICK - Applying ground to the Pick and Hold lines
enables the first SMD in a Power-Up sequence. Once up to
speed, the PICK- signal is transferred to the next active
SMD.
BUSY - If the devicE~ is already reserved and/or selected, a
BUSY is issued to the controller on the SMD A cable and
SELECTED- issued on the SMD B cable.
WRITEDATA (0-3) - This line carries data (NRZ FORM) which is
to be recorded on the disk pack.
READDATA (0-3) - This line transmits the recovered data to
the controller in the NRZ form. SERVOCLK- (0-3) The Servo
Clock is a phased-locked 9.677 MHz clock generated from
dibits on the SMD and used to generate write data. This signal is available at all times to the controller.
READCLK (0-3) - The Read Clock defines the beginning of a
data cell. It is an internally derived clock signal and is
synchronous with the detected data. It is transmitted continuously to the controller.
WRITECLK (0-3) - The Write Clock signal is synchronized to
the NRZ data. The Write Clock is the received Servo Clock
which is retransmitted by the controller during a write
operation.
Cartridge Tape Controller: The tape controller is
the intelligent interface between the System 8000 CPU and
the tape drives (also called decks).
The controller derives
its intelligence from its on-board Z80B microprocessor.
Figure 4-7 shows the basic relationship between the controller and both the System 8000 bus (ZBI) and the tape
decks. Information flows between the controller and the CPU
over the ZBI (mating connectors P1/J14). The flow of information between the controller and a selected tape drive is
through mating connectors P2/J24 of slot 4 only of the system backplane. Figure 4-8 shows the allocation of the I/O
space of the controller.
4.5.4.
4-43
Zilog
4-43
HRM
Zilog
HRM
4.5.4.1 ZBI Interface: The controller and the host communicate through eight 16-bit (word)
read/write registers.
These registers appear in the controller's I/O space at
addresses 4GH through 4EH.
(The H stands for hexadecimal.)
Table 4-18 lists these registers and their
assignments.
On-board jumpers provide a means of changing the ZSI addtess
of the controller board. These jumpers are listed in Table
4-19.
The bit assignments of the upper byte of the interrupt vector are listed in Table 4-20. The commands that the
host sends to the controller are listed in Table 4-21, and
Table 4-22 defines the bits in the status register.
Table
4-23 lists the bits in the Master Interrupt Control (MIC)
register. All of the possible error conditions are listed
in Appendix C.
4.5.4.2 Drive Interface: The tape controller sends commands
to the tape drive to control its operation. These commands
set the drive address, track address, and motion controls.
Table 4-24 lists the commands that the controller sends to
the drive. The drive responds to the controller by sending
information back to the controller. Table 4-25 lists the
information that the drive sends to the controller.
4-44
Zilog
4-44
HRM
HRM
Zilog
r----.,I
I
OPTIONAL
I CARTRIDGEI
I
TAPE
I
I DRIVE I
L:n:-..1
I
I
CARTRIDGE
TAPE
DRIVE
r----'I
I
OPTIONAL
ICARTRIDGEI
I
TAPE
I
I
DRIVE
I
L~.J
I
I
I
I
I
I
r----'
I
I
II
I
LU..l
I
OPTIONAL I
CARTRIDG E
TAPE
DRIVE
I
I
I
I
V
AUXILIARY CONNECTOR
P2/J24
CARTRIDGE
TAPE
CONTROLLER
5
Z-BUS BACKPLANE INTERCONNECT (ZBI)
~j0162
Figure '4-7
4-45
Cartridge Tape Controller Functional Relationships
Zilog
4-45
HRM
Zilog
HRM
ENABLE
DECK TO
WRITE DATA
qTOTAPE
DECK
72H
CLOCK FIFO
DATA OUT
qTOFIFO
71H
RESET
CONTROLLER
DEVICES
q
TO ON·BOARD
RESETTABLE
DEVICES
.
SOH
INTERRUPT
HOST
CPU
qTOS8DOO
BUS (2BI)
SOH
STORE DMA
ADDRESS
BITS 23·16
ON·BOARD
PROCESSOR
280B
40H
FIFO DATA
IN
WRITE PORT
6 Mliz
BOARD
STATUS
READ PORT
DECK
STATUS
READ PORT
c;B¢TOTA
PE
DECK
P
P
TAPE DECK
q
TO SELECTED
q
TO TAPE DECK
TAPE CONTROLLER
STATUS
FROM SELECTED
20H
CONTROL
DECK
WRITE PORT
TAPE DECK
10H
SELECT
DECK
WRITE PORT
READIWRITE
16
PORTS
OOH
H
TOIFROM
58000 BUS
(ZBI)
a a 176
Figure 4-8
4-46
Cartridge Tape Controller I/O Address Space
Zilog
4-46
Zilog
HRM
Table 4-18
ADDRESS
40H
HRM
ZBI Tape Controller Interface Registers
REGISTER
DESCRIPTION
Interrupt Vector
The low-order byte contains the interrupt vector that host CPU writes
to the controller.
The high-order byte contains status information
that the controller sends
to the host.
42H
Command
The host sends commands
to this register.
The
controller accepts only
valid commands.
44H
Low DMA Start Address
The host sends the low
word of the DMA starting
address in this register.
Bit 0 of this byte must
be
a
0 so that the
address starts on a word
boundary.
46H
High DMA Start Address
This register
contains
the high-order byte (bits
16 to 23) of the
DMA
start address.
48H
DMA Length
This register
contains
the length of the
DMA
transfer. This value must
be less than 32 kilobytes
( 1k= 1024) .
4AH
St'3tus
The controller stores information about the tape
drive and controller in
this register. The host
reads this information.
Another table defines the
bits.
4-47
Zilog
4-47
Zilog
HRM
4CH
REGISTER
DESCRIPTION
Status 1
Bits
to 3 define the
number of retries for a
read or write command.
Bits 8 to 15 define the
number of blocks or files
that have been skipped
during a skip command.
°
Interrupt Control
4£H
HRM
Table 4-19
This is the master interrupt
control register.
Another table lists the
bit definitions.
Tape Controller Jumper Selection
for Base Address
CONNECTION AND
RESULT
JUMPER
GROUP (E)
PURPOSE
E1 , E2, E3
Set to expect either a
low or high bit SAD15
£1 to £2 (normal) :
bit SAD15 low
E2 to £3:
bit SAD15 high
£4, £5, E6
Set to expect either a
low or high bit SAD14
£4 to E5 (normal) :
bit SAD14 low
£5 to £6:
bit SAD14 high
£7, E8, E9
Set to expect either a
low or high bit SAD13
£7 to E8 (normal) :
bit SAD13 low
£8 to E9:
bit SAD13 high
E10,E11,E12
Set to expect either a
low or high bit SAD12
E10
bit
E11
bit
to £11 (normal):
SAD12 low
to E12:
SAD12 high
E13,E14,E15
Set to expect either a
low or high bit SAD11
E13
bit
E14
bit
to E14 (normal) :
SAD11 low
to E15:
SAD 11 high
4-48
Zilog
4-48
HRM
Zilog
HRM
JUMPER
GROUP (E)
PURPOSE
E16,E17,E18
Set to expect either a
low or high bit SAD10
E16
bit
E17
bit
E19,E20,E21
Set to expect either a
low or high bit SAD09
E19 to E20 (normal):
bit 09 low
E20 to E21 : bit 09 high
E22,E23,E24
Set to expect either a
low or high bit SAD08
E22 to E23 (normal) :
bit 08 low
E23 to E24: bit 08 high
E25,E26,E27
Set to expect either a
low or high bit SAD07
E25 to E26 (normal) :
bit 07 low
E26 to E27: bit 07 high
E28,E29,E30
Set to expect either a
low or high bit SAD06
E28 to E29:
bit 06 low
E29 to E30 (normal) : bit 06 h
E31,E32,E33
Set to expect either a
low or high bit SAD05
E31 to E32 (normal):
bit 05 low
E32 to E33: bit 05 high
E34,E35,E36
Set to expect either a
low or high bit SAD04
E34
bit
E35
bit
E37,£38,E39
Se~ to enable or disable the Controller
board
E37 to E38 (normal) :
enables board to receive
address from ZSI bus
E38 to E39:
disenable board
CONNECTION AND
RESULT
to E17 (normal) :
SAD10 low
to E18:
SAD10 high
to £35 (normal) :
SAD04 low
to E36:
SAD04 high
NOTE
The normal connection is wired on the board.
Changing the normal connection to a new base
address requires the cutting of traces and adding
jumper s .
4-49
Zilog
4-49
Zilog
HRM
Table lJ-20
Tape Interrupt Vector, Bit Definitions
BIT
NAME
MEANING
Bit 8
INTV
The current operation requires
invention.
Bit 9
BUSY
The controller is busy executing the
last command.
Bi t 10
CMDREJ
The controller rejects the current
command.
Bi t 11
DATERR
An uncorrectable data error has
occurred.
Bi t 12
SKNDNE
The current skip operation has not
been completed.
Bi t 13
OVERFL
A buffer overflow has occurred.
Bit 14
FFERR
A FIFO error has occurred.
B1 t
15
Not Used
Table
CODE (HEX)
4-50
HRM
Host-Tape Controller Commands
~-21
NAME
DEFINITION
0000
NOP
The controller loops while
a command from the host.
0001
READ
The controller reads
necessary, controller
retries.
0002
'iVRITE
The controller writes one block. If
necessary the controller back-spaces,
erases three inches of tape and retries.
0003
REWIND
Controller rewinds tape to it logical
beginning (6 inches past th'e load point) .
nn04
SKBF
Controller skips nn blocks forward (nn
is any value from 0 to 255).
nn05
SKBR
Controller skips nn
(nn=O to 255).
Zilog
waiting' for
one block. If
backspaces and.
blocks in reverse
4-50
HRM
HRM
Zilog
CODE (HEX)
nn06
NAME
SKFF
DEFINITION
Controller skips nn files forward (nn=
o to 255). A file is a group of blocks
followed by a file mark.
nn07
SKFR
Controller skips
(nn=O to 255).
0008
WFM
Controller
0009
LOAD
Controller moves the tape from the phyical load point to logical load point:
beginning of tape, track 0 selected.
OOOA
UNLD
Controller moves the tape
sical load point.
OnOB
SEL
Controller selects a new drive: address
is n, a value from 0 to 3.
OnOC
MRTRY
This sets the maximum number of retries
the controller is allowed for reads and
writes. At power on, the default is 10
retries: n=O to 15.
OnOE
STRK
Controller rewinds the tape and selects
new track: n=O to 3.
OnOF
MODE
Controller changes to mode n (n=0,1).
In mode 1, tape is divided into four
separate tracks. The logical beginning
of tape is at the beginning of each
track.
Logical end of tape is at the
end of each track.
REWIND moves the
tape to the start of each track; skips
do not carry from track to track.
writes
nn files in
file mark
reverse
on tape.
to the phy-
In mode 0, tape is one long track. Logical beginning of tape is at the start
of track 0 and the logical end of tape
is at the end of track 3. REWIND moves
the tape to the start of track 0; skips
carry from track to track.
At power on, the default is mode O.
0010
4-51
DIAG
The controller executes a diagnostic
test, checking the ROM, the FIFO, and
the host interface ports.
Zilog
4-51
Zilog
HRM
Table 4-22
BIT
4-52
HRM
status Register, Bit Definitions
NAME
DEFINITION
Bit 0
NOTAP
No tape cartridge in drive
Bit 1
FMDET
File mark detected during read or
or skip blocks
Bit 2
HWERR
Hardware error
Bit 3
INVAL
Invalid command
Bit 4
INAP
Inappropriate command
Bit 5
(Not Used)
Bit 6
BPARM
Bad DMA parameters
Bit 7
BLKTAP
Blank tape
Bit 8
PROT
Tape cartridge write protected
Bit 9
LBOT
Tape at logical beginning of tape
Bi t 10
LEOT
Tape at logical end of tape
Bit 11
RTRYAT
One or more retries
Bi t 12
UNITO
Tape drive address bit 0
Bi t 13
UNIT1
Tape drive
Bi t 14
TRKO
Track address bit 0
Bi t 15
TRK1
Track address bit
Zilog
addr~ss
atcem~ted
bit
4-52
HRM
Zilog
Table 4-23
BIT
NAME
Master Interrupt Control
Register, Bit Definitions
DEFINITION
Bit 0
MIE
Master interrupt enabled
Bit
IE
Interrupt enabled
Bit 2
DLe
Disable lower chain
Bit 3
Not defined
Bit 4
Not defined
Bit 5
Not defined
Bit 6
IUS
Interrupt under service
Bit 7
IP
Interrupt pending
Table 4-24
4-53
HRM
Tape Controller to Drive Interface Signals
SIGNAL
DEFINITION
RWD\
Rewinds the tape
REV\
Moves the tape.backwards
FWD\
Moves the tape forward
WEN\
Enables writing and erasing on the tape
WDE\
Enables sending of write-data strobes and
the writing of data on the tape
WNZ\
Serial data to be
drive
TR1\,TR2\
Select tracks during read, write, and
erase track operation, according to
following code:
Zilog
w~itten
to the tape
4-53
2ilog
HRM
SIGNAL
HRM
DEFINITION
Track Number
TR2\
TR1\
High
Low
Low
High
0
1
2
3
Low
High
Low
High
SLG\
Allows selection of tape drive designated
by unit select codes: SL4\, SL2\, SL1\.
SL4\,SL2\,SL1\
These form the unit (drive) select code
listed below:
Drive Selected
o
1
2
3
SL4\
H
H
H
L
SL2\
SL1\
H
L
L
H
L
H
L
H
4.5.5. Tape Controller Operation:
To start a tape operation, the host CPU reads the high-order byte of the
controller's interrupt vector to see if BUSY is set. If the
busy bit is set, the controller is still executing the last
command. If the controller is not busy, the host initial~
izes the interface registers and then writes a non-zero command in" the controlleF's command register. The flowchart in
Figure 4-9 shows the steps taken by the host.
The controller normally loops while it waits for a non-zero
command from the host. When the controller receives a command, it resets the interrupt-pending bit (IP) in the master
interrupt control register.
The controller sets the busy
bit in the upper byte of the interrupt vector register to
inform the host that it is busy with the current command.
However, before the controller processes the command, it
checks the validity of the command.
After processing the command, the controller resets the command register and sets the IP bit. Next, the controller
sends an interrupt to the host and waits for an acknowledgement, the controller sends its interrupt vector in response
to the acknowledgement. An upper byte of zero means that no
errors occurred.
The controller also sets the interruptunder-service bit (IUS).
4-54
2ilog
4-54
Zilog
HRM
Table
.SIGNAL
~-25
HRM
Tape Drive to Controller Interface Signals
DEFINITION
SLD\
Selected drive informs controller that the
drive has received its unit address.
RDY\
Tape cartridge is installed.
WND\
Selected drive has received a write enable
signal.
FLG\
Rewind completed.
LPS\
Load point sensed.
FUP\
Installed tape cartridge is unprotected.
BSY\
The drive is doing one of the following:
1) Automatic rewind after cartridge is
installed.
2) Executing rewind, forward, or reverse
command.
EWS\
The upper early warning hole in forward
direction has been reached.
WDS\
The drive is examining the state of WNZ\
signal.
4-55
Zilog
4-55
HRM
Zilog
HOST
HRM
TAPE CONTROLLER
r- -
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
---'
--,
I
I
I
I
1
-,)0178
Figure 4-9
4-56
Cartridge Tape Controller, Command Processing
Zilog
4-56
HRM
Zilog
HRM
The host reads the vector from the controller and clears the
controller's IUS bit. This action ends the interrupt subroutine for the host~ The controller clears both the IP and
the BUSY bits and loops while waiting for a new command.
4.5.6. Memory Subsystem Controller: The Memory Subsystem
controller controls up to 4 megabytes of dynamic read-write
memory. The controller can perform read-write operations
wit h b Yt e ( 8- bit) , wo r d ( 16- bit), and 1 0 n g- wo r d (-3 2- bit)
quantities. Figure 4-10 shows the functional relationship
between the controller and the ZBI and the memory modules
that it controls.
The controller stores data as 32-bit long words and adds to
this, seven bits of information for use by the errordetection and correction circuits. Figure 4-11 shows tne
overall organization of memory. During memory transactions,
the controller accepts a 24-bit address and the B/W\ and
W!LW\
control signals over the ZBI.
The two leastsignificant address bits and the B/W and W/LW\ signals
select one of the four bytes at the location to be read or
modified.
4.5.5.1
Byte Translation:
During transQctions involving
bytes, the controller receives a data byte from ZBI lines
ADO through AD7. Figure 4-12 shows the flow from a register, through the controller, and to memory. The controller
places byte A, the first byte, in location 0 (bits 31 to
24). For this transaction, the bus controller sets both the
B/W\ and W/LW\ control lines high to identify the current
transfer as a byte transfer. The bus controller also places
low levels (0) on ZBI address lines ADOO and AD01 to tell
the memory controller to place byte A in bit positions 31
to 24.
Next, the memory controller places byte B, C, and D in the
succeeding memory locations to fill up the current double
word of memory. The memory controller places the next, the
fifth, byte in the first loca~ion of the next double word of
memory, bits 31 through 24 of byte 4 (not shown).
4.5.5.2 Word Translat~ion:
For word (16-bit) translations,
the bus ~ontroller sets line B/W\ low and W!LW\ high. This
code tells the memory controller that the current transfer
is a 16-bit transfer. The bus controller places the 24-bit
address on the ZSI to point to the double-word location in
memory where the memory controll~r is to place the current
t ran s fer. On 1 y the ~~ 2 m0 s t- s i g n i fie ant bit s 0 f the ' add res s
4-57
2ilog
4-57
HRM
HRM
Zilog
point to the memory location. The memory controller ignores
the least-significant address bit (ADOO); the state of
address bit AD01 tells the memory controller to st~re the
current word (16-bits) in either the upper half or lower
half of the double-word space in memory. Figure 4-13 shows
the path of two 16-bit words, E and F.
The controller
stores word E in the word 0 location (bits 31 to 16) and
stores word F in the word 1 location (bits 15 to 0)).
All
word-size transfers must occur only on a word boundary.
4.5.5.3 Long-Word Translation: Long words (Fig\lre 4-14 contain four bytes (32 bits) and occupy the entire width of the
ZBI and memory controller, and end up in a location in
memory.
The 22 most-significant address bits point to the
location; the controller ignores the two least-significant
bits, ADOO and AD01.
4.6.
Systeull Reset
A system reset can be generated from a power-up circuit on
the CPU board or by the RESET button on the front panel of
the System 8000. The power-up reset circuit makes certain
that all functions in the system start in an orderly manner.
The RESET button on the front panel is disabled by the
ON/LOCK keylock switch when in the LOCK position.
When the system is reset, the following actions occur:"
All eight serial I/O channels are disabled.
control registers must be initialized.
All
SIO
2)
All CTC channels stop counting and all interrupt-enable
bits are cleared. CTC control registers must be initialized.
3)
Parallel data is inhibited.
4.7.
Non-Maskable Interrupts (NMI)
Non-maskable interrupts are typically reserved for external
events that require immediate attention. They cannot be
disabled (masked) by software.
The System 8000 provides
three sources of NMI:
manual NMI, power-fail NMI, and a
double-bit non-correctable ECC memory error NMI.
4-58
Zilog
4-58
HRM
Zilog
HRM
r 0;;:101; - - - - - - - - - - "I
:
EGG
I
I
I
I
I
~~MORY
]
EGG
~~MORY
L~
£~
~'j7'
~
1 M
ECC MEMORY
1M
ECC MEMORY
:
I
I
I
~
"",-.-7
I
MEMORY BUS CONNECTOR P2/J2
I_ _ _ _
_
__ _ _ _ _
£';::...
BACKPLANE SLOTS: J28-J30
OR J26·J30
MEMORY
SUBSYSTEM
CONTROLLER
"7
P1/J1
?
Z·BUS BACKPLANE INTERCONNECT (ZBI)
00159
Figure 4-10 Memory SUbsystem Controller,
Functional Relationships
BIT 38
BIT 31
I
BIT 23
I
BIT 15
I
BIT 07
I
BIT 00
I
I
CHECK BITS
BYTE 0
BYTE 1
BYTE 2
BYTE 3
BIT!~
BYTE 4
BYT.E 5
BYTE 6
BYTE 7
CHECK BlTn
BYTE 8
BYTE 9
BYTE 10
BYTE 11
CHECK
(ADDITIONAL BYTES)
CHECK BITS
I
BIT 38
BYTE N·3
I
BIT 31
BYTE N·2
I
BIT 23
BYTE N·1
I
BIT 15
BYTE N
I
BIT 07
I
BIT 00
o 0 170
Figure 4-11
4-59
Memory Organization
Zilog
4-59
HRM
Zilog
HRM
81T 01
I
c=' - - - - - r - r - r T
BIT 31
I
BIT 23
BIT 16
I
BIT 01
I
ISIT 00
I
I
ZBI
--;
A
MEMORY
CONTROLLER
CHECK BITS
I
I
I
I
BIT 38
BIT 31
BIT 23
BIT 15
I
BIT 07
00112
Figure 4-12
4-60
Byte Translation
Zilog
4-60
HRM
HRM
Zilog
BIT 15
BIT 00
I
BIT 31
I
BI) 15
I
ZBI
BIW\=CI
W/LW\=1
MEMORY
CONTROLLER
CHECI< BITS
I
I
I
I
I
BIT 38
BIT 31
BIT 23
BIT 15
BIT 07
I
BIT 00
o <)
Figure 4-13
4-61
1 7 1
Word Translation
Zilog
4-61
HRM
Zilog
HRM
~_J
BIT 31
BIT 00
I
I
rL---
ZBI
]
~-'
B/W\=1
W/LW\=O
MEMORY
CONTROLLER
]
'------,
CHECK BITS
BYTE 3
I
I
I
BIT 38
BIT 31
BIT 23
I
BIT 15
]
I
I
BIT 07
Brr 00
o01
Figure 4-14
73
Long-Word Translation
Manual NMI: A manual NMI can be generated in the
System 8000 from the START pushbutton on the front panel.
The NMI can be disabled by placing the ON/LOCK keylock
switch in the LOCK position. When the START pushbutton is
pressed immediately after a manual or power-up reset, the
system power-up diagnostics (SPUD) firmware is invoked. At
the conclusion of the diagnostic, if no errors have been
recorded,
the message "POWER UP DIAGNOSTICS COMPLETE"
appears on the console screen and the ZEUS Operating System
is automatically booted.
~.7.1.
4.7.2. Power-Fail NMI: A power-fail NMI will be sent to
the Z8001 CPU when the system power supply detects a
decrease in line voltage signifying a potential power
failure.
After recelvlng a power-fail NMI, the system has
approximately 2 msec to power-down. When a power-fail NMI
identifier is read by the operating system, the operating
system generates a software reset which in turn, becomes a
hardware system reset.
Therefore, the Winchester disk
drives are protected from crashing during a power failure.
4-62
Zilog
4-62
HRM
2ilog
HRM
4.7.3. ECC Memory Error NMI: A non-maskable interrupt will
be sent to the CPU when a double-bit non-correctable ECC
memory "error is flagged by the ECC Controller, and when the
CLEAR ECC ERROR-bit of the System Configuration Register
(SCR) is set to enable an ECC NMI. The error bit is initially cleared at the SCR during a system reset or power-up.
4.7.4. NMI Identifier: When a non-maskable interrupt is
detected by the CPU, the subsequent initial instruction
fetch cycle is initiated, but aborted. The program counter
(PC)
is not updated, but the system stack pointer is decremented. The next CPU machine ~ycle is the interrupt acknowledge cycle.
This cycle acknowledges the interrupt and
reads a 16-bit IDENTIFIER word (all 16 bits can represent
peripheral device status and ID information) from the device
that generated the interrupt (in this case, an NMI source).
This identifier word, along with the program status information, is stored on the system stack and new status information is loaded into the PC and FCW (flag and control word
register) .
When the CPU generates an NMI acknowledge status code
(0101), the source of the NMI will be either a manual,
power-fail, or ECC memory error NMI. Dedicated logic on the
CPU board enables a 4-bit error buffer to place a 4-bit NMI
IDENTIFIER on mulitplexed address/data lines ADO to AD3, as
follows:
AD3
AD2
AD1
o
o
o
o
o
o
1
1
o
ADO
SOURCE
1
Manual NMI
Power-fail NMI
ECC Memory Error NMI
o
o
Bits AD4 to AD15 are "don't care" bits in an NMI acknowledge
identifier word if the NMI source is anyone of the three
listed sources of NMI in the System 8000. If the NMI source
is external to the CPU and not one of the three listed
sources of the NMI, the NMI buffer will remain off and the
16-bit identifier word will be read from the system bus.
4.8.
Vectored Interrupts
When the CPU acknowledges an interrupt from a peripheral
device, it reads a 16-bit identifer word to identify the
source of the interrupt. In vectored interrupts, the identifer is also used by the CPU as a pointer to select a particular interrupt service routine associated with the peripheral that was the source of the interrupt.
4-63
2ilog
4-63
HRM
Zilog
HRM
The System 8000 CPU can configure all PIO (Parallel 110 Controller), eTC (Counter/Timer C~rcui t), and SID (Sertal I/O
Controller) peripheral devices for vectored interrupt operation.
The" interrupt vectors associated with thesE~ peripherals can be loaded at any time since these devices are
initialized with their interrupts disabled (masked).
NOTE
It is recommended that vectored interrupts be disabled by the CPU until all peripherals on the System 8000 CPU have been properly
initialized
because of the vectored interrupt daisy-chain.
Since there are several Z80B peripheral devices on the CPU
board, an interrupt daisy-chain is used to prioritize the
devices and to accelerate their interrupt request time.
Each Z80B device contains two lines that function as links
in the daisy-chain: lEI, Interrupt Enable In (INPUT, active
high) and lEO, Interrupt Enable Out (OUTPUT, active high).
The Z80B peripherals on the CPU board are prioritized in a
daisy-chain as indicated in Table 4-26. Figure 4-15 illustrates the daisy-chain configuration.
4-64
Zi10g
4-64
HRM
Zilog
Table 4-26
?RIORITY
HRM
Device Priority Scheme
PERIPHERAL DEVICE
FUNCTION
CTC 0
Single step, also generates
BAUDO, BAUD1, BAUD2
2
CTC
Generates BAUD3, BAUD4, BAUD5
3
CTC 2
Generates BAUD6, BAUD7, and
the Real Time Clock
4
SIO 0
Serial Channels 0,
5
SIO
Serial Channels 2, 3
6
SIO 2
Serial Channels 4, 5
7
SIO 3
Serial Channels 6, 7
8
PIO 0
Line Printer Interface
9
(OFF CPU BOARD I/O)
10
Winchester Disk
Controller or
SMD Controller
11
Tape Controller
(Secondary Serial Board)
Vectored interrupts from any of the peripherals, 1 to 8 in
Table 4-26, automatically disables interrupts from lower
priority peripheral devices in the chain. Off-board devices
have· the lowest prior'i ty in the chain.
4-65
Zilog
4-65
2ilog
HRM
HRM
+5V
CTc03-1
1
lEI
lEO
~
lEI
SIOO
. lEI
3--!IEI
IE0l-- lEI
lEO
-...
lEI
eTe 2
lEO
5
6
SIO 1
SI02
IEoH'E'
9
8
PIO
L...-.., lEI
3
2
eTe 1
SECONDARY
SERIAL
BOARD
7
IEoHIE' S_10_3_~
___
11
10
---....
WINCHESTER
DISK
CONTROllER
~
CARTRIDGi
TAPE
CONTROll
001 7
Figure 4-15
4.9.
~
Interrupt Priority Connections
Memorl' Management Unit (MMU)
The 28010 Memory Management Unit manages the 16M byte main
memory address space of the System 8000 CPU. The MMU also
provides the following features:
1.
Flexible and efficient allocation of main
memory
resources during the ex~cution of both oper~ting system
and user tasks.
2.
Support multiple, independent tasks that
to common resources.
3.
Protection from unauthorized or unintentional access to
data or other memory resources.
4.
Detection of incorrect use of memory
task ,.
5.
Partitioning of main memory resources to separate
functions from system functions.
by
share
an
access
executing
user
4.9.1.
MMU Operation (RoD-Segmented): A
non-segmented
operating system runs in segment 0, using Segment Descriptor
Register (SDR) number a of memory management units M1, M2
and M3 for code, data, and stack areas, respectively. MMU
4-66 .
2i10g
4-66
HRM
2ilog
HRM
M1 is used for translating program memory references while
M2 and M3 translate all other memory references. The selection between M2 and M3 is based on a comparison between the
logical address and the contents of the System Break Register (SBR), a program addressable hardware register. Logical
addresses with values lower than the SBR are treated as data
addresses and are directed to MMU M2 (data).
Logical
addresses that are equal to or greater than the SBR, are
treated as stack addresses and are directed to MMU M3
(stack) .
A non-segmented user program runs in segment 63; however,
the hardware will allow any segment between 2 and 63 to be
used. As in the nan-segmented operating system, Segment
Descriptor Register number 63 in M1, M2 and M3 is used to
provide separate code, data, and stack areas, respectively.
The only difference is that the Normal Break Register (NBR),
also a program addressable hardware register, is used to
distinguish between code, data, and stack references instead
of the System Break Register.
4.9.2. MMU Operation (Segmented): A segmented operating
system uses MMU M1 (code) to provide an address space consisting of up to 63 segments, e.g., segments 0 to 62.
Segment Q3 is used to run non-segmented user programs. Since
the attribute flags in the segment descriptor registers of
MMU M3 (stack) are used to configure different segments, no
separation between code, data or stack' references
is
required.
A segmented user program
uses M2 and M3 to provide an
address space consisting of 124 or 128 segments, without
separating code, data, and stack areas.
If the operating
system is non-segmented, then segment numbers 0,1 and 64,65
are reserved for the operating system since it requires SDR
number 0 of M2 and M3. In a segmented operating system, all
128 segments are usable.
4.9.3. MMU Configurations: The MMU configuration is set by
hardware jumpers on the CPU board and by the operating system software. The jumpers are used to configure the MMU
select logic for either a segmented or nonsegmented operating system. The operating system software configures the
System Configuration Register (SCR) for running segmented or
non segmented user processes (programs). Refer to Table 4-5
for possible jumper configurations.
4-67
2ilog
4-67
Zilog
HRM
HRM
4.9.4. Break Registers: Two 8-bit hardware registers, the
System Break Register (SBR) and the Normal Break Register
(NBR), are accessable as I/O ports on the CPU board. During
any memory reference, the 16-bit logical address offset generated by the CPU is compared to the break value given by
the contents 'of either the SBR or theNBR. The SBR is
referenced for the break value if the segment number is zero
or one, and the NBR if it is otherwise. If the MMU configuration specifies separation of code, data, and stack
areas, and the CPU status indicates a nonprogram reference
(status 10xx), then the result of this comparison selects
between data and stack references. If the logical address
offset is less than the break value, the current reference
is for data (MMU M2 is enabled); otherwise, it is a stack
reference (MMU M3 is enabled).
The following paragraphs
describe the possible configurations of operating systems
(OS) and user programs (USER).
Nonsegmented
as,
Nonsegmented USER
This configuration is intended to run operating systems in
memory segment 0 and user programs in any segment, 2 to 63.
(Segment 63 is recommended for running user programs.)
For operating systems executing in this configuration, MMU
M1 (code) is enabled for program references indicated by a
CPU status code 11xx, an instruction space access~
For
memory references other than program references, the logical
address offset generated by the CPU is compared against the
contents of the SBR, if the segment number is zero or one;
however, if the se~ment number is 2 - 63, the comparison is
made against the contents of the NBR. If the result of the
comparison is less than zero, the select logic enabll~s MMU
M2 (data); otherwise, MMU M3 (stack) is enabled.Additionally, logic on the CPU board detects memory references made
to segment 0,1· while the CPU is in normal operation mode.
This logic generates a segment trap violation to the Z8001
CPU, disables the three MMUs, and asserts a suppress signal
that prohibits main memory references.
If the operating system, or any part thereof, executes in
segment mode, the separation of code, data, and stack spac~s
still applies.
NOTE
The separation between data and stack spaces is
based on the contents of the SBR for segment 0,
and the NBR for references to all other segments.
4-68
Zi10g
4-68
HRM
Zilog
HRM.
A segmented user program can run in this configuration,
although the Nonsegmented as, Segmented USER configuration
is intended for that purpose. Such a user program has a
potential address space of 62 code and data segments.
Nonsegmented
as,
Segmented USER
This configuration is intended to run exactly as the previous configuration, provided that the CPU is in system mode
and the operating system is running in memory segment o. In
addition, code, data, and stack references are directed to
M1, M2, and M3 respectively, and the contents of the SBR are
used to select between data and stack references. However,
if the CPU is in normal mode, MMU M2 is enabled for segment
numbers 2 to 63, and MMU M3 is enabled for segment numbers
65 to 127. If a memory reference is made, a segment trap
violation is generated and the three MMUs are disabled.
Also, the suppress signal is generated by the CPU to protect
the system data and stack areas from being accessed by the
user program. In system mode, if the segment number of a
user segment is generated (segments 1 to 63, or 66 to 127),
the address translation is the same as in normal mode.
Separation of code, data, and stack spaces are deactivated;
MMU M2 is enabled for segments 2 to 63; and MMU M3 is
enabled for segments 66 to 127. This allows the operating
system to directly access any ~ser segment.
4.9.5. System Access to User Space: To access a user segment, the operating system can use a free segment slot and
set its Segment Descriptor Register to point at the same
memory area as the target user segment's SDR.
A nonsegmented operating system running a non segmented user
program can directly access the user' data and stack areas by
switching to system mode and using the user segment number.
To access the user code segment, one- of the unused segment
slots is set to point at the code segment; for example,
number 62. The SDRs for this segment slot in M2 and M3 are
both set to point at the code segment, negating the contents
of the NBR.
A nonsegmented operating system running a segmented user
program can directly access any prot ion of the user space by
switching directly into segmented mode.
4-69
Zilog
4-69
HRM
2110g
HRM
4.9.6. System Segments and Protection: Logic on the CPU
board partitions segments into system segments (logical segments 0, 1, 64 and 65), and user segments (logical segments
2 to 63 and 66 to 127). Any reference to a system segment
always enables the System Break Register for comparison with
the logical address offset, while any reference to a user
segment always enables the Normal Break Register.
These
comparisons are independent of whether the 28001 CPU is executing in system or normal mode. The function of the system
segment detection logic is to prohibit normal mode programs
from accessing system mode segments. Normal mode references
to system segments are not valid and cause no MMU to be
selected, and a segment violation forced upon the CPU. This
violation is maintained until cleared by the segment trap
acknowledge status of the CPU.
4-70
Z110g
4-70
HRM
Zilog
HRM
SECTION 5
MAINTENANCE
5.1.
Introduction
This section contains the procedures necessary to maintain
the System 8000. The information is presented in the form
of preventive and corrective maintenance.
All maintenance
should be performed by qualified and trained field service
personnel.
5.2.
Preventive Maintenance
Preventive maintenance consists of routine cleaning procedures
and
adjustments performed in compliance with
schedules provided in paragraphs 5.3 and 5.4. The CPU and
Disk Tape Modules have fan filters which should be inspected
and cleaned periodically.
5.3.
Tape Drive Maintenance
Components of the Tape Cartridge Drive requiring cleaning
are shown in Figure 5-1. The Magnetic Tape Mechanism cleaning procedures described in paragraph 5.3:1 through 5.3.4
should be performed in accordance with the schedule in Table
5-1.
Table 5-1.
Cleaning Schedule
ITEM
HOURS OF USE
Magnetic Head
Tape Cleaner
Motor Capstan
8
8
8
5.3.1. Magnetic Head Cleaning: The magnetic head should be
cleaned daily if the tape drive is in regular use.' Dirty
heads can cause the loss of data during read and write
operations.
Use a nonresidue, noncorrosive cleaning agent,
such as isopropyl alcohol, and a soft cotton swab to clean
the head assembly.,
Be sure to wipe off any excess cleaning
agent and allow the heads to dry prior to operating the
drive.
5-1
Zilog
5-1
HRM
HRM
2ilog
CAUTION
Spray cleaners are not recommended because OVE~r­
spray
will contaminate
the
motor bearings.
Also, never clean the head with hard objects.
This results in permanent head damage.
5.3.2. Tape Cleaner Cleaning: The tape cleaner removes
loose tape oxide and other foreign material from the tape
before it contacts the head. This foreign material accumulates in and around the tape cleaner and must be removed to
ensure that the tape cleaner continues to work effectively.
The tape cleaner should be cleaned on the same schedule as
the head.
To clean, insert a folded sheet of paper into the bottom of
the cleaning slot of the cleaner.
Slide the paper up, lifting the foreign material from the cleaner.
Compressed air
or a soft brush can be used to remove the foreign material
from the area around the tape cleaner and head assembly.
Alternatively, the tape cleaner can be cleaned using the
same materials used to clean the magnetic head.
CAUTION
Do not use hard-objects to clean the tape cleaner.
If the tape cleaner becomes chip~ed, it will
scratch the tape surface, resul ting in lost dclta
and/or permanent tape damage.
5.3.3.
Motor Capstan Cleaning: The drive capstan is composed of hard polyurethane and_must be cleaned after foreign
material has built up. Clean, using isopropyl alcohol and a
soft cotton swab. The cleaning schedule 1s the same as for
the head.
Do not allow cleaning solvent to
drive motor bearings.
5-2
2110g
contaminate the
5-2
HRM
SENSOR HOLES
Figure 5-1
5-3
HRM
Zilog
MOTOR CAPSTAN
MAGNETIC
HEAD
ASSEMBLY
TAPE CLEANER
Location of Parts Requiring Periodic Cleaning
Zilog
5-3
HRM
Zilog
HRM
5.3.4.
Heat Sink, Circuit
Board,
and
Sensor
Hole
Cleaning: To prevent possible overheating, dust and dirt
must be removed from the heat sink and drive assembly components.
The time period between cleanings varies widely,
depending on the operating environment. Use a soft brush
and/or low pressure compressed air for cleaning. The sensor
holes are cleaned in the same manner.
5.4.
Disk Drive Assembly Cleaning
Bath the SMD and Finch disk assemblies are sealed units and
therefore do not require preventive maintenance procedures.
The major components of the FINCH drive are shown in Figure
5-2.
CAUTION
NEVER disassemble either the FINCH or SMD.
This
exploded view is for information only. Servi.cing
items in the upper sealed environmental enclosure
(heads, media, actuator, etc.) requires special
facilities.
Only the printed-circuit
boards,
brake and motor external to the sealed area can be
replaced without special facilities.
5-4
Zilog
5-4
HRM
HRM
Zilog
ENVIRONMENTAL
ENCLOSURE
ROTARY ARM
SHIPPING LOCK
ROTARY VOICE COIL. BEARING
BLOCK. AND ROTARY tlRM
(ACTUATOR ASSEMBLY)
SPINDLEIDISK
ASSEMBLY
ABSOLUTE
RECIRCULATION
FILTER
ENVIRONMENTAL
ENCLOSURE
GASKET
6·32 UNC 28
(OPTIONAL SYSTEM
GROUND POINT)
- - - MOTOR CONTROL PWA
MAIN DE:CK
DATA CABLE
MAIN PWA
REAR
00403
Figure 5-2
5.5.
POWER CABLE
FINCH Major Components
Disk Drive Mounting
Four 8-32 tapped holes are provided in the base of the main
deck casting to facilitate disk drive mounting in the horizontal position.
The FINCH or SMD is mounted directly to a bracket, which is
then attached to the chassis using 8-32 thread screws.
Shock mounts are installed in the chassis. Place the drive
in the chassis and secure it with washers and screws with
sufficient length to ensure adequate thread engagement
(refer to Figures 5-3 and 5-4).
5-5
Zilog
5-5
HRM
Zilog
HRM
UP
FRONT
I I
I I
L...J
I jI - - .
L..-
--I--..il
I
II
'"
00408
MOUNT
WASHER
8-32 SCREW
Figure 5-3
5-6
~
i ~S~IOCK
CHASSIS
Disk Drive Mounting
Zilog
5-6
HRM
Zilog
HRM
SMD DRIVE
LOCKING LEVER
00392
SHIP
Figure 5-4
5.6.
SMD Mounting Bracket
Drive Cabling
The cables that connect either the FINCH or SMD drive to the
Disk Bus Interface, to DC power, and to the host system are
listed in Table 5-2.
CAUTION
The interface connector for the Disk Bus Interface
is located very close to W1 (the jumper location
for connecting DC ground to frame ground). Use
extreme care wht!n inserting or removing the interface cable so the locking tabs for the connector
do not break Wl '.
All input/output cables exit at the rear of the disk drive.
The FINCH Adapter Board attaches to connectors on the drives
5-7
Zilog
5-7
HRM
Zilog
HRM
Main PWA. The Disk Bus Interface and DC power cables exit
from connectors at the top of the Adapter board. For the
SMD, two interface cables (SMD A & SMD B) connect directlj
to the SMD Interface board. Power connection is by a 14 pin
connector (P2) cable that plugs into the SMD below SMD B.
Table 5-2.
Interface Cables
MODEL 21
CABLE NAME
Signal Cable
DESCRIPTION
VENDOR/PART NUMBER
40-conductor flat
ribbon cable maximum of 30 ft.
(9.1 ern)
Zilog Part Number
59-0223-00
Connector (Open
strain relief)
DC Power Cable
10-conductor, 18
gauge wire maximum of 4 ft.
3M 3417-6040
Zilog Part Number
59-0131-00
( 1 .2 m)
Connector
AMP 1-640426-·D
MODEL 31
CABLE NAME
DESCRIPTION
VENDOR/PART NUMBER
SMDC-B Signal Cable
26-conductor
flat ribbon and
59-0235-·00
SMDC-A Signal Cable
60-conductor
twisted cable
59-0234-·00
DC Power Cable
14-conductor
18 grange wire
radial
59-0227 -·00
AC Power Cable
SMD
2-wire AC,
120V Fan
5-8
Zilog
N/A
5-8
HRM
5.7.
Zilog
HRM
Disk Power ON Procedure
This section describes the procedure for applying power to
the drive.
The disk is a nonvolatile storage media; therefore, once data is recorded, it is not lost when power is
turned OFF.
The following checks must
power ON:
1.
be
performed
prior
to
turning
Inspect the physical mounting to ensure that the drive
is secured at all mounting points, and that all ribbon
cables are securely connected.
CAUTION
Improper orientation of the power connector
result in serious damage to the drive.
can
2.
Place the rotary-arm shipping lock to the OPERATE position.
The shipping lock is located on the bottom support bracket on the front of the SMD drive.
3.
Apply power to the drive. Observe that the actuator
mechanism performs a·first seek operation in less than
one minute (the read/write heads move from the landing
area into the data area of the disk).
5.8.
Power Supply Voltages
Power supply voltages should be checked each time on-premise
maintenance is performed. This should only be performed by
Zilog Field Service personnel. Ensuring that each supply is
within tolerance 1s essential to mainta.in normal system
operations.
TEST EQUIPMENT REQUIRED:
HP3466A Multimeter or equivalent
5.8.1. AC Input Voltage Check: Using the multimeter, check
RMS voltage at the facility outlet where the System 8000
will be plugged in. Ensure that the voltage reading is
within the range specified by the switch settings on the CPU
and Disk/Tape Module power supplies.
5-9
Zilog
5-9
2ilog
HRM
5.8.2.
HRM
CPU Module DC Voltage Test:
1.
Remove the module top cover.
Unfasten two captive
fasteners at the rear of the cover; pull toward the
rear of the module, and remove from system.
2.
Remove the sheet metal cover on the front portion of
the module.
Lift to clear the cover guides and pull
toward the front of the module.
3.
Test points are located in the upper right hand corner
of the card cage backplane.
Refer to Figure 5-5.
4.
Check the following DC output voltages at their respective t~st points:
a.
b.
c.
+5 Vdc +0.25/-0.1 at TP2
+12 Vdc +-0.1 at TP3
-5 Vdc +-0.1 at TP5
In the CPU Module, voltage adjustments can be
following locations:
made
at
the
1.
On the switching power supply, voltage adjustments are
for +5 Vdc (silkscreened V. ADJ.) and ·for power fail
(P.F.). DO NOT ADJUST POWER FAIL, IT IS SET AT THE
FACTORY.
2.
Voltage adjustments on the linear power supply are
-5 Vdc (5 ADJ.) and +12 Vdc (12 ADJ.).
for
2ilog
5-10
5-10
HRM
Zilog
5.8.3.
HRM
Disk/Tape Module (Model 21) DC Voltage Test:
1.
Remove the· CPU Module from atop the Disk/Tape Module.
2.
DC output voltages are checked at the Winchester disk
drive power connector. The power connector is located
in the FINCH Adapter Board (attached to the rear of the
drive).
Refer to Figure 5-6 for connector orientation
and voltage test points.
3.
Voltage adjustments on the power supply are for -5.2
Vde (-5VDC ADJ), +5 Vde (+5VDC ADJ), -24 Vde (-24VDC
ADJ), and +24 Vde (+24VDC ADJ).
(Refer to Figure 5-7
for location of adjustment potentiometers).
5-11
Zilog
5 -11
HRM
HRM
Zilog
BACKPLANE
I
TP1
/
TP2
TP3 TP4
TPS
0 0 DO 0
GND +SV +12V -12V -5V
I
@
/
E11
/
,[J
,0
[j=LJ
E12C
I
I
\9
\-.
(9
,
EnG
E14LJ
Cl
C3
,
E1SG
\
C2
C4
00
CR1 CR2
,00
E16G
+12V -5V
E17L
\
D
I
DR1 DR2
CR3
0
\
+5V
®
\
\
E18 1
i
E191
i
o
R3
FRONT VIEW
Figure 5-5
Power Supply Voltage Test Points, CPU Module
VOLTAGE
+24
24R
G
-12
+12
G
-52
G
+5
+5
]
5
"
00289
I
w
C'
Z
od:
a:
o
I
llI::
(.)
:3lI:I
I
zw
w
a:
C'
I
3
o...I
...I
I
w
::::l
...I
lI:I
I
Q
w
a:
I
Q
w
a:
W
>COLOR CODe
Figure 5-6
5-12
Voltage Test Points, Finch DC Power Connector
Zilog
5-12
HRM
Zilog
5.8.4.
1.
2.
3.
HRM
Disk/Tape Module (Model 31) DC Voltage Test:
Remove the CPU Module from the
·Module.
top
of
the
Disk/Tape
DC output voltages are checked at the SMD input power
cable power connector P2 located on the rear of the SMD
(Figure 5-7).
SMD Voltage adjustments on the power supply (Figure 5are for +5VDC (+5VDC ADJ), -12VDC (-12VDC ADJ), and
+24VDC(+24VDC ADJ).
(See Figure 5-8 for locations.)
8)
14·PIN CONNECTOR
PIN
14 12
+24V
11 10
+24V
RTN
9
+5V
8
7
6
+5V
RTN
5
4
-12V
3
1
-12V
RTN
PLUG P2 ON SMD
POWER CABLE
FROM POWER SUPPLY
00397
Figure 5-7
Voltage Test Points, SMD Power Connector
NOTE
Ensure that the power connector (P2) is installed
with pin 1 oriented as shown in Figure 3-11 to
avoid damage t,o drive.
4.
5-13
Cartridge Tape Drive voltage adjustments include one
additonal power supply output adjustment.
Voltage
Zilog
5-13
Zilog
HRM
HRM
adjustment for the -24Vdc (-24V ADJ.) can be checked at
the power connector labelled 'J2' on the power supply,
(see Figure 5-8 for connector location).
-12VDC ADJ.
+5VDC ADJ.
~
o
000 J3
000
~m
Figure 5-8
5.9.
~
-5 VDC ADJ.
~
-24VDC ADJ.
~
+ 24VDC AD.J.
J21~ggl ~
Power Supply Voltage Adjustments
System Monitor
The Monitor Program resides on PROM on the CPU. The monitor
includes basic debugging commands, I/O control, and interface software for use with a serial interface to a remote
computer system.
5.9.1. Monitor Program Debug Environment: The Moni.tor Program sets software breakpoints for program debugging. A
breakpoint is a command that interrupts or stops program
execution at a specified address in the program. The
address specified in the breakpoint is the address of the
instruction. When encountered during program execution, the
5-14
Zilog
5-14
HRM
Zilog
HRM
breakpoint suspends execution of the user's program and
saves all registers, program counters (PC), and the Flag
Control Word (FCW) in the memory area provided.
It then
displays a message reporting the break and the address where
it occurred.
Any number of breakpoints can be set manually by setting the
instruction at the desired breakpoint address to %7FOO (%
indicates the address is in hexadecimal notation).
This
interrupts the executing program and jumps (traps) to the
breakpoint procedure. When the breakpoint is no longer
required,
the
original
instruction must be manually
restored.
The BREAK command saves the address where the breakpoint is
being set and the instruction that it is replacing. When
the breakpoint is cleared, the instruction is automatically
restored.
The BREAK command also stores a repetition
counter, n. Execution is not suspended until the nth time
this breakpoint is encountered unless another breakpoint is
encountered first.
The following restrictions on the user program are necessary
to set breakpoints:
1.
This program must be able to execute with
enabled after encountering ~he breakpoint.
interrupts
2.
The program should not be timing-dependent because
there will be some timing distortion each time the
breakpoint is encountered.
3.
The user program must not use Channel 3 of the Z80A
Counter Timer Circuit (CTC #0), because it is used to
implement the multiple execution feature.
4.
The breakpoint cannot be within an interrupt procedure
entered by an interrupt from Channels 0 through 2 of
the Z80B CTC #0.
The BREAK and the NEXT commands us~ instruction modification
and the interrupt system.
Therefore, the program being
debugged cannot be in the PROM area and cannot involve
modification of the interrupt status.
Any set breakpoints must be cleared by hitting RESET before
a new program is loaded from the System 8000; otherwise,
previously set breakpoints continue to operate on the new
program during debugging.
5-15
Zilog
5-15
HRM
Zilog
HRM
The user stack is used whenever a JUMP or GO command is executed. The command must be set to some address within writable memory. If the JUMP or GO address has a system breakpoint set, it does not cause suspension of execution.
5.9.2.
Monitor Program:
in command descriptions:
The following conventions are used
< >
Angle brackets enclose descriptive names for the
tities to be entered.
[ ]
Square
b~ackets
quan-
denote optional quantities.
A bar denotes an OR condition.
either W or B can be used.
For example, WIB
means
<CR> Carriage Return and line feed.
[
A single square left bracket is the monitor prompt.
%
Symbol for hexadecimal value, for example %4F or %4FFF.
Apply the following when entering commands and options:
1.
All commands and options must be entered in uppercase.
2.
Commands can be abbreviated to the first letter.
3.
Numbers are represented in hexadecimal notation.
4.
The first character typed on a new line identifies
which command is being invoked. If an invalid character is entered, a "?[" is displayed, prompting a new
command.
5.
Addresses are specified by an optional segment number
in angle brackets, followed by a hexadecimal address.
If no segment number is specified, segment 0 is
assumed.
For example, <00>4000 or 4000, <00>0 or 0,
<01>F800 or F800 for segment O.
5.9.3. Mon:itor Mode Commands: A summary of the commands in
the Monitor Mode are as follows:
5-16
Zilog
5-16
HRM
Zilog
HRM
COMMAND NAME
PARAMETERS
DISPLAY
<address> [<# of long words/words/bytes>] [L:WIBJ
Display and alter memory
REGISTER
[ <register name> ]
Display and alter registers
BREAK
[<address>J [<n>J
Set and Clear breakpoint
NEXT
[ <n> ]
Step instruction
GO
Branch to last PC set in user register array
JUMP
<address>
Branch to address
FILL
<address1> <address2>
Fill memory
rOPORT
<port address> [W:BJ
I/O port read/write
MOVE
<address1> . <address2>
Move memory block
COMPARE
<address1> <address2>
Compare memory blocks
QUIT
Enter Transparent Mode
PORT
<port address> [WIB]
Special I/O read/writ~
TEST
Enter Test Mode
ZBOOT
[DISIT]
Read a BOOTSTRAP program(s) from SMD, disk
or cartridge tape and execute
<data>
NOTE
All outputs illl Monitor Mode can be suspended with
XOFF (~13 or control-s) and resumed with XON (111
or control-q).
5-17
Zilog
5-17
Zilog
HRM
HRM
COMMAND NA?1E
DISPLAY
SYNTAX
D <address> <# of long words/words/bytes> [LIWIBJ
DESCRIPTION
This command displays at the terminal the contents of specified memory locations starting at the given address, for the
given number of bytes.
If the count parameter is specified, the contents of the
memory locations are displayed in hexadecimal notation and
as ASCII characters.
If the count parameter is not specified, the memory locations are displayed as words one at a time, with an opportunity to change the contents of each location.
For each
location, the address is displayed, followed by the contents
of LIWIB and a space. To change the contents at a given
location,
enter
the
new contents in the form long
wordlwordlbyte. If RETURN is pressed, either alone or after
the new contents, the next sequential location is displayed.
Entering a "Q" (for QUIT), followed by a RETURN terminates
the command.
EXAMPLE
Display memory starting at Segment 0, %5200 for 16 words.
[D 5200 10 <CR>
<00> 5200 1808 FE2B 2004 D923 7ED9 CD35 2238 OAED
* .. . + • • 11 •• • 5"8 .. *
<00> 5210 6F23 ED6F 2B1E 0118 EDD9 2218 14D9 5778
*0# .0 ...... H ••• Wx*
EXAMPLE
Display memory starting at Segment 0, %5200 for 16 bytes.
[0 5200 10 B <CR>
<00> 5200 18 08 FE 2B 20 04 09 23 7E 09 CO 35 22
38 OA ED * ... + . . /1 •• • 5"8 .. *
5-18
Zilog
5-18
Zilog
HRM
HRM
EXAMPLE
Display memory location Segment 0, %5200 and alter its contents.
CD 5200 <CR>
<00> 5200 1808 ?1922 <CR>
<00> 5201 FE2B ?<CR>
<00> 5202 2004 ?<CR>
5-19
Zilog
5-19
HRM
Zilog
HRM
COMMAND NAt'IE
REGISTER
SYNTAX
R [<register name>]
DESCRIPTION
The REGISTER command is used to examine or modify a specified register. If no register name is given, all registers
Ra, R1, R2 ... R15 PCan d FCW are dis pIa ye d . I far· e g i s t e r
name is given, the specified register name is displayed,
followed by a space. To change the contents of that register, enter the new contents followed by <CR>. <CR> alone or
after the new contents displays the next register.
A "Q"
followed by a <CR> terminates the command.
The following register names can be used in the command:
1.
Any of the sixteen 16-bit registers named
R15.
RO,
R1,
2.
Any of the sixteen 8-bit registers named RHO, RLO, RH1,
RL1 ... RH7, RL7.
3.
Any of the eight 32-bit registers named RRO,
RR14.
4.
Program counter register named PC.
RH2,
R2
RR4
NOTE
The new contents of the program counter
given in even hexadecimal numbers.
5.
must
be
Flag and control word named FC.
EXAMPLE
Display all registers.
[R <CR>
RO
R4
R6
SG
PC
FC
R1
R2
RF
R5
R3
R7
0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000
R10 R11 R12 R13 R14 R15 N4
R8
R9
PS
PO
N5
0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000
5-20
Zi10g
5-20
HRM
Zilog
HRM
EXAMPLE
Display 32~bit word register RR4 and alter its contents.
[R RR4 <CR>
RR4 00000000 ?A2557FFFF <CR>
RR6 00000000 ?Q <CR>
5-21
Zilog
5-21
Zilog
HRM
HRM
COMMAND NAf'JIE
BREAK
SYNTAX
B [<address>] [<n>]
DESCRIPTION
The BREAK command sets a breakpoint at a given even address
after clearing any previously set breakpoint. If <n> is
given, program execution is not interrupted until the nth
time the breakpoint instruction is encountered «n> is in
the ran g e %1- %FFFF). I f <n> i s not g i v en, 1 i s ass um ed . I f
the BREAK command is issued with no parameters, any previously set breakpoint is cleared. When program execution is
suspended by the BREAK command, the Monitor Program clisplays
a message reporting the break and the address where it
occurred.
EXAMPLE
[B 6A5E <CR>
Message: BREAK AT 6A5E
EXAMPLE
[D 8000 <CR>
<00> 8000 (XXXX)? <8D07> <CR>
<00> 8002 (XXXX)? <Q> <CR>
[B 8002 <CR>
[J 8000 <CR>
BREAK AT 8002
[
5-22
Zilog
5-22
HRM
2ilog
HRM
COMMAND NAME
NEXT
SYNTAX
N
[< n>
]
DESCRIPTION
The NEXT command causes the execution of the next n
machine instructions, starting at the current PC, and
displays all registers after executing each instruction.
«n> is in the range %1-%FFFF.) If <n> is not given, 1
is assumed.
EXAMPLE
[F 8000 9000 8D07 <CR>
[D 9000 <CR>
<00> 9000 8D07 ? <7FOO> <CR>
<00> 9002 XXX X ? <Q> <CR>
[R SG <CR>
HSG XXXX ? <0> <CR>
RPC XXXX ? <8000> <CR>
RFC XXXX ? <COOO> <CR>
RRF XXXX ? <Q> <CR>
[N <CR>
HO R1 R2 R3 R4 R5 R6 R7
x
X
x X x X X X
R8 R9 R10 .R11 R12 R13 R14
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
[N2 <CR>
RO R1 R2 R3 R4 R5 R6 R7
X
X
X
X
X· X
X
X
R8 R9 R10 R11 R12 R13 R14
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
RO R1 R2 R3 R4 R5 R6 R7
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
R8 R9 R10 R11 R12 R13 R14
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
[
5-23
2ilog
SG
0000
R15
X
Fe
PC
8002 COOO
N4 N5 PS
X
X
X
SG
0000
R15
X
SG
0000
R15
X
PC
FC
8004 COOO
N4 N5 PS
X
X
X
FC
PC
8006 COOO
N4 N5 PS
X
X
X
RF
X
PO
X
RF
X
PO
X
RF
X
PO
X
5-23
HRM
Zilog
HRM
COMMAND NAME
GO
SYNTAX
G
DESCRIPTION
This command causes a branch to the current PC, continuing program execution from the location where it was
last interrupted. All registers and the FCW are restored before branching.
EXAMPLE
Execute/continue executing program
[G <CR>
5-24
Zilog
5-24
HRM
Zilog
HRM
COMMAND NAME
JUMP
SYNTAX
J <address>
DESCRIPTION
The JUMP command branches unconditionally to the given
even address.
All registers and the FCW are restored
before branching.
EXAMPLE
Execute user program starting at %5000.
[JUMP 5000 <CR>
5-25
Zilog
5-25
HRM
Zilog
HRM
COMMAND NA:v1E
FILL
SYNTAX
F
<address1> <address2> <word data>
DESCRIPTION
The FILL command stores the given data word in a memory
location,
from address1 to address2. The command address must be an even hex number.
EXAMPLE
Store data FFFF in memory from %5400 to %5410.
[F 5400 5410 FFFF <CR>
[
5-26
Zilog
5-26
HRM
Zilog
HRM
COMMAND NAME
IOPORT
SYNTAX
I <port address> [WlB]
DESCRIPTION
This command reads data in either byte or word form from
the given port address and displays the value.
Enter a
hex value to be output to the specified port or enter
only a value to be output to the specified port or enter
only a carriage return if no output is·to be made.
If
the WlB parameter is not given, byte data is read from
the I/O port.
EXAMPLE
Output data FF to port address %FF29.
[I FF29 <CR>
FF29 00 ? <FF> <CR>
[
5-27
Zilog
5-27
Zilog
HRM
HRM
COMMAND NAME
MOVE
SYNTAX
M <address1> <address2> <n>
DESCRIPTION
This command moves the contents of a block of memory
from the source address specified by <address1> to the
destination address specified by <address2>. <0> is the
number of bytes to be moved.
EXAMPLE
Move memory from address %5000 to %6000 for 256 bytes.
[M 5000 6000 100 <CR>
5-28
Zilog
5-28
HRM
HRM
Zilog
COMMAND NAME
COMPARE
SYNTAX
C <address1> <address2> <n>
DESCRIPTION
This command compares the contents of two blocks of
memory.
<address1> and <address2> specify the starting
addresses of the two blocks, and <n> specifies the
number of words to be compared. If any locations of the
two blocks differ, the addresses and contents of those
locations are displayed.
EXAMPLE
Compare two blocks of memory
%4000 and %5000 for 32 words.
[C 4000 5000 20 <CR>
[
or on MISCOMPARE:
<00> 5000=XX <00> 4000=YY
[
5-29
with
Zilog
starting
addresses
5-29
HRM
Zilog
HRM
COMMAND NAME
QUIT
SYNTAX
Q
DESCRIPTION
The QUIT command is used to enter Transparent Mode from
Monitor Mode. In Transparent Mode, all keyboard inputs
and console outputs are passed between the remote computer system and the local system. The console controls
the remote computer system operating system. Channels A
and B of the S102 must be set to the same baud rates
when operating in Transparent Mode. (The remote system
connects to TTYO on the rear panel of the local system.)
The START switch on the System 8000 is used to return to
Monitor Mode.
5-30
Zilog
5-30
HRM
Zilog
HRM
COMMAND NAME
PORT
SYNTAX
P <port address> [WlB]
DESCRIPTION
The PORT command is similar to the IOPORT command; however 1 it is used to read or write special I/O devices.
EXAMPLE
[P Fe <CR>
OOFC XX ? <CR>
[
5-31
Zilog
5-31
HRM
Zilog
HRM
COMMAND NAME
TEST
SYNTAX
T
DESCRIPTION
The TEST command executes the SPUD System Power-Up Diagnostic tests.
(See section 3.7 for detailed description).
EXAMPLE T <CR>
5-32
Zilog
5-32
HRM
Zilog
HRM
COMMAND NAME
Z800T
SYNTAX
Z [DISIT]
DESCRIPTION
This command is commonly used to manually bootstrap the
ZEUS Operating System. The ZBOOr command reads a 512byte program from block 0 of the device determined by DI
DISK (Model 21), SISMD (Model 31), TI Cartridge rape.
Generally, there is no return to the Monitor.
EXAMPLE
Z T <CR>
5-33
Zilog
5-33
HRM
Zilog
5.9.4. Download Mode Command:
load Mode are:
HRM
Summary of Commands in Down-
NAME
PARAMETER
LOAD
<filename)
Load S/W from System 8000
NOTE
Filenames can be specified in either uppercase or
lowercase.
Filenames can be full path naunes.
LOAD stores data into segment o.
Download Mode transfers data between the System 8000 and a
remote computer system. Channels A and B of the 3102 must
be set to the same baud rates when operating in Download
Mode.
(The remote system is connected to TTYO on the rear
panel.) The LOAD program is required on the remote system to
perform download functions through console I/O.
The Downloa~ Mode uses the Tektronix record format, ~hich
uses only ASCII characters.' Each record contains two che':Jl{sum values, a starting address, and a maximum of 30 bytes of
data. The format of the record is:
RECORDS 1 to n
<address(4» <count(2» <checksum1(2» <data(2» ...
<data(2» <checksum2(2» <carriage return)
where:
5-34
<address(4»:
Is the address of the first byte
of data in the record (address is
represented in four ASCII character s)
<count(2»:
is the number of <data) in current
record (two ASCII characters)
<checksum1(2»:
is the checksum for the address and
count field (two ASCII characters)
<data(2»:
is the value of byte data (represented in two ASCII characters)
Zilog
5-34
HRM
Zilog
<checksum2(2»:
HRM
is the checksum for the data portion of the record (two ASCII characters)
<carriage return>: indicates the end of the record
No segment information is transferred.
All downloaded
data is loaded into segment 0 with the LOAD command.
Data for segments other than 0 must be transferred to
Segment 0 by the MOVE command.
LAST RECORD
<entry address(4»
00 <checksum(4»
<carriage return>
where:
<entry address>:
is the starting execution
address for the program
<checksum>:
is the checksum for the
entry address
NOTE
A record ~ith 00 in the count field indicates
of load data.
the
en~
RECORD WITH ERROR MESSAGE
If either the local or remote system has to abort
process, it sends a record of the form:
the
load
/ <error messages in ASCII text> <carriage return>
ACKNOWLEDGE
During the loading process, after each record is received from the remote system, an acknowledge (ASCII 0)
is sent when the checksum values are verified.
If a
nonacknowledge (ASCII 7) is received, the remote system
attempts to load the same data record up to ten times.
After the tenth try, the Monitor Program returns to Monitor Mode for the next command.
An abort-acknowledge
(ASCII 9) is sent to the remote system if the escape
(ESC) key is pressed, aborting the loading process. The
5-35
Zilog
5-35
HRM
Zilog
HRM
Monitor Program then returns to Monitor Mode for the
next command. The address used in the data record during the loading process is provided by 'the file description record; it must be greater than %8000.
5-36
Zilog
5-36
HRM
Zilog
HRM
COMMAND NAME
LOAD
SYNTAX:
L <filename>
DESCRIPTION:
This command downloads a Z8000 program named
that resides in the remote system.
<filename>
The Monitor Program transmits the exact command line to
the- remote system.
The command causes a remote procedure file (LOAD) to be executed, to open the file
specified by <filename>. The binary data in the file is
converted to Tektronix record format and transmitted to
the local system. The Monitor Program verifies the two
checksum values in the receiving record and stores the
. data in RAM memory as specified by the address indicated
in the record.
An acknowledgement from the system
causes the next record to be downloaded from the remote
system. A nonacknowledgement from the remote system
causes the current record to be ret~ansmitted up to ten
times, after which a record with an error message is
s~nt,
and the .Monitor Program returns to Monitor Mode.
The LOAD program in the remote system is also aborted.
Whe~
the loading process is completed, the entry point
received on the first record is displayed. Pressing ESC
aborts the LOAD command.
Any breakpoints set from a
previous program must be cleared before a new program is
loaded from the remote system. (NOTE: Ensure that the
remote system is connected to T1YO on the rear panel).
ERROR MESSAGES:
IABORT
IUNABLE TO OPEN FILE (XX), where (XX) is the ZEUS error
code from the remote system
IFILENAME ERROR
INOT PROCEDURE FILE
IERROR IN READING FILE (XX), where (XX) is the ZEUS error
code from the remote system
IRECORD CHECKSUM ERROR
IINCORRECT LOAD ADDRESS
EXAMPLE:
Transfer file names MYFILE from the remote system to the
local system RAM memory.
5-37
Zilog
5-37
Zilog
HRM
HRM
[LOAD MYFILE <CR>
NOTE
The address of RAM memory and the entry address
used in the download pro~ess are provided by tbe
information in the descriptor record of the file
specified by <filename> in the LOAD command.
5.9.5. System Parameters: The following system
are accessible to the user:
NAME
PARAMETER
NULLCT
Null Count %43F6
parameters
This address stores the number of null characters
that are inserted after a line feed. Modifying the
null count adapts the System 8000 to the return delays of various terminals. NULLCT is initialized to
O.
LINDEL
Line Delete %43F3
This address stores the character intercepted by the
input line procedure as a line delete. When it is
read from the terminal, this procedure purges the
buffer and continues reading the input stream. LINDEL is initialized to %7F (RUB).
CHRDEL
Character Delete %43F2
This address stores the character intercepted by the
input line procedure as a character delete. When it
is read from the terminal, the last character entered is purged from the input buffer. Multiple
character deletes can be used to delete the last n
characters entered.
CHRDEL is initialized to %08
(control-h) .
XOFCHR
XOFF Character %43F5
The character stored at this address is interpreted
by the input interrupt procedure as a character that
stops outputting data to the terminal. When it is
read from the terminal, all output is suspended until an XONCHR is received. XOFCHR is initialized to
%3 (control-s).
5-38
Zilog
5-38
HRM
XONCHR
Zilog
HRM
XON Character %43F4
The character stored at this address is iriterpreted
by the input interrupt procedure as a character that
resumes output after XOFCHR is entered. When it is
read from the terminal, all output is resumed.
XONCHR is initialized to %11 (control-q).
STACK
Stack Pointer %40AO
This address is the base of the user stack set by
the Monitor Program at reset. The top of the stack
is %4000.
PSAREA
Program status Area %4400
The Program Status Area for· entering various interrupts and trap handling procedures starts at this
address. This area includes the program status
blocks (FCW and PC) for different types of interrupts and traps. The Monitor Program sets up these
program status blocks as shown in Table 5-3.
5-39
Zilog "
5-39
Zilog
HRM
Table 5-3.
5-40
HRM
Program status Area
WORD
VALUE
COMMENT
0-1
2-3
4-5
6-7
8-9
A-B
C-D
E-F
10-11
12-13
14-15
16-17
18-19
1A-1B
1C-1D
1E-1F
20-21
22-23
24-25
26-27
28-29
2A-2B
2C-2D
2E-2F
30-31
32-33
unused
unused
unused
unused
unused
unused
%4000
IIBREAK
unused
unused
%4000
#NMINT
unused
unused
%4000
unused
unused
unused
unused
unused
unused
unused
unused
unused
unused
#PTYINT
34-35
#CHASRC
36-37
38-39
3A-3B
unused
unused
f!MCZINT
3C-3D
f!CHASRC
3E-3F
40-41
42-43
44-45
46-47
48-49
4A-4B
4C-4D
4E-4F
unused
unused
unused
unused
unused
unused
unused
unused
unused
RESERVED
RESERVED
Unimplemented instruction
Unimplemented instruction
PRIVILEGED INSTRUCTION
PRIVILEGED INSTRUCTION
SYSTEM CALL entered in Segmented Mode
Address of BREAK interrupt procedure
SEGMENT TRAP
SEGMENT TRAP
FCW for NONMASKABLE interrupt procedure
Address of NONMASKABLE interrupt procedure
NONVECTORED INTERRUPT
NONVECTORED INTERRUPT
FCW for all VECTORED INTERRUPTS
VECTOR 0
VECTOR 2
VECTOR 4
CTCO, CH.3
VECTOR 6
BREAK and NEXT
VECTOR 8
VECTOR A
VECTOR C
VECTOR E
VECTOR 10
VECTOR 12
VECTOR 14 (SIO Channel B input interrupt
procedure address)
VECTOR 16 (SIO Channel B special receive
condition procedur~ address)
VECTOR 18
VECTOR 1A
VECTOR 1C (SIO Channel A input interrupt
procedure address)
VECTOR 1E (SIO Channel A special receive
condition procedure address)
VECTOR 20
VECTOR 22
VECTOR 24
VECTOR 26
VECTOR 28
VECTOR 2A
VECTOR 2C
VECTOR 2E
VECTOR 30
Zilog
5-40
HRM
Zilog
The port addresses shown in Table 5-4 are used in the
tor Program.
Table 5-4
HRM
Moni-
System Hardware I/O Port Addresses
PORT
ADDRESS
CTC CHANNEL 0
CTC CHANNEL 1
CTC CHANNEL 2
CTC CHANNEL 3
SIO DATA CHANNEL A
SIO DATA CHANNEL B
SIO CONTROL CHANNEL A
SIO CONTROL CHANNEL B
RETI PORT
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION PORT
(or REGISTER)
FFA1
FFA3
FFA5
FFA7
FF81
FF83
FF85
FF87
FFE1
FFC1 - 2 bits baud rate, 2 bits
boot device, 4 bits other
configurations
5.10~
Monitor I/O Procedures
The I/O procedures most frequently used in the Monitor Program are given in this section. These procedures are accessed by syste~ calls in user programs to perform console
I/O functions.
5.10~1.
I/O PFocedures:
PROCEDURE NAME
TYIN
DESCRIPTION
Gets a character from the keyboard buffer. If the buffer is
empty, this procedure waits for a character to appear. The
character is stored in register RLO, and the contents of register RHO are lost.
EXAMPLE
CONSTANT
TYIN :=%04
5-41
Zilog
5-41
Zilog
HRM
HRM
SC
IITYIN
(character in RLO)
PROCEDURE NAME
TYWR
DESCRIPTION
Displays the character in RLO.
The character is not
displayed if the XOFF character has been received before
this procedure is executed. In this case, the procedure
waits until an XON character is received from the console
before displaying the character in RLO.
If the character to
be displayed is a carriage return, the zero flag is set, and
RHO is lost.
EXAMPLE
CONSTANT
TYWR : ::%06
SC
flTYWR
(character in RLO)
PROCEDURE NI\ME
PUTMSG
DESCRIPTION
Sends a character string to the terminal. Register R2 contains the address of the character string buffer, and the
first byte in the buffer contains the number of characters
to be displayed. If there is no return in the string, the
entire specified string is displayed. Otherwise, the string
is displayed up to and including the first return. Register
contents RO, R1, and R2 are lost.
EXAMPLE
CONSTANT
PUTMSG : =%OC
.
(string address in R2)
SC
IIPUTMSG
5-42
Zilog
5-42
HRM
Zilog
HRM
PROCEDURE NAME
TTY
DESCHIPTION
Receives and echoes at the terminal a character string up to
the first return.
The character string is stored in a
buffer pointed to by register R2.
Register R1 contains the
size of the buffer'.
If the size of the character string
exceeds the size of the buffer, the zero flag is set.
All
lowercase alpha characters are converted to uppercase characters before they are stored in the buffer. R1 returns the
actual number of characters received from the terminal. The
contents of registers RO and R2 are lost.
EXAMPLE
CONSTANT
TTY :%08
SC
IITTY
(string address in R2, size in R1)
PROCEDURE NAME
CRLF
DESCHIPTION
Outputs a return followed by a line feed
The contents of register RO are lost.
to
the
terminal.
EXAMPLE
CONSTANT
CRLF :=%OA
SC
5-43
/lCRLF
Zilog
5-43
Zilog
HRM
5.11.
DIE)
Stand-Alone
Diagnostic
HRM
Interactive
Executive
(SA-
NOTE
Refer to Appendix A of this manual, for SADIE tape
release 3.2 test descriptions.
SADIE is a stand-alone diagnostic executive and diagnostic
library. It provides thorough testing of all mainframe components. SADIE is based on the construction, modification,
storage, and execution of test lists.
The commands to
operate on these test lists are displayed in a menu-oriented
format on the CRT to minimize the documentation support required and to allow a first-time user to execute SADIE
without constant reference to an instruction manual. The
SADIE program code and associated data sets reside on the
SADIE diagnostic tape cartridge, which is inserted in the
tape slot and run whenever degraded system operational capability is suspected. The object code for SADIE resides in
the lower part of a memory segment; the diagnostic test resides in the upper part of the segment.
5.11.1. Purpose of SADIE: The basic purpose of. SADIE is to
test the· system hardware.
To do this, SADIE allows construction and execution of test lists." A test list consists
of lines executed sequentially. A line contains either a
test or a control statement, up to four parameters necessary
for execution of the test or contrQl statement, and a repetiti6n count for all noninteractive tests. Normal sequential execution of a test list can be altered by a GOTO control statement or interrupted by a PAUSE control statement
in the list. There are control statements to specify lineprinter test output as well as the visual display output.
Other control statements specify that that the tests that
follow should pause on a hard-error condition.
Every test
list includes a termination line consisting of an EOL (endof-list) in the test-name field of the display.
Single
tests can also be executed. SADIE considers a single test to
be a two-line test, where the second line is the EOL.
As a test list executes, errors are logged into a cumulative
error log and an error summary log for the test.
The cumulative log contains the last 20 error messages.
The error
summary contains the number of laps completed, the number of
hard and soft errors, and the completion status of each line
in the list. Both logs remain available until the next test
list is run or until the end of the SADIE session.
5-44
Zilog
5-44
HRM
HRM
Zilog
5.11.2. Organization and Principles of Operation: SADIE is
organized as a tree of menus to provide its diagnostic functions. Menu items are either submenu names (lower branches
of the tree) or functions (the end of the branch) of SADIE.
The tree is traversed by entering the choice required to
perform a function or to move to another menu on the path to
a function.
Choices are entered on the console.
Choices
are interpreted when the line on which they are entered is
terminated by a <CR>.
In addition, the START and RESET buttons can be used to interact with SADIE.
The characters identifying menu choices are letters, integers, <CR> (carriage return), and
Ci on some terminals).
Entry of
causes a return to the menu from
which the
present menu was selected or to the master (COMMAND LEVEL)
menu. A <CR> is used when there is only one choice or when
there is a default choice, as in verifying that a prior
choice is correct. Integers are used to identify tests,
test lists, or lines in a test list, or for entry of numerical constants.
Numerical constants entered are interpreted
in decimal base unless the prompt indicates that the default
base is hexadecimal or octal. The default base can be overridden by prepending 0 (zero) and a letter, d for decimal, 0
for octal, or x for hexadecimal for a specific number base.
Letters are used for all other choices. When a letter is
used, it is usually the initial letter of a capitalized keyword in the item description . . Either upper or lowercase
letters can be used.
A
A
A sequence of menus can be traversed by entering appropriate
choices on a single line.
Entries must be separated by one
or more spaces. The terminating <CR> is treated as a menu
choice if it is preceded by a space.
When a menu is too large to fit onto the CRT screen, entry
of + will get the next screen, and - will get the previous
screen.
SADIE maintains in memory both the current single test and
current test list.
Initially the current single test and
the current test list only contain an EOL.
5.12fi
SADIE Tape Organization
The SADIE tape contains the following data sets:
1.
The bootstrap loader functions as a tape loading supervisor that loads the SADIE machine code.
2.
The SADIE machine code provides I/O support for tests.
When invoked, it loads the library and test list cata-
5-45
. Zilog
5-45
Zilog
HRM
HRM
logs, and initializes the CPU. After completing these
initial functions, the executive function is available
for interactive use.
3.
The tape maintenance machine code supports addition and
deletion of tests stored on the SADIE tape and updates
the test catalog.
4
The diagnostic tape library contains object code files.
An object code file contains the object code for a
stand-alone test. A maximum of 25K bytes of memory is
allocated to each object code file.
This limit is
necessary to allow the SADIE machine code to be
coresident and to provide room for the stack that grows
downward from the end of the segment.
5.
The diagnostic library catalog contains all information
necessary to identify the test, prepare for its execution, and load it. Included are the test name (1 to 8
characters), a short description of the test (1 to 40
characters), declarations of base (decimal, hexadecimal, or octal) and default values for up to four integer parameters, a functional classifi~ation of the
test, and its file and track location on the tape.
6.
The test list library contains
been stored . .
7.
The test list catalog contains a onedescription of each test list.
5.13.
test
lists
to
that
have
50-character
SADIE Program Initialization
To initialize SADIE:
1.
Insert the tape cartridge into cartridge tape drive.
2.
pr e s s RES ET .
3.
En ter T< CR> •
4•
En t e r Z T<CR> •
This command executes the monitor-resident primary tape
bootstrap routine that loads the SADIE bootstrap routine and
transfers control to SADIE. After the bootstrap process is
complete, a command level menu is displayed on the CRT that
includes the version of SADIE that is present.
5-46
Zilog
HRM
5.14.
2ilog
HRM
SADIE Diagnostic Functions
SADIE diagnostic functions fall into six classes accessible
from the COMMAND LEVEL menu.
This is the first menu
displayed after product invocation. The first class is execution of a test list reached by the LIST command, L, or the
CHOOSE command, C. The second class is execution of a single test reached by the TEST command, T, or the REPEAT command, R. The third class is display of
SADIE-maintained
error logs. The DISPLAY command, D, displays the error summary log for the most recently executed list. The A command
displays the cumulative error log for ALL tests in the most
recently executed list. The fourth class is the EDIT command, E, which provides editing functions for test lists
such as creation, modification, storage, and retrieval. The
fifth class is the tape maintenance functions, reached by
the M command. These functions allow additions and deletions of tests in the SADIE test library. The sixth class
is the QUIT command, Q, which performs an orderly return to
the PROM Monitor.
Two functions are controlled by the START and RESET buttons.
Pressing RESET disables SADIE and enables the PROM monitor.
Presssing START halts the function that is executing by gene~ating
a Non-Maskable Interrupt (NMI).
In addition to
halting the current test, SADIE displays a PAUSE menu,
described later.
5.14u1.
Console Interactions:
RUNNING A TEST LIST
Since single tests are executed as if they were one-line
test lists, the running of test lists is treated first.
The
user can run the test list currently in memory with the LIST
command, L, or choose any of the lists stored on tape with
the CHOOSE command, C. In the second case, the catalog of
test list$ is displayed, and the one selected by the user is
transferred from tape to memory. In either case, the subsequent actions are identical.
The test list, or the starting portion of a list too long
for the screen, is displayed. The user can specify the line
where list execution begins; S begins execution at line 1,
<CR> begins execution at the current line. The current line
is indicated in the display by an asterisk (*) in the left
margin.
Initially, the current line is line 1; however, by
entering another number, the user can change the current
line to that number.
After a request for execution of the list, a check of the
list is performed by SADIE, and the. SADIE error logs are
5-47
2ilog
5-47
HRM
'. HRM
Zilog
cleared. A line may contain a reference to a test not on
the tape due to alteration or corruption of the tape.
Any
such line will be skipped in execution. The user is notified of any such line or of any line containing a test that
would overwrite the disk or tape. If any line overwrites
the disk, the user must verify that this is acceptable before execution of the list begins. If any lineprinter control line will cause printed output, and the lineprinter interface has not been identified during the session, SADIE
prompts for the interface (Centronics or Data Products).
During execution, if any test would overwrite the tape, the
test is loaded, but execution halts until the SADIE tape has
been replaced with a scratch tape. A request to reload the
SADIE tape is not generated until SADIE next attempts to reposition the tape.
NOTE
When the SADIE tape is replaced, wait until it
FULLY REWOUND before responding with Y.
is
During execution, SADIE updates an error log whenever an error is detected or a test lap is completed. Detailed error
messages are logged in the cumulative error log. When execution is complete, enter a <CR> to return to the COMMAND
LEVEL.
RUNNING A SINGLE TEST: Any test can be selected and run
with the TEST command, T. The catalog of tests and control
statements is presented. The selected one is displayed with
default parameters set by SADIE. ~he default repetition
count, 1, or the parameters can be modified.
When satisfied, enter a <CR> to change the test into a special oneline test list, and begin its execution. The list check and
verification of any attempt to overwrite the disk or tape
are then performed just as in running a regular test list.
When the test is complete, enter a' <CR> to return to COMMAND
LEVEL.
To rerun a test previously chosen with the TEST command use
the REPEAT command, R. It is now possible to modify the existing repetition count or parameters before executing the
test.
DISPLAYING THE TEST LIST ERROR LOGS: The DISPLAY command,
D, displays an error summary log generated by execution of a
test or test list. This log contains a line for each line
of the test list.
Each error log line contains the test
name, the number of times it was run, the number of hard and
5-48
Zilog
5-48
HRM
2ilog
HRM
soft errors it detected, and an indication of whether or not
the line was run to completion, and whether supplied parameters were found' inappropriate and replaced.
The error log remains after the list is completed, as
only record of completion states of tests in the list.
the
The A command displays the cumulative error log for ALL
tests in the test list. This log contains the last 20 detailed error messages logged by tests in the list.
Each
message contains the test name, the lap number, and error
number, along with a description of the error.
This error
log also remains after completion of the test.
Refer to Appendix A for the descriptions of the error messages logged
by the tests.
EDITING AND EDIT LEVEL: The
EDIT level is invoked by
entering E, the Edit command.
One test list resides in
memory and can be altered using the EDIT LEVEL subcommands.
This list can be a null list containing only a termination
(EDL) line. A window of up to seven lines of the current
list is displayed by the editor. One line of the display is
the current line, marked by *, upon which line-oriented commands operate.
Enter an integer to change the current line
of the list.
Previously created and stored test lists can be moved to
memory from the tape with the FETCH command, F. The memory
resident list can be moved to tape with the STORE command,
S.
In either case, the test list catalog containing list
descriptions is displayed, and the source· or destination for
the test list can be selected. When storing lists, the list
description in the test list catalog can be changed.
The memory-resident list can be altered in five ways.
The
CLEAR command, C, erases the current list by making it a
null list. The DELETE command, D, removes the current line
from the list.
The MODIFY command, M, allows the user to
change the repetition count or parameters of the current
line.
The REPLACE command, R, can be used to replace an entire
line.
The catalog of tests and control statements is
displayed and the'user makes a choice.
Default parameters
and repetition count are supplied and the line is displayed.
The repetition count or parameters can now be reset.
When
the line is correct, enter a <CR> to substitute the new line
for the original line of the list and to return to the EDIT
LEVEL.
2ilog
5-49
Zilog
HRM
HRM
The INSERT command, I, presents the catalog of tests and
test lists and then offers an optional reset of default repetition count or parameters just as the R command does.
Entering a <CR> when the line is correct, inserts the line
in the test list and displays the catalog of tests for
another insertion.
Entering an E, (for EXIT) when the line
is correct, inserts the line in the test list and returns to
the EDIT LEVEL menu.
TAPE MAINTENANCE LEVEL:
Three choices are available in
the
maintenance menu
The ADD command, A, queries the user until a catalog entry
for a new diagnostic has been formed.
The new entry is
displayed, and the user may edit it. When the user signals
that the entry is correct, the copy of the diagnostic library in memory is updated, and the diagnostic is appended
to the diagnostic tape library.
NOTE
The new diagnostic must already exist on the SADIE
tape at file 0, track d.
The DELETE command, 0, displays the catalog of tests.
The
test is removed from the diagnostic tape library,
and the entry for it is removed from the copy of the copy
of the diagnostic library catalog in memory.
s~l~cted
The third choice returns to the COMMAND LEVEL.
If the diagnostic libr·ary catalog has changed, the new tape is stored
on tape.
QUITTING: The QUIT command, Q, rewinds and unloads the
DIE tape and returns to the PROM Monitor program.
5.14.2.
SA-
START and RESET Interactions:
RESETTING
Pressing the RESET button forces a hardware reset.
It performs the same function as the QUIT command.
It is the only
sure way to abort a malfunctioning diagnostic.
5-50
Zilog
5-50
Zilog
HRM
HRM
FORCING A PAUSE WITH THE START BUTTON: When the START button is pressed, a nonmaskable interrupt is generated, and
SADIE responds by displayi~g a PAUSE menu with five choices.
This· is typically done when running a test or test list.
The LIST command, L, displays the current test list.
The
DISPLAY command, D? displays the error log previously discussed. The ERROR command, E, displays a detailed error log
for the current test if it maintains one. The A command
displays a similar detailed error log, but this log is for
ALL tests in the test list. The MONITOR command, M, brings
up a menu of MONITOR commands.
MONITOR functions are
described in the following paragraph. The SKIP command, S,
sets a flag which, when read by the test, causes it to cease
execution.
SADIE then runs the next line of the test list.
Entering a
sets the same flag, but SADIE terminates execution of the test list when the test returns control to it.
Entering a <CR> resumes the interrupted process.
A
NOTE
SADIE cannot a1\lays force an immediate abort of
test in progress.
a
MONITOR COMMANDS: The MONITOR provides functions similar to
tho~e
of the PROM Monitor. Sp~cified locations in memory
can be. displayed or filled with any single word pattern.
Blocks of memory can be moved, and as a special case, a
multiword pattern can be replicated through a block of
memory.
Memory can be stepped through a word at a time,
with optional alteration. Any I/O or" special 1/0 port can
be read and optionally written.
Success of reading and
writing depends on the hardware addressed.
5.15.
Command Level Test Functions
Stand-alone diagnostics are provided for testing of all
mainframe components. These diagnostics are supplied on the
SADIE tape. Insert this tape into the tape drive and complete the bootstrap procedure (paragraph 5-11). After an introductory message, the COMMAND LEVEL menu will appear on
the display screen as follows:
*****
T
R
L
C
E
5-51
COMMAND LEVEL *****
choose and run single TEST
REPEAT current single test
run current test LIST
CHOOSE and run a test list
EDIT test lists
Zilog
5-51
HRM
Zilog
D
A
M
Q
HRM
DISPLAY error log
display cumulative error log of ALL tests in list
perform tape MAINTENANCE functions
QUIT
Enter your choice J=>
After this menu appears, the desired function can
be selected by keying in its letter code
in response to the prompt "Enter your choice J=>" and
pressing <CR>.
The following descriptions are presented in the same sequence as they appear in the COMMAND LEVEL menu.
If a
function has subcommands, they are detailed before
proceeding to the next description. This allows for all
the information of one function to appear together for
convenient reference.
5.15.1.
Command Level T:
General Description:
Choose and run a single TEST:
A test can be chosen from the first
CRT display.
A second menu displays th~ available
control lines.
in either
case, once a test or control line
is chosen, a subsequent CRT display
allows for parameters and repetition count to be changed.
CRT Display Contents:
**
CHOOSE A TEST OR CONTROL LINE **
Followed by a list of test numbers
and corresponding titles
Optional Commands:
Optional
available
this display are:
Command
+
commands
for
Description
CRT displays next page of
available tests.
CRT displays preceding
page of available tests.
CRT displays the test
of control lines.
Select the test number of
5-52
Zilog
5-52
Zilog
HRM
HRM
your choice.
Return to COMMAND LEVEL.
T SUBCOMMAND LEVEL:
CHOOSE A CONTROL LINE
General Description:
A control line is chosen from the
menu.
A second CRT display allows
for parameters to be changed.
CRT Display Contents:
**CHOOSE A CONTROL LINE** followed
by a list of control line numbers
and corresponding titles.
Optional commands:
#
selects the
that number
control
line
with
returns to the CHOOSE A TEST
CONTROL LINE menu
OR
RESET TEST LINE
General Description:
The test or control line is shown
with its current values for parameters and repetition count. Parameters and/or repetition count can be
changed.
CRT Display Contents:
** RESET TEST LINE (OPTIONAL) **
Optional Commands:
Optional available keyword commands
for this display are:
Command
Description
R
Reset REPETITION count
p
Reset all PARAMETERS
#
Reset parameter #
I
Test name is INCORRECT-choose a different test
<CR>
Test line is correct
Return to CHOOSE A TEST
5-53
Zilog
5-53
HRM
Zilog
HRM
The P and # commands appear only
when the test has parameters to be
set.
E appears only in insert
mode.
I appears only if this menu
was reached immediately after the
user chose a test.
T
SUBCOMMAND LEVEL:
Reset REPETITION Count
General Description:
This function allows the user to
specify the number of times a particular test function is to be run.
The current value of the repetition
count is displayed, followed by a
prompt for a new value.
A new
value can be entered.
Entering
only <CR> leaves the count unchanged.
CRT Display Contents:
***** SET REPETITION COUNT
Optional Commands:
Optional available commands in this
mode are:
Command
*****
. Description
o
Test runs until START
button is pressed
#
A number # of iterations
expressed in decimal
notation between 1 and 9999
Return to·CHOOSE A TEST
or CONTROL LINE (leave
repetition count unchanged)
T SUBCOMMAND LEVEL:
General Description:
5-54
PARAMETERS
Parameters that specify the conditions under which a test is performed can be changed. The current
value of a parameter is displayed,
and the SADIE prompt for a new
value of type hexadecimal or decimal. Entering only <CR> leaves
the value unchanged.
Zilog
5-54
HRM
Zilog
HRM
CRT Display Contents:
***** SET PARAMETERS *****
Optional Commands:
Optional available commands in this
mode are:
Command
Description
A number # representing
the value of the parameter.
Return to CHOOSE A TEST
or CONTROL LINE.
5.1502.
test:
Command Level R:
REPEAT previously loaded single
General Description:
A previously chosen single test is
run.
Parameters,
repetition
counts, and options can be reset
before the test is re-executed.
CRT Display Contents:
** RESET TEST LINE (OPTIONAL) **
Optional Commands:
Optional available keyboard commands in this mode are the same a3
T (choose and run a single TEST).
5.15.3.
Command
LevE~l
General Description:
L: Run current test LIST:
test
list
(previously'
Current
chosen or selected at edit level)
is run~
First, the list is examined and, if
it contains tests that overwrite
the disk, a warning appears.
It
must
be
verified
that
this
overwriting is permissible before
execution of the list begins.
If a
test on the list does not appear in
the catalog, this information is
displayed and execution continues.
If execution of the list will cause
lines to be printed, and no prior
lists have opened the lineprinter
file, a menu of lineprinter interfaces appears.
If a test writes to
tape, execution of the list pauses
5-55
Zilog
5-55
HRM
Zi10g
HRM
after the test has been loaded until the user signals a scratch tape
has been installed and the -proper
command is entered.
Upon completion, the scratch tape is rewound
and removed, and the SADIE tape
should be re-installed.
CRT Display Contents:
***** RUN CURRENT TEST
LIST *****
followed by the first seven lines
of the test list at the top of the
screen and a menu at the bottom.
Optional Commands:
Optional available keyboard
mands in this mode are:
com-
Command
Description
<CR>
Execute list beginning
at current li,ne.
S
START execution at
line 1
Make line # the CURRENT
line (>1)
Return to COMMAND LEVEL
5. 15.4.
Command Level C: CHOOSE and run a test list::
General Description:
The
catalog of test lists
is
displayed and one is selected and
fetched from the SADIE tape.
A
second menu then appears, which is
the same as that described in section 5.15.1, except that ~ returns
to the C command level, not the
COMMAND LEVEL.
CRT Display Contents:
***** CHOOSE A TEST LIST *****
Followed by a list of test-list
numbers, and short descriptions of
test lists.
5-56
Zilog
5-56
HRM
Zilog
Optional Commands:
HRM
Optional available keyboard
mands in this mode are:
Command
#
com-
Description
Make line # (>1) the
current line
Return to COMMAND LEVEL
C SUBCOMMAND LEVEL:
Run current test list
General Description
The test list just chosen
the C command level is run.
CRT Display Contents:
*****
*****
RUN CURRENT TEST LIST
followed by the first
seven lines of the test list at
the top of the screen and a
menu at the bottom.
Optional Commands
keyboard
Optional
available
commands are the same as those
described in paragraph 5.15.1,
except that ~ returns to the C
command level, not the COMMAfID
LEVEL.
5.15.5.
Command Level E:
at
EDIT test list:
General Description:
This level performs storage and
list modification function options.
CRT Display Contents:
***** EDIT LEVEL *****
followed by one to seven lines of
the current test list at the top of
the screen and a menu at the bottom. The menu contains a test line
number column, a test name column,
a
repetitions column, and four
parameter columns. An asterisk (*)
to the left of the test-line number
indicates the current line.
5-57
Zilog
5-57
HRM
Optional Commands:
2ilog
HRM
optional available keyboard
mands in this mode are:
com-
Command
Description
C
CLEAR current test list
F
FETCH list from tape to
current test list
S
STORE current test list
D
DELETE line x
R
REPLACE line x
M
MODIFY repetitions on
parameters on line x
I
INSERT line(s) before
line x
#
Make line #
rent line
«x+1)
cur-
Return to COMMAND LEVEL
E SUBCOMMAND LEVEL:
C - CLEAR current test list
General Description:
The current test list residing in
RAM is deleted before creating a
new test list.
CRT Display Contents:
The EDIT TEST LIST is displayed,
with the test list at the top of
the screen showing only an EOL
line.
Optional Commands:
Not applicable
E SUBCOMMAND LEVEL:
list:
General Description:
5-58
F - FETCH list from tape to test
The CRT displays a catalog of test
lists stored on tape and a test
list is selected and loaded into
memory in preparation for desired
modification.
2i10g
5-58
HRM
2ilog
CRT Display Contents:
HRM
***** FETCH LIST *****
Followe~ by
a menu containing
list of the test lists.
Optional Commands:
#
the number corresponding
the test list to be fetched
a
to
to return to the EDIT level
E SUBCOMMAND LEVEL:
Gen~ral
Description:
S - STORE current test list:
The current catalog of test lists
stored on the tape are displayed.
The user chooses a list number
where the current test list is to
be stored. The current test list
description is displayed and the
user has the opportunity to enter a
new description. Then the current
test list overwrites the original
test list on the tape and the test
list catalog is updated.
CRT Display Contents:
***** STORE LIST *****
Optional Commands:
#
the test list-number where the
t est . s h 0 u 1 d
be.s tor e d..
SAD I E
prompts for a new test-list name of
1 to 39 characters.
Followed by a menu containing
list of the 19 test lists.
to
E SUBCOMMAND LEVEL:
retu~n
a
to the EDIT level
D - DELETE line x:
General Description:
Line is removed from test list.
CRT Display Contents:
The EDIT level menu is displayed
with the deleted line removed.
Optional Commands:
Not applicable.
5-59
2ilog
5-59
Zilog
HRM
E SUBCOMMAND LEVEL:
HRM
R - REPLACE line x:
General Description:
A test or control statement, including parameters and repetition
count, are chosen and installed in
the test list that replaces the
selected line contents.
CRT Display Contents:
**
Optional Commands:
The choices available are the same
as those described in paragraph
5.15.1 under CHOOSE A TEST OR CONTROL L1NE, except that ~ returns to
the EDIT level.
CHOOSE A TEST OR CONTROL LINE
**
on line x
General Description:
The number of repetitions or value
of any parameter can be changed.
CRT Display:
**
Optional Commands:
The choices available are the same
as those d~sqribed in paragraph
5.15.1 under CHOOSE A TEST OR CONTROL LINE, except that ~ returns to
the EDIT level.
E SUBCOMMAND LEVEL:
RESET TEST LINE (OPTIONAL)
**
I - INSERT line(s) before line x:
General Description:
A line is
inserted before the
selected
line.
The
list
is
displayed again, centered above the
originally
selected line.
This
procedure continues as long as new
lines are entered.
CRT Display:
**
Optional Commands:
The choices available are the same
as those described in paragraph
5.15.1 under CHOOSE A TEST OR CONTROL LINE, except that ~ returns to
the EDIT level, and there is an additional command, E, that Exits insert mode..
5-60
CHOOSE A TEST OR CONTROL LINE
Zilog
**
5-60
HRM
Zilog
E SUBCOMMAND LEVEL:
I - Make line I
HRM
the current line:
General Description:
Pointer is moved to line number H.
CRT Display:
The EDIT level menu is displayed
with an asterisk (*) next to the
newly chosen current line. Testlist lines are centered around the
new current line.
Optional Commands:
Not applicable
5. 15.6.
Command
LevE~l
General Description:
CRT Display Contents:
Optional Commands:
5.15.7.
D:
DISPLAY error log:
The error log maintained in SADIE
is displayed, including the test
name, the number of times a test
was executed, the number of errors
reported by the test (organized by
test list line), and the completion
status of each test line. The error log is cleared prior to the
start of execution of a test list
or single test.
H
HARD
SOFT
TEST REPS ERRORS ERRORS STATUS
Not applicable
Command Level A: Cumulative error log -
ALL
tests
in list:
General
Description:
o to 20
displayed.
error
messages
are
CRT Contents:
TESTNAME LAP ERROR ERROR MESSAGE
followed ~the error messages
Optional Commands:
5-61
Not Applicable
Zilog
5-61
~5.15.8.
HRM
2ilog
HRM
Command Level M:
do tape MAINTENANCE:
General Description
The user can modify the SADIE tape,
adding or deleting tests.
CRT Contents:
*****PERFORM TAPE MAINTENANCE FUNCTIONS***** followed by a menu of
commands
Optional Commands:
Optionally available
this display are:
Command Level Q:
for
Command
Descr~ption
D
DELETE a test from tape
ADD a test to tape
return to COMMAND LEVEL
A
5.15.9.
commands
QUIT:
General Description:
The QUIT command terminates the SADIE program functions.
The SADIE
tape is rewound to the physical
load point and system control is
returned to the PROM Monitor.
CRT Display Contents:
When this command is complete,
Monitor message appears.
Optional Commands:
Not applicable
5.16.
the
SADIE Test Line and Control statements
5.16.1. SADIE Test List: Any test can be selected and run
with the TEST command, T. When selected on the COMMAND LEVEL menu, a catalog of tests and control statements is
displayed:
Appendix A contains detailed information of each test on the
SADIE diagnostic tape.
Control statements are defined in
the following paragraph.
5.16.2. Control statements: Control statements can be inserted in test lists to modify list execution. Control
statements are: GOTO, PAUSE, PRINT OPTIONS, and PAUSE-ONERROR OPTIONS.
5-62
2ilog
5-62
HRM
Zilog
HRM
GOTO
The GOTO statement is useful for setting up test loops.
It
causes the execution of the test list to jump to a specified
line. A loop count of 0 to 9999 is specified.
When the
specified loop count is reached, control will fall to the
next statement in the test list. When special value 0 is
specified, GOTO will always be executed.
PAUSE
This statement· causes the PAUSE menu to be displayed. SADIE
programs are not disturbed; they are only temporarily halted
to allow for optional action. The optional available commands are listed in the following PAUSE menu:
***** PAUSE *****
L
Display current test LIST
D
DISPLAY error log
E
Display detailed ERROR log
A
Display cumumative log of ALL tests in list
M
MONITOR function
S
SKIP to next line in test list
<CR>
RESUME current test
Return to COMMAND LEVEL
All the commands operate tbe same way, except the
SKIP command, S, which causes the line of the
test list following the PAUSE line to be skipped,
rather than the PAUSE line itself.
PRINT OPTIONS
There are five print option statements that determine whether test output will be printed as well as being displayed.
Normally, test error messages are displayed but not printed.
5-63
Zilog
5-63
Zilog
HRM
HRM
The print options are:
NOPRLNT
(default)
PRINTMSG
only error and informative messages are printed
PRINTSUM
only lap summaries are printed
PRINTTOT
only the last lap summary is printed
PRINTALL
all test output is printed
PAUSE-ON-ERROR OPTIONS
All tests following a PAUSE-ON-ERROR option statement cause
the test to halt when an error occurs, if the PAUSETST option is selected. The PAUSE-ON ERROR OPTIONS are:
NOPAUSE
PAUSETST
5.17.
(default)
Display PAUSE menu on hard-error.
Using SADIE
The purpose of this example is to familiarize the user' with
the CRT displays and interaction with the"console during SADIE execution.
Insert the SADIE tape into the tape drive and press
RESET button. The following CRT display appears:
the
S8000 Monitor 1.2 - Press START to Load System
To initialize memory and execute
enter T<CR).
power-up
diagnostics,
To load the primary bootstrapper, enter the command:
•
Z T <CR>
The primary bootstrapper displays:
BOOTING FROM TAPE
5-64
Zilog
5-64
HRM
2ilog
HRM
When booting is complete, information pertaining to the
current version of the diagnostic tape will appear on
the CRT display. For example:
SADIE
(Stand Alone Diagnostic Interactive Executive)
Customer Release:
3.1
Released: February 19, 1982
This display appears momentarily, followed by
MAND LEVEL menu:
*****
T
R
L
C
E
D
A
M
Q
COMMAND LEVEL
the
COM-
*****
choose and run single TEST
REPEAT current single test
run current test LIST
CHOOSE and run a test list
EDIT test lists
DISPLAY error log
display cumulative log of ALL tests in list
perform tape MAINTENANCE functions
QUIT
Enter your choice J=>
After this menu appears, the desired diagnostic function may
be selected by simply entering its letter code in response
to the prompt "Enter your choice] =>". For example, selecting T, followed by <CR>, produces:
*****
CHOOSE A TEST OR CONTROL LINE
*****
followed by a submenu of SADIE tests and the prompt:
Enter your choice ]=>
The CHOOSE A TEST OR CONTROL LINE submenu presents the catalog of tests and control statements available to the user.
In response to the prompt "Enter your choice ]=>", enter the
1- or 2-digit test number in the first column, followed by
<CR>. In the following example, the MMUTST5 is chosen. The
following display appears:
5-65
2ilog
5-65
Zilog
HRt4
HRM
***** RESET TEST LINE (OPTIONAL) *****
the test line is currently set as follows:
NAME
MMUTST5
flREPS
PARAMETERS 1-4
No parameters to set
R
to reset REPETITION count
I
test name is INCORRECT - choose different test
<CR> if test line is correct
~
to return to COMMAND LEVEL
Enter your choice J=>
The MMUTST5 test line is displayed with default paramet e r s s e t by SA DIE. Th e de fa u 1 t rep e tit ion co un t, 1, 0 r
the parameters can be modified. To reset the repetition
count, enter R in response to the prompt "Enter your
choice] =>", followed by <CR>.
The following display
appears:
***** SET REPETITION COUNT *****
Current repetition count =
o
to run test until NMI pressed
(positive # <=9999) to run test this many times
/I
to return to RESET TEST LINE
<CR> to leave repetition count the same
~
Enter your choice ]=>
To modify the default or existing repetition count, following the prompt "Enter your choice ]=>", enter the
number of times the test is to run. In this case, the
default repetition count, 1, is changed to 5. When <CR>
is entered, the following display appears:
5-66
Zilog
5-66
HRM
2ilog
HRM
***** RESET TEST LINE (OPTIONAL) *****
The test line is currently set as follows:
NAME
MMUTST5
ffREPS
-5--
PARAMETERS 1-4
No parameters-to set
R
to reset REPETITION count
I
test name is INCORRECT - choose different test
<CR> if test line is correct
to return to COMMAND LEVEL
A
Enter your choice J=>
When satisfied with the repetition count, enter <CR> in
respons'e to the pr'ompt 1fEnter your choice J=>". This
changes the test into a special one-line test list. The
list check and verification of any attempt to overwrite
the tape is then performed just as in running a regular
test list. During the list check and verification process, the following message is displayed:
*****
CHECKING TEST LIST ...
*****
LINE 1: OK
*****
CHECK COMPLETE
*****
After the CHECK COMPLETE message, the following display
appears:
*******************************************************
The following test is now running
NAME
ffREPS
PARAMETERS 1-4
MMUTST5
5
No parameters to set
*******************************************************
This is MMUTST5 - version 1.01
Now doing a
Now testing
Now testing
Now testing
Now testing
Now testing
data MMUs.
Now testing
Now testing
Now testing
5-67
block random data test on all MMUs.
SDRs with random data and random accesses.
control registers with random data.
READ ONLY flags in the data and stack MMUs.
the LIMIT flags of the stack and data MMUs.
the DIRW (direction) flag of the stack and
TRANSLATION on the DATA MMU seg(1-63).
TRANSLATION on the STACK MMU seg(1-63).
TRANSLATION on the CODE MMU seg(1-63).
2ilog
5-67
HRM
Zilog
HRM
As the first repetition of MMUTST5 progresses, the test
line for each MMU register or function is displayed, in
sequence, until the test is complete. If an error occurred during the test, error messages will be displayed
immediately following the last test line.
When the test repetition is complete, the following
count summary appears:
lap
This is MMUTST5 - version 1 .01
LAPCNT=1 ERROR COUNT=O
CODE MMU ERRORS
SDR: BLOCK 0
RNDM 0
CONTROL: SAR 0
DSC 0
MODE 0
FLAGS: RD 0
LIM 0
DIR 0
TRANS: 0
CONTROL: SAR 0
DSC 0
MODE 0
FLAGS: RD 0
LIM 0
DIR 0
TRANS: 0
STACK M~1U ERRORS
SDR: BLOCK 0
CONTROL: SAR 0
DSC 0
RNDM 0
MODE 0
FLAGS: RD 0
LIM 0
DIR 0
TRANS
DATA MMU ERRORS
SDR: BLOCK 0
RNDM 0
The MMUTST5 test messages and lap count summary screens
appear the number of times set in the SET REPETITION
COUNT display. When the last repetition is complete,
the message
Hit <CR> to return to COMMAND LEVEL ]=>
appears immediately following the last
mary.
lap
count
sum-
When the COMMAND LEVEL menu appears, any of the diagnostic functions may be selected. To facilitate this example, entering the QUIT command, Q, in response to the
prompt "Enter your choice ]=>" terminates the SADIE diagnostic functions. The tape is rewound to the physical
load point and system control is returned to the PROM
Monitor.
5-68
Zilog
5-68
0
HRM
Zilog
HRM
APPENDIX A
SADIE TEST DESCRIPTIONS
This appendix gives detailed information for the diagnostic
tests contained on the System 8000 Diagnostic Tape, SADIE
(Part Number 14-0009-05). The following menu is displayed
when SADIE is loaded. Some tests do not apply to Models 21
and 31 and do not appear in this appendix.
WDCCRC
WDCFMT
WDCl'-1EDIA
WDCTST3
WDCTST7
WDCJVION
MDCCRC
MDCFMT
MDCHEDIA
MDCTEST
A-1
SMDFMT
SMDMEDIA
SMDGRC
SMDTEST
SMDMON
TCUMON
TCOM
TEX
NEWMEM1
NEWMEM2
Zilog
NEWMEM3
MMUTST5
CENT.PRT
DP.PRT
S168IO
SIOMODEM
ECCTEST
MTCMON
MTCON
A-1
Zilog
HRM
HRM
TEST NAME
WDCCRC - a non-destructive verification of
Disk Data, Cyclic Redundancy Checks (CRCs)
the
Winchester
PARAMETERS
Disk drive to be tested (default=O)
DESCRIPTION
WDCCRC reads all tracks of the selected drive. If an error
is detected, a message is displayed and logged. WDCCRC
repeats n times, where n is the #REPS in the test line.
ERROR MESSAGES
WDCCRC can issue the following error messages
where:
u =
ccc =
h =
S3 =
dr =
ds =
oe =
os =
xx =
unit number (decimal)
cylinder number' (decimal)
head number (decimal)
sector number (decimal)
contents (hex) of drive ready register
contents (hex) of disk status register
contents (hex) of operation error status register
contents (hex) of other status register
value (hex) of command issued to the WDC
DISK NOT RESPONDING DURING INIT
WDC failed to respond within a
the test began.
INVALID COMMAND
DISK=(u,ccc,h,ss)
reasonable
time
COMMAND ISSUED=xx
Invalid command opcode or out-of-range command
ters.
HARD TRK READ
A-2
after
parame-
DISK=(u,ccc,h,ss) DR=dr DS=ds OE=oe OS=os
Zilog
A-2
HRM
Zilog
An uncorrectable
operation.
SOFT TRK READ
error
HRM
occurred
DISK=(u,ccc,h,ss)
during
track
read
DR=dr DS=ds OE=oe OS=os
A correctable error occurred during track
tion.
read
opera-
LAP SUMMARY
A lap summary is displayed when each repetition of WDCCRC is
completed. The lap summary includes:
~
test name
G
lap number
G
total number of errors
~
number of times each WDC command was issued during
test
the
tally of the number of times each of the following
status bits was returned by the disk controller when a
soft error occurred:
TOT
DAT
pas
FOR
NR
SVE
RWF
SPE
PL
WPT
DSE
NCL
GB
PLE
UNS
DCE
DTO
P/M
ADE
DF
NOL
CTO
CWP
A-3
t.otal number of errors
CRC er"ror s
sector not found
format error (sector header
field error)
unit not ready
servo error
read or write fault
speed error
power loss
write protected
seek E~rror
not on cylinder
guard band error
PLO error
unsafE~
inval:id command
timeout error
POR/MR
addre:5s error
drive fault
drive not on-line
controller operation timed out
write protect error
Zilog
A-3
HRM
Zilog
VF
BD
CRDT
ME
~
HRM
verify failure
bad disk: excessive media defects
can't read defect table
map error
a tally of hard errors similar to the soft error
tally described previously, but with these additions:
INVC
CMP
INIT
invalid command
compare error
WDC not responding during initialization
For detailed information on the disk controller commands and
status registers, refer to the Winchester Disk Controller
Hardware Reference Manual (03-3203).
NOTES
WDCCRC does not recognize when the drive selected for testing is off-line, or when the disk medium is not present in
the drive. WDCCRC will display an error message for each
track it attempts to read on the nonexistent drive. The
same results occur when the drive and disk medium are
present but the disk is locked. To recover, press the system START button, then respond \'lith "A" to the PAUSE menu.
A-4
Zilog
A-4
HRM
Zilog
HRM
TEST NAME
WDCFMT - data-destructive formatting of the entire disk
PARAMETERS
Disk drive to be tested (default=O)
DESCRIPTION
WDCFMT formats every sector of the disk.
This is accomplished by issuing the format command, FMT, to the Winchester Disk Controller (WDC).
WDCFMT reformats the disk n
times, where n = HREPS in the test line. After each repetition, WDCFMT displays the defect map.
If cylinder-sparing
WDC firmware is installed, a list of defective cylinder3 is
displayed.
Otherwise, a list of defective sectors is
displayed.
ERROR MESSAGES
WDCFMT can issue the following error messages
where:
u
ccc
h
ss
dr
ds
oe
os
xx
-.
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
unit number (decimal)
cylinder number (decimal)
head number (decimal)
sector number (decimal)
conten.ts (hex) of drive ready register
contents (hex) of disk status register
contents (hex) of operation error status register
contents (hex) of other status register
value (hex) of command issued to the WDC
DISK NOT RESPONDING DURING INIT
WDC failed to respond within a
the test began.
INVALID COMMAND
DISK=(u,ccc,h,ss)
reasonable
time
COMMAND ISSUED=xx
Invalid command opcode or out-of-range command
ters.
A-5
Zilog
after
parame-
A-5
HRM
Zilog
HARD BAD DISK
DISK:(u,ccc,h,ss)
HRM
DR=dr DS:ds OE:oe OS:os
Number of bad sectors/cylinders exceeds the number
spare sectors/cylinders. The disk is not useable.
HARD FORMAT ERR
DISK:(u,ccc,h,ss) DR:dr DS:ds OE:oe OS:os
WDC returned an uncorrectable error status
HARD BAD DISK.
SOFT FORMAT ERR
of
DISK:(u,ccc,h,ss)
other
than
DR=dr DS:ds OE=oe OS=03
Error during format was corrected on r.etry.
HARD ERROR: ENTERING CEMODE
DR:dr DS:ds OE:oe OS=os
WDC returned an uncorrectable
CEMODE command was issued.
SOFT ERROR: ENTERING CEMODE
error
status
after
a
DR=dr DS:ds OE:oe OS:os
WDC returned a correctable error status after a
command was issued.
CEMODE
HARD ERROR: READING DEFECT MAP DR:dr DS:ds OE=oe OS=os
WDC return~d an uncorrectable error status after a READ
command was issued to cylinder O. WDCFMT was trying to
read a copy of the defect map.
SOFT ERROR: READING DEFECT MAP DR=dr DS:ds OE:oe OS=os
WDC returned a correctable error status after a READ
command was issued to cylinder O. WDCFMT·was trying to
read a copy of the defect map.
HARD ERROR: EXITING CEMODE DR:dr DS:ds OE:oe OS:os
WDC returned as uncorrectable error status after an
RDDT (read-defect-table) command was issued to force
the WDC out of CEMODE.
SOFT ERROR: EXITING CEMODE DR:dr DS:ds OE:oe OS:os
WDC returned a correctable error status after an RDDT
(read-defect-table) command was issued to force the WDC
out of CEMODE.
A-6
Zilog
A-6
HRM
Zilog
HRM
LAP SUMMARY
At the end of each test repetition, a lap summary as
described under the WDCCRC LAP SUHMARY is display€!d. Following the lap summary is the defect table.
If cylinder
sparing firmware is installed on the controller board, a
list of bad physical cylinders is shown. Otherwise, a list
of bad physical sectors is displayed in the following format: (cc,h,ss), where cc = cylinder nutnber (decimal); h =
head number (decimal); ss = sector number (decimal).
NOTES
If the START button is pressed while the FMT command is
being executed, requests by the user to skip to the next
test line, or return to the COMMAND LEVEL, will not be
honored until the FMT command completes execution. The FMT
command runs for approximately go minutes.
To stop this
test, press the RESET button.
If the drive selected for testing does not
command aborts promptly with a hard error.
A-7
Zilog
exist,
the
FMT
A-7
HRM
Zilog
HRM
TEST NAME
WDCMEDIA - data-destructive, write-read-compare test of
Winchester disk, using several data patterns
the
PARAMETER8
Parameter 1 - disk drive to be t~sted (default=O)
Parameter 2 - compare pattern read with pattern written.
If compare = 1 (defaul t), do compare step.
Otherwise, skip compare step.
Parameter 3 - pattern use. If pat~ern =1 (default), use all
patterns. Otherwise, use only "worst case" pattern
DESCRIPTION
WDCMEDIA exercises the disk medium by writing three separate
data patterns to each sector of the medium. After each data
pattern is written, the disk is read for·verification.
All
errors incurred while writing or reading a data pattern are
displayed. The three data patterns are:
1.
AAAA
2.
3.
FFFF
The "worst case" pattern B6DB6DB6DB6D.
Each pattern is written to every track of the medium.
errors writing or reading a pattern are displayed.
All
ERROR MESSAGES
WDCMEDIA can issue the following error messages
where:
pppp=
u =
ccc =
h =
5S =
dr =
ds =
oe =
os =
xx =
gggg=
bbbb=
A-8
data pattern (hex) read or written to the track
unit number (decimal)
cylinder number (decimal)
head number (decimal)
sector number (decimal)
contents (hex) of drive ready register
contents (hex) of disk status register
contents (hex) of operation error status register
contents (hex) of other status register
value (hex) of command issued to the WDC
"good" data (hex) written to the track
"bad" data (hex) read from the track
Zilog
A-8
HRM
Zilog
HRM
DISK NOT RESPONDING DURING INIT
WDC failed to respond within a
the test began.
INVALID COMMAND
DISK=(u,ccc,h,ss)
reasonable
time
COMMAND ISSUED=xx
Invalid command opcode or out-of-range command
ters.
HARD TRK WRITE
OS=os
pppp
DISK=(u,ccc,h,ss)
DR=dr
pppp
DISK=(u,ccc,h,ss)
DR=dr
parame-
DS=ds
Invalid command opcode or out-of-range command
ters.
SOFT TRK WRITE
OS=OS
after
OE=oe
parame-
DS=ds
OE=oe
A correctable error occurred during track write.
HARD TRK READ
OS=03
pppp
DISK=(u,ccc,h,ss)
. DR=dr
DS=ds' OE=oe
An uncorrectable error occurred during track read.
SOFT TRK READ
OS=os
pppp
DISK=(u,ccc,h,ss)
DR=de
DS=ds
OE=oe
A correctable error occurred during track read.
COMPARE ERROR DISK=(u,ccc,h,ss) GOOD DATA=gggg BAD=bbbb
A mismatch was found in comparing the "good" buffer
wri tten to thE~ disk wi th the "bad" buffer read from the
disk.
LAP SUMMARY
At the end of each test repetition, a lap summary is
displayed showing cumulative statistics for all repetitions.
Refer to the description of LAP SUMMARY of the WDCCRC test.
A-9
Zilog
A-9
HRM
Zilog
HRM
TEST NAME
WDCTST3 - a random queue test of the Winchester disk
PARAMETERS
disk drive to be tested (default=O)
DESCRIPTION
WDCTST3 creates a 128 element queue.
the following three addresses:
1)
2)
3)
Each queue member
has
a source buffer address
a destination buffer address
a disk address
Each source and destination buffer is 512 bytes long.
The
source buffers are in memory segment 1, and the destination
buffers are in memory segment 2.
Initially, the test randomizes the source buffer and disk
addresses of the 128 queue elements. For each element, the
sour~e buffer contents are written to the disk sector.
Next the test reads the sector at the disk address of each
element into the destination buffer. The source and destination buffers are then compared.
Finally, the disk addresses are again randomized to prevent
subsequent test repetitions from testing the same disk sectors.
WDCTST3 repeats n times, where n=#REPS in the test line.
ERROR MESSAGES
WDCTST3 can issue the following error messages
where:
A-10
Zilog
A-10
HRM
Zilog
u =
ccc =
h =
ss =
dr =
ds =
oe =
os =
xx =
gggg=
bbbb::;
HRM
unit number (decimal)
cylinder number (decimal)
head number (decimal)
sector number (decimal)
contents (hex) of drive ready register
contents (hex) of disk status register
contents (hex) of operation error status register
contents (hex) of other status register
value (hex) of command issued to the WDC
"good" data (hex) written to the sector
"bad" data (hex) read from the sector
DISK NOT RESPONDING DURING INIT
WDC failed to respond within a
the test began.
INVALID COMMAND
reasonable
time
DISK=(u,ccc,h,ss) COMMAND ISSUED=xx
Invalid command opcode or out-of-range command
ters.
HARD SEC WRITE
after
parame-
DISK=(u,ccc,h,ss) DR=dr DS=ds OE=oe OS=03
An uncorrectable error odcurred during sector write.
SOFT SEC WRITE
DISK=(u,ccc,h,ss) DR=dr DS=ds OE=oe 08=03
A correctable error occurred during sector write.
HARD SEC READ
DISK:(u,ccc,h,ss) DR=dr DS=ds OE:oe OS=os
An uncorrectable error occurred during sector read.
SOFT SEC READ
DISK=(u,ccc,h,ss)
DR=dr DS:ds OE=oe OS=os
A correctable error occurred during sector read.
COMPARE ERROR DISK::(u,ccc,h,ss) GOOD DATA=gggg BAD=bbbb
A mismatch was found in comparing the "good" buffer
written to the disk with the "bad" buffer read from the
disk.
A-11
Zilog
A-11
HRM
Zilog
HRM
LAP SUMMARY
WDCTST3 tallies a number of statistics whenever a hard or
soft error occurs.
At the end of each test repetition,
these statistics are displayed in tabular form.
The lap
summary table is described under LAP SUMMARY of the WDCCRC
test description.
NOTES
None
A-12
Zilog
A-12
HRM
HRM
Zilog
TEST NAME
WDCTST7 - a comprehensive, multisector,
test of the Winchester disk
write-read-compare
PARAMETERS
disk drive to be tested (default=O)
number of test loops equals the number of iterations per lap
(default= 10)
DESCRIPTION
WDCTST7 exercises the Winchester Disk Controller by doing
large, variable-sized writes and reads to random disk
addresses. The test repeats n times, where n=#REPS in the
test line.
Each test contains the following "loop" iterations:
(1)
Fill segment 1-3 with "AAAA"s.
(2)
Fill a randomly chosen source buffer of
with random data.
(3)
Write the source buffer into a random disk address.
(4)
Read from the disk into a destination file.
(5)
Compare the source and destination buffers.
(6)
Fill the buffers with "AAAA"s.
(7)
Check segments 1-3 for all "AAAA"s to verify that the
disk transfers did not corrupt locations outside the
buffers.
random
length
ERROR MESSAGES
WDCTST7 can issue the following error messages
where:
u
ccc
h
ss
A-13
=
=
=
=
unit number (decimal)
cylinder number (decimal)
head number (decimal)
sector number (decimal)
Zilog
A-13
2ilog
HRM
HRM
contents (hex) of drive ready ,register
contents (hex) of disk status register
contents (hex) of operation error status register
contents (hex) of other status register
value (hex) of command issued to the WDC
number (hex) of words in the random-length buffer written
or read
'
gggg= "good" data (hex) written to the track
bbbb= "bad" data (hex) read from the track
dr =
ds =
oe =
os =
xx =
1111=
DISK NOT RESPONDING DURING INII
WDC failed to respond within a
the test began.
INVALID COMMAND
DISK=(u,ccc,h,ss)
reasonable
time
COMMAND ISSUED=xx
Invalid command opcode or out-of-range command
ters.
HARD WRITE-llll
after
parame-
DISK=(u,ccc,h,ss) DR=dr DS=ds OE=oe OS=os
An uncorrectable error occurred during a random-length
write operation. 1111 is replaced by the number of
words (hex) to be written.
SOFT WRITE-llll DISK=(u,ccc,h,ss) DR=dr DS=ds OE=oe OS=os
A correctable error occurred during
write operation. 1111 is replaced
words (hex) to be written.
SOFT READ-llll
a random-length
by the number of
DISK=(u,ccc,h,ss) DR=dr DS=ds OE=oe OS=os
A correctable error oacurred during a random-length
read operation. 1111 is replaced with the length in
words (hex) of the buffer.
HARD READ-llll
DISK=(u,ccc,h,ss) DR=dr DS=ds OE=oe OS=os
An uncorrectable error occurred during a rand~m-length
operation. 1111 is replaced with the length in words
(hex) of the buffer.
A-14
2ilog
A-14
HRM
Zilog
HRM
COMPARE ERROR DISK=(u,ccc,h,ss) GOOD DATA=gggg BAD=bbbb
A mismatch was found in comparing the "good" buffer
written to the disk with the "bad" buffer read from the
disk.
LAP SUMMARY
WDCTST7 tallies statistics whenever a hard or soft error
occurs.
At the end of each test repetition, the stati3tics
are displayed in 'tab'
form.
Refer to diagnostic test
WDCCRC for a description of the statistical table.
NOTES
WDCTST7 requires four segments of memory.
A-'15
Zilog
A-15
HRM
2ilog
HRM
TEST NAME
WDCMON
PARAMETER:3
None
DESCRIPTION
WDCMON is an interactive monitor for the Winchester Disk
Controller.
The user interacts with the monitor by issuing
commands and parameters in response to the prompt: Command?
In order to run this test, the user must know the following:
(1)
Commands are entered in upper case.
(2)
Numeric parameters are interpreted by the monitor as
decimal, unless the digits are followed by an H (which
indicates a hexadecimal number).
Example:
. (3)
100H
=
256 .
Omitted parameters take on their previous values.
Example:
Command?
READ 1 1000H 100H 0 1 0
Command?
READ
The second READ and the first
mands.
RE~D
are
identical
com-
(4)
A number preceding a command is a repeat factor.
(5)
Commands can be nested within command lines by using
parenthesis.
Each command on a command line must be
parenthesized (unless there is only one command).
Example:
Command?
READ 1 1000H 100H 0 1 0
Command?
10 «READ) (ISEC 1))
The first command reads from cyl:O, head:1,
100H words into segment 1, offset 1000H.
sector:O,
The second command does the following:
A-16
Zilog
A-16
HRM
(6)
Zilog
HRM
a.
Reads 100H words from the disk
memory buffer.
address
into
b.
Increments the sector number by 1
head and cylinder numbers).
c.
Decrements the loop counter (initially 10),
returns to step "a" if it is still positive.
(carrying
the
into
and
If the user forgets the available commands, the command
HELP will display the entire list of commands and
parameters.
ERROR MESSAGES
WDCMON can issue the following error messages
where:
u
ccc
h
ss
dr
ds
oe
os
'xx
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
unit number ( dec imal)
cylinder number (decimal)
head number (decimal)
sector number (decimal)
contents (hex) of drive ready register
contents (hex) of disk status register
contents (hex) of operation error status register
contents (hex) of other status register
value (hl~x) of command issued to the WDC
HARD ERR CMD=xx DISK=(u,ccc,h,ss) DS=ds DR=dr OE=oe OS=os
An uncorrectable error occurred
issued.
SOFT ERR CMD=xx
when
command
xx
was
DISK=(u,ccc,h,ss) DS=ds DR=dr OE=oe OS=os
A correctable
issued.
error
occurred
when
command
xx
was
LAP SUMMARY
WDCMON is an interactive monitor; it does not count laps.
It does, however, maintain a table of statistics, as
described under LAP SUMMARY of the WDCCRC test description.
This table is displayed by entering the REC command (see
below). It is also displayed by entering E in the SADIE·
PAUSE menu.
A-17
Zilog
A-17
HRM
Zilog
HRM
NOTES
WDCMON does not protect the user against commands that will
destroy the memory resident SADIE code, the WDCMON code, the
SADIE test catalog, and the test list catalog. These reside
in segment 0.
COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
The following list of commands are accepted by WDCMON.
Command names are indicated in uppercase letters; parameters
are indicated in lowercase letters.
COMMAND:
BADCYL/BADSEC
Description
BADCYL reads the defect table residing at physical
cylinder 0, and displays a list of bad physical
cylinders.
BADCYL should only be used
with
cylinder-sparing firmware installed on the WDC
board.
BADSEC reads the defect table residing at physical
cylinder 0, and displays a list of bad physical
sectors. BADSEC should only be used with sectorsparing firmware installed on the WDC board. The
Model 21 WDC board has sector-sparing firmware.
Example
BADCYL
COMMAND:
CEC/REC
Description
CEC clears all error counters; REC displ~ys all
error and instruction counters. The counters are
displayed in the format shown under LAP SUMMARY of
the WDCCRC Test Description.
Example
REC
CEC
A-18
Zilog
A-18
Zilog
HRM
COMMAND:
HRM
CEMODE, EXITCE
Description
CEMODE enters Customer Engineer mode.
This disables defect mapping, and subsequent disk accesses
will be to physical, not logical, cylinders.
EXITCE exits Customer Engineer mode, enabling
defect mapping.
Example
CEMODE
EXITCE
COMMAND:
CLC/ILC/RLC
Description
CLC clears the lap counter; ILC increments the lap
counter by 1; and RLC displays the lap counter:
Example
CLC
ILC
RLC
COMMAND:
CMP srcseg srcoff desseg desoff count
Description
This command compares two
word count.
buffers.
Count
is
a
Ex ample
CMP 1 0 2 0 8000H
COMMAND:
DISP dseg doff dlnth
Description
A-19
Zilog
A-19
HRM
Zilog
HRM
DISP displays dlnth words beginning at segment
dseg and offset doff.
Addresses appear at the
left margin of the display. Words are displayed
in hexadecimal.
Ex ampl e
DISP 1 0 100H
COMMAND: DISPRT/ENPRT
Description
DISPRT disables the printing of operational messages from the monitor. ENPRT enables the printing of operational messages from the monitor.
Ex ampl e
DISPRT
COMMAND:
FMT
Description
This command will format the selected drive.
will destroy any data on the medium.
This
Ex ampl e
FMT
COMMAND:
FRD rseg roff cyl head sec
Description
This command is the same as a read, except all
disk format header and crc information is also
transferred. This reads the exact image of a disk
sector
into
the host memory.
This command
transfers only one sector.
Ex ampl e
A-20
Zilog
A-20
Zilog
HRM
°
FRD 2
COMMAND:
'1
HRM
2 14H
HALT/NOHALT
Description
HALT enables all subsequent CMP errors to cause a
halt until a <cr> is entered. NOHALT inhibits CMP
to halt on an error.
Ex ampl e
HALT
NOHALT
COMMAND:
HELP
Description
HELP displays a list of the
parameter's.
WDCMON
commands
and
Ex ampl e
HELP
COMMAND: HOME unit
Description
This command will home the selected
cylinder 0, and clear any drive fault.
drive
to
Example
HOME
°
COMMAND: INHIS/ENAIS
Description
A-21
Zilog
A-21
Zilog
HRM
HRM
INHIS sets the "inhibit implicit seek" bit in each
command to the WDC.
ENAIS clears the "inhibit
implicit seek" bit.
Ex ampl e
INHIS
ENAIS
COMMAND:
INHRTY/ENTRY
Description
INHRTY sets the "inhibit retry flag" in each command to the WDC. ENTRY clears the "inhibit retry
fl ag" . WDC.
Ex ampl e
INHRTY
ENTRY
COMMAND:
ININT/ENINT
Description
ENINT sets the "interrupt enable flag" in each
command to the WDC. ININT clears the interrupt
enable flag.
Example
ENINT
ININT
COMMAND:
I NV N
Description
This command ·forces any value of N as a command to
the WDC. N must be less than 100H.
A-22
Zilog
A-22
HRM
2ilog
HRM
Example
INV 23H
COMMAND:
value
IROFF, IWOFF,
ILNTH,
ICYL,
IHEAD,
ISEC,
IDOFF
Description
These commands are issued in the following format:
Ixxxx value
The seleeted variable is incremented by "value".
Incrementing SEC beyond the maximum number of sectors for the particular disk model causes a carry
over to the head number.
Incrementing HEAD beyond
the maximum number of heads for the particular
disk model causes a carryover into the CYLinder
number. Incrementing ROFF or WOFF beyond FFFH
causes a carryover into RSEG or WSEG.
Example
If the disk model under test is a BASF Drive and
CYL=O HEAD=2 SEC=3, after entering ISEC 1, CYL=O
HEAD=2 SEC=4.
If CYL=O HEAD=2 SEC=23, after
entering ISEC1, CYL=1 HEAD=O SEC=O.
COMMAND:
NULL
Description
NULL
s~nds
a NOP command to the WDC.
Ex ampl e
NULL
COMMAND:
Q, QUIT
Description
QUIT exits WDCMON
A-23
2i10g
A-23
HRM
Zilog
HRM
Ex ample
QUIT
Q
COMMAND:
RAND rndseg rndoff rlnth
Description
This fills rlnth WORDs of memory,
<rndseg>rndoff, with random data.
starting
at
Example
RAND 1 a 8aaaH
COMMAND:
RCYL, RHEAD, RSEC, RALL
Description
RCYL sets CYL=random value from a to the maximum
number of. cylinders for the disk model - 1 ,
inclusive. RHEAD sets HEAD=random value from a to
the maximum number of heads for the disk model 1, inclusive.
RSEC sets SEC=random value from 0
to the maximum number of sectors for the disk
model - 1, inclusive. RALL does RCYL, RHEAD and
RSEC all in one command.
Ex ampl e
RCYL
RHEAD
RSEC
RALL
COMMAND:
RDDT, RBDT
Description
RDDT issues a "read defect table" command to the
WDC. RBDT issues a "rebuild defect table" command
to the WDC.
A-24
Zilog
A-24
Zilog
HRM
HRM
Example
RDDT
RBDT
COMMAND:
READ rseg roff lnth cyl head sec
Description
This command reads (lnth) words of
uni til (uni t)
into memory <rseg>roff.
disk address accessed is cyl-head-sec.
data from
The first
Ex ampl e
READ
COMMAND:
1000H 100H 23 2 20
SEEK cyl
Description
This command does an explicit seek, for
cylinder specified, on the selected unit.
the
Example
SEEK 240
COMMAND:
SETOFF offset
Description
This command sets the strobe offset to
value.
the
given
Ex ampl e
SETOFF
COMMAND:
A-25
SHOFF, SWOFF, SLNTH, SeYL, SHEAD, SSEC,
SUNIT value
Zilog
A-25
HRM
Zilog
HRM
Description
These commands are entered in the
mat: Sxxxx value
following
The selected variable is initialized to the
"value".
forgiven
Example
SROFF 1000H
sets the read offset (roff) to 1000 H.
sets the cylinder to 500.
SCYL 500
COMMAND:
SRSEG, SWSEG segnum
Description
SRSEG sets the read segment number to the given
segment number (segnum).
SWSEG, sets the write
segment number to the given "segnum".
Ex ample
SRSEG 1
SWSEG 3
COMMAND:
STAT
Description
STAT returns the detailed disk
registers.
controller
status
Example
STAT
COMMAND:
WP, UNPROT
unit
Description
WP does a software write protect on the
unit. UNPROT disables the WP command.
A-26
Zilog
selected
A-26
HRM
Zilog
HRM
Example
WP 0
UNPROT
COMMAND:
WRITE wseg woff lnth cyl head sec
Description
This command writes (lnth) data words to the
selected unit from memory <rseg>roff. The disk
address is cyl-head-sec.
Ex ample
WRITE 2 1024 100H 2 0 20
A-27
Zilog
A-27
HRM
Zilog
HRM
INTRODUCTION TO SMD DIAGNOSTICS
There are five diagnostic programs on the SADIE tape that
address the Zilog Storage Module Drive (SMD) controller and
disk:
SMDCRC
a non-destructive, read-only disk test (sometimes referred to as a format-verify test)
SMDFMT
a data-destructive disk formatting program
SMDMEDIA -
a data-destructive disk media test
SMDTEST
two data-destructive random SMD controller tests
SMDMON
a monitor that allows an informed operator to
issue single commands and sequences of commands
to the SMD controller
These five diagnostic programs are explained separately in
the pages that follow this introduction. Since the diagnostics share a common start-up sequence and also share many
error messages, these common items are explained in the
introduction. Also included in the introduction is a brief
outline of the SMD controller-to-host interface.
SMD CONTROLLER-HOST INTERFACE DATA STRUCTURES
The SMD controller has a 16-bit write-only Command Register
and a 16-bit read-only Status Register. They share a common
I/O address. Ending status for typical disk commands issued
in interrupt mode is also reported to the host in the Interrupt Acknowledge Vector. These registers and the Interrupt
Acknowledge Vector have the following fields:
Command Register:
15
CR:
8
CR:CMD
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
A-28
7
6
5
4
3
2
o
+------------------------+--+--+--+--+--+--------+
: DATA (depends on CMD) :INlRIlDIlEIIWKI
CMD
I
+------------------------+--+--+--+--+--+--------+
.
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
No operation
Read Packet Addresses from Dispatch Table
Not defined
Not defined
DATA is Dispatch Table Address 1 . s . byte
middle byte
DATA "
"
"
"
DATA is Dispatch Table Address m. s . byte
Zilog
A-28
HRM
Zilog
CR:WK
CR:EI
CR:DI
CR:RI
CR:IN
CR:DATA
HRM
7 = DATA is Interrupt Vector
WAKEUP controller; service all packets with
Packet Status set to GO
Enable Interrupts (reset by IU of Status
Register)
Disable Interrupts
Reset IP and TU of Status Register
Begin SMD controller initialization and self-test
t- byte of data, whose value is dependent upon the
content~ of CR:CMD
Status Register:
15 14
S R:
1:3
876
5
432
o
+-----+------------------+--+--+--+--+--+--+--+--+
I DRV IES (ending status)IND: 0: 0: 01 OlIPlIUIBZ:
+-----+-_._---------------+--+--+--+--+--+--+--+--+
SR:BZ
SR:IU
SR:IP
SR:ND
Controller buSY servicing CR:CMD
Interrupt Under Service
Interrupt Pending
No Dispatch Table Address or Interrupt Vector
sent to controller after CR:IN
Packet Command ending status after CR:WK, or
controller self-test ending status after CR:IN
For packet command ending status codes, see
description of Packet below.
SR:ES
Self-test ending codes:
8 - 2910 sequencer error
9 = 2901 ALU error
A = controller internal memory error
SR:DRV
Disk Drive number (0 - 3)
Interrupt Acknowledge Vector:
15 1 4
IV:
8
7
o
+-----+------------------+-----------------------+
: DRV IES (ending status):
Interrupt Vector
:
+-----+-_._---------------+-----------------------+
IV:ES
IV:DRV
A-29
1:3
Packet Command ending status after CR:WK
See definition of Packet for description
of packet ending-status codes.
Drive Number
Zilog
A-29
Zilog
HRM
HRM
In addition to these registers, the host communicates with
the controller via a Dispatch Table and Packets (one per
disk unit) in host memory. All disk-control commands and
command-completion reports go through this channel. The
organization of these structures is:
Dispatch Table:
o
15
+------------------------------------------------+
PSO (Drive 0 Packet status)
:
+------------------------------------------------+
DT: + 0:
/
/
/
/
+------------------------------------------------+
PS3 (Drive 3 Packet Status)
:
+------------------------------------------------+
8: PACKET 0 ADDRESS M.S.WORD
:
+------------------------------------------------+
A:
PACKET 0 ADDRESS L.S.WORD
:
+------------------------------------------------+/
/
61
/
/
+------------------------------------------------+
14:
PACKET 3 ADDRESS M.S.WORD
:
+------------------------------------------------+
16:
PACKET 3 ADDRESS L.S.WORD
:
+------------------------------------------------+
DT:F'Sn
Packet Status for packet On:
IDLE (set by host)
1 = GO
(set by host when packet ready to go)
2 = BUSY (set by controller after packet is read)
3 = DONE (set by controller after packet command
is completed)
o =
Packet:
15 14 13 12 11 10
+
0
2
4
6
A-30
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
0
+--------------+--+--+--+-----------------------+
CM: I 0 ---------0 lNRINElNOI PCMD (packet command) :
+--------------+--+--+--+-----+-----------------+
ST:: 0 ------------------------0 lES(ending status):
+-----------------------------+--------+--+--+--+
SB:: 0 -------------------------------- 0 IRZIRTlEC:
+----------+------------+--+--+--+--+--+--+--+--+
DS::
SKE
:
SEL
: x: x I BZ I RO I FT I SE: OC I RY:
+----------+------------+--+--+--+--+--+--+--+--+
Zilog
A-30
HRM
Zilog
8
CT:
A
AH: :
DMA Address Bits 23-16
C
AL: :
DMA Address Bits 15-0
Byte or Sector Count
+--_ .. _---------------~--------------------------+
_------------------------------------------+
:
Unit Number
+--_ .. _------------------------------------------+
I
Cylinder Number
+--_ .. -------------------------------------------+
+--- ..
UN:
10
CY:
12
HD:
14
VS: lFSINW:
16
SC: :
18
OF: : 0 -------------- 0 :SLISEI 0 -- 0
Head Number
I
I
+--+..
_+-------+-----------------------------~---+
: Head Bias and Volume Select
Sector Number
+--+--+-------+------+--+--+--------+--+--+--+--+
-
1F
:
o
NOP
WRAM
5
6
7
· 8
9
A
0:
:
+--_ .. _------------------------------------------+
Name
4
0:
reserved
Opcode
3
:0-:0+:
+--------------------+--+--+--------+--+--+--+--+
CM:PCMD
2
:
+--+ .. _+-------+---------------------------------+
15 14 13 12 11 10
1
:
+--_ .. _------------------------------------------+
E
1A
A-31
HRM
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
Packet Command:
Parameters and Operation
Firmware rev. returned in CT field
Parameters: CT, AH, AL
Write to controller board RAM
RRAM
Parameters: CT, AH, AL
Read controller board RAM
SELECT Parameters: UN
Select drive
PRISEL Parameters: UN
Priority Select (dual-access only)
PRIRELParameters: UN
Release Priority (dual-access only)
RESET
Parameters: UN
Reset Fault on drive
SEEK
Parameters: UN, CY
Seek to specified cylinder (if CY
field = -1, rezeroes drive AND
resets fault)
FMT
Parameters: UN,CT,AH,AL,CY,HD,SC
Format track (host supplies sector
header data in buffer defined by
AH and AL; CT is # sectors))
WLONG
Parameters: UN,CT,AH,AL,CY,HD,SC
Write Long (data plus 4 ECC bytes;
controller does not compute ECC).
WRITE
Parameters: UN,CT,AH,AL,CY,HD,SC
Zilog
A-31
0
HRM
Zilog
C
FRD
D
RLONG
E
READ
F
SIZE
Write data
Parameters: UN,CT,AH,AL,CY,HD,SC
Format Read track (controller reads
and transmits sector IDs; CT is #
sector IDs to read).
Parameters: UN,CT,AH,AL,CY,HD,SC
Read Long (controller reads data
and 4 bytes of ECC)
Parameters: UN,CT,AH,AL,CY,HD,SC
Read data
Parameters: UN
Size Disk if formatted (controller
returns size in CY, HD, SC fields;
returns bad ending status if it
cannot size disk.)
CM:NO
CM:NE
CM:NR
No offsets during retries
No Error Correction
No Retries; Use data in CM:OF for strobe timing
ST:ES
Packet Command Ending Status:
Code
o
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
A-32
HRM
Name and optional description
No Error OR Soft Error
(NOTE: if ES = 0, but any of SB bits
are set, there was a SOFT error; if
ES = 0 and all S8 bits are clear,
NO error occurred.)
Initialization error
Initialization sequence incomplete
Sector Overrun
DMA Error - Memory Parity Error
(NOTE: in case of a DMA Error,
controller does NOT update packet;
only status Register will have
this code in ES field)
Select Error - 0 drives or multiple drives
selected
Byte/Sec Count Error - Odd byte count or
sector count = 0
Dual-Access Busy Err
Rezero error - A rezero did not clear fault
Drive status - One or more bad SMD status
bits in DS
Odd DMA Address
Pack Overflow
Power Fail Detected
Invalid Packet Command - CM:PCMD invalid
Hard Data Error - Data error was unrecovered
Zilog
A-32
HRM
Zilog
14
15
HRM
(NOTE: error is not necessarily
unrecoverable. If retries and error
correction is disabled, the error
may be recoverable.)
Sector Not Found
Write Protect Violation
SMD Timeout errors:
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
Timeout
Timeout
Timeout
Timeout
Timeout
Timeout
Timeout
Timeout
Timeout
-
Controller timeout in idle loop
waiting for IP & IUS to clear
waiting for DMA complete
waiting for On-cylinder
waiting for Servo clock
waiting for Data clock
waiting for Sector/index mark
waiting for ID sync
waiting for Data sync
SB:EC
SB:RT
SB:: RZ
Error Correction attempted
Retry attempted
Rezero was required to clear a fault
DS:RY
DS:OC
DS::SE
DS:FT
DS:RO
DS:BZ
DS:SEL
DS:SKE
Selected drive ready
Selected drive on cylinder
Selected drive seek error
Selected drive fault
Selected drive read only
Selected dr~ve busy (dual-access only)
Selected ports (port 0 = l.s.bif)
Ports with seek complete (port 0 = l.s.bit)
VS':
Volume Select for multi-volume drives (NOT
supported by SADIE"diagnostics; this field
should always be 0)
OF:O+
OF:OOF:SE
OF:SL
Servo Offset Plus ( only used if CM:NR set)
)
Servo Offset Minus (
"
"
)
Data Strobe Early (
"
"
)
(
Data Str'obe Late
"
"
INITIALIZING THE CONTROLLER
At power-up, the SMD controller sets SR:NDT. This indicates
the controller has not been initialized. SR:NDT will remain
on until the following initialization sequence is completed:
1)
A-33
Host sends CR:IN, then polls SR until SR:BZ is cleared.
When SR:BZ is clear, Host checks SR:ES for self-test
errors. If SR:BZ never clears, the Controller failed
the self test.
Zilog
A-33
HRM
Zilog
HRM
2)
Host initializes the Dispatch Table with the addresses
of the packets for each drive. It also sets all packet
status (PSG to PS3) fields to IDLE. It is recommended
that the packets are also initialized to zeroes.
3)
Host sends each of the following commands,
until SR:BZ clears after each command:
4)
polling
a)
CR:CMD = 4 and CR:DATA
Table (DT) address
b)
CR:CMD
c)
CR:CMD = 6 and CR:DATA = m. s . byte of DT address
d)
CR:CMD = 7 and CR:DATA = interrupt vector (NOTE:
this must be done even if interrupt mode is not
used! )
=
l.s.byte
of
Dispatch
5 and CR:DATA = middle byte of DT address
Host sends CR:CMD
clears.
=
1,
then
polls
SR
until
SR:NDT
ISSUING PACKET COMMANDS
After the controller is initialized, it is ready to recetve
packet commands.
All disk-control operations are packet
commands~
Packet commands may be issued in either polled
mode or interrupt mode. The programming sequence for packet
commands is:
1)
Host sets up one or more packets with the appropriate
packet command opcode in CM:PCMD and sets all applicable parameter fields. Bits which modify the behavior
of the controller on error conditions (such as CM:NR,
CM:NO, CM:NE and OF: bits) may also be set or cleared.
2)
Host sets the PS field of each packet set up in step
to GO.
3)
Host sends CR:WK with CR:EI optionally set.
If CR:EI
is set, the controller will interrupt at completion of
each packet command.
4)
The Controller reads all packets with DT:PS set to GO,
and sets the DT:PS field for each such packet to BUSY.
5)
The Controller initiates seeks on drives with packet
commands requlrlng a seek. When seek is complete, or
if no seek was required, the command is performed and
A-34
Zilog
A-34
HRM
2ilog
HRM
the Controller updates the packet with completion
status. ST, SB and DS fields are always updated unless
there is a DMA Error. Other packet fields are also
updated by the Controller for some packet commands.
The DT:PS field for the completed packet is set to
DONE.
NOTE
If a DMA error occurs, the packet and packet
status fields in the dispatch table are not
updated. The status Register ES field must be
tested by the Host after each command.
6)
SR:IP is posted by the Controller. Host may be waiting
for SR:IP (polled mode) or waiting for an interrupt if
CR:EI was set in step 3.
7)
Host reads SR, then issues CR:RI to reset SR:IP and
SR:IU.
This must be done in polled mode as well as
interrupt mode. The Controller may post IP again as
soon as CR:RI is sent. If more than one packet was set
up before CR:WK was sent, the completed packet is
determined by looking for a DT:PS field set to DONE.
The host sets this field to IDLE, and the packet command cycle is complete.
SMD DIAGNOSTIC START-UP SEQUENCE
All SMD diagnostics have a similar start-up procedure.
Errors encountered during this sequence will cause the diagnostic to
display an error message and abort.
The
sequence is:
1)
Initialize the SMD controller. See the earlier section
that describes this process.
For any errors during
this process, the diagnostic displays a message and
aborts with a· "missing device" status.
2)
The SELECT packet command is issued to the disk drive
to be tested.
If no drive is selected or multiple
drives are selected, a message is displayed an the
diagnostic abe>rts with a "missing device" status;
3)
The SIZE packet command is issued to the disk drive to
be tested.
If this dommand fails, the diagnostic
displays a message and aborts with a "test aborted"
status.
A-35
2ilog
A-35
HRM
4)
Zilog
HRM
The SEEK packet command is issued with CY = -1.
This
forces the disk drive to rezero and clears any drive
fault. This step prevents spurious soft rezero errors
during the first packet command issued by diagnostics.
NOTE
SMDMON is a special trouble-shooting diagnostic.
It does not abort if an error occurs during the
start-up procedure.
It assumes that all disk
drives will be tested, and it attempts to SELECT
and SIZE all four possible SMD drives.
It does
not issue the SEEK command.
SMD DIAGNOSTIC ERROR MESSAGES
During the start-up procedure SMD diagnostics
and log the following error messages:
NO RESPONSE to controller command, SMD CMD
may
=
display
xxxx
SMD controller did not respond to a command in the
initialization sequence.
The commanrl written to
the SMD controller Command Register replaces xxx x
(hexadecimal) .
During controller initialization, commands are
written to the controller ·command regi.ster, and
the ~tatus register is polled until.the command is
complete. If the status register contains "FFFF",
the controller is not responding to the command.
This usually indicates that there is no controller
board or the board is not seated properly.
TIMEOUT waiting for Controller Not Busy, SMD CMD
=
xxxx
SMD controller did not complete a command in a
reasonable time. The command was issued in polled
mode. The command written to the SMD controller
command register replaces xxxx (hexadecimal).
TIMEOUT waiting for SMD interrupt, Packet cmd
=
cc
A command was issued in interrupt mode, but no
interrupt occurred within a reasonable time. During the initialization sequence, the SELECT, SJZE
and SEEK commands are issued in interrupt moae.
The opcode of the packet command issued replaoes
cc (hexadecimal).
The opcodes of these packet
commands are:
A-36
Zilog
A-36
HRM
Zilog
SELECT
SIZE
SEEK
HRM
03
OF
07
SELECT ERROR -- assume no driven uu
An error occurred when the SELECT command was
issued to the disk unit to be tested. uu is
replaced by the disk unit number (decimal).
This
error may occur if no disk drives are selected or
if multiple drives are selected. This message is
also displayed if the SMD controller times out
after the SELECT packet command is issued.
DISK SIZING ERROR -- assume driven uu not formatted
The SMD controller could not size the drive, indicating that the disk was probably not f?rmatted.
The disk unit to be tested replaces uu (decimal).
This error may occur if the disk was never formatted or if one or more sector headers have been
destroyed after the disk was formatted. This message is also displayed if the SMD controller times
out after the SIZE packet command is issued.
After the start-up procedure, the following messages' may
appear if the SMD Controller does not respond within a reasonable time after the diagnostic issues a packet command:
NO RESPONSE to controller command, SMD CMD
=
xxxx
SMD Controller did not respond to a command.
The
command written to the Command Register replaces
"xxxx" (hexadecimal).
NOTE
This message appears only if
with interrupts disabled.
commands in p10lled mode.
a command is sent
Only SMDMON can send
TIMEOUT waiting for Controller Not Busy, SMD CMD = xxxx
SMD controller did not complete a command in a
reasonable time. The command was issued in polled
mode. The command written to the SMD controller
Command Register replaces "xxxx" (hexadecimal).
A-37
Zilog
A-37
HRM
2ilog
HRM
NOTE
This message appears only if
with interrupts disabled.
commcinds in polled mode.
a command is sent
Only SMDMON can send
TIMEOUT waiting for SMD interrupt, Packet cmd
=
cc
A WAKEUP command was issued with interrupts
enabled, but no interrupt occurred within a reasonable time. The opcode of the packet command
issued replaces "cc" (hexadecimal).
After the start-up procedure, diagnostics will display error
messages if the SMD Controller returns ending-status (ES),
status-bits (SB) or Drive-Status (DS) fields indicating an
error occurred during command execution. These messages
have the following three fields:
1)
Error Description Field - this field explains the ending status (ES) code returned as well as any other
applicable error bits in DS and SB.
2)
Operation Field - this field explains what type
operation was being done when the error occurred.
3)
Disk Address Field - this field shows what disk address
was being accessed when the error occurred. When a
multi-sector transfer command is given to the controller, the Disk Address Field shows the START sector
addrE~ss .
of
NOTE
The error may have occurred in a sector other than
the start sector.
The following tables show what values may appear in the
Error Description Field and the Disk Address Field. The
contents of the Operation Field vary from diagnostic to
diagnostic and are shown in the documentation for each diagnostic.
A-38
Zilog
A-38
HRM
Zilog
HRM
ERROR DESCRIPTION FIELD
Field Contents
Ex pI anat ion
Soft Error, SB=x
ES = 0 and one or more bits in SB
is set; the low-order nibble of SB
replaces "x" (hexadecimal).
bit 0 = error correct.
bit 1 = retries att.
bit 2 = rezero req'd.
Initialization Error
Sector Overrun
DMA Error @ <sss>oooo
Select Error
Byte/Sec Count Error
Re zero Error
Odd DMA Address
Drive Status, DS=xxxx
ES = 1
ES :: 2
ES = 3; The segment and offset
where the memory buffer began
replace "sss" (decimal) and
"00'00" (hex adec ima I), re s pectively.
ES :: 4
ES :: 5
ES = 6
ES = 7
ES :: 8; DS replaces "xxxx"
(hexadecimal).
bit 0 = drive ready
bit 1 = on cylinder
bit 2 = seek error
bit 3 :: drive fault
bit 4 = read only
bit 5 = dual-ace. drive busy
bits 8-11 :: ports selected
bits 12-15 :: ports w/ seek end
Pack Overflow
Power Fail Detected
Inv Pkt Cmd, CMD=xx
Hard Data Error, SB=x
Sector Not Found
Write Protect Viol.
Timeout, ES=dd
Unknown, ES=xx
A-39
ES = 10
ES = 11
ES = 12; the packet command opcode
replaces "xx" (hexadecimal).
ES = 13; the low nibble of SB
replaces "x" (hexadecimal). See
Soft Error above for bit definitions.
ES = 14
ES = 15
ES is 32-40; The actual ending status
code. replaces "dd" (decimal).
ES is non-zero, but not one of the
defined ending-status codes. The
Zilog
A-39
HRM
Zilog
HRM
ending status code replaces "xx"
(hexadecimal) .
DISK ADDRESS FIELD
Message
Ex pI ana t ion
DISK=(u,cccc,hh,ss)
u = disk unit number
c c c c = c y1 in de r n urn be r
hh = head number
ss = sector number
(decimal)
(
"
)
(")
(")
SMD DIAGNOSTIC LAP SUMMARY
At the conclusion of each repetition (lap) of a diagnostic,
a table is displayed summarizing the numbers of packet commands anrl command errors. The rap summary is cumulative" for
all laps"
It shows:
~.
The test name
G
The disk unit# under test
~
The lap count
~
The total number of errors of all kinds
~
The number of times each
including:
packet
command
was
issued,
o TOTAL = total packet commands issued
o nop = Nap commands
o wram = WRAM commands
o rram = RRAM commands
o sel = SELECT commands
o pri = PRISEL commands
o reI = PRIREL commands
o rst = RESET commands
o seek = SEEK commands
o fmt = FMT commands
owIng = WLONG commands
o wri = WRITE commands
o frd = FRD commands
a rIng = RLONG commands
A-40
Zilog
A-40
HRM
Zilog
HRM
o read = READ commands
o size = SIZE commands
o inv = "i.nvalid" packet commands
NOTE
Only SMDMON Ccln issue invalid commands through the
DOPKT command.
These commands are tallied as
invalid, even though they may be valid commands.
Tallies of ~ll soft errors reported by the SMD controller after execution of a packet command, including:
o
o
o
o
TOTAL = the number of times one or more error
status bits (SB) were returned, but the ending status
(ES) indicated no uncorrectable errors occurred.
rty = soft errors with retries attempted
corr = soft errors with correction attempted
rz = soft errors with a disk rezero attempted
Tallies of all uncorrected (hard) data errors reported
by the SMD controller after execution of a packet command, including:
o
o
o
o
TOTAL = the number of times a hard data error was
returned in the ending status
rty = hard data errors with retries attempted
corr = hard data errors with correction attempted
rz = hard data errors with a disk rezero attempted
Tallies of drive errors encountered during execution of
packet commands, including:
o
o
o
o
o
o
TOTAL = the number of times one or more drive errors
occurred during execution of a packet command
df = drive faults
se = drive seek errors
noc = drive not-on-cylinder errors
nrdy = drive not ready errors
busy = dual-access busy errors
Tallies of all SMD controller timeout
packet command execution, including:
o
o
o
A- !l1
errors
during
TOTAL = the total number of timeout errors
idle = timeouts in the controller's idle loop
ius = timeouts waiting for IP/IUS to clear
Zilog
A-41
HRM
Zilog
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
HRM
dma = timeouts waiting for DMA complete
oc = timeouts waiting for drive on cylinder
sclk = timeouts waiting for Servo clock
dclk = timeouts waiting for Data clock
mark = timeouts waiting for Sector/index mark
isnc = timeouts waiting for ID sync
dsnc = timeouts waiting for Data sync
Tallies of other packet command errors, including:
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
G
Tallies of errors detected by the
ing:
o
o
o
o
o
o
A-42
TOTAL = number of other packet command errors
init = initialization errors (SMD controller reports
it does not have complete Dispatch Table
address and/or Interrupt vector.)
so = sector overruns
me = memory parity errors
sel = select errors (0 or multiple drives)
ct = byte/sector Count errors
rze = rezero errors (rezero did not clear a fault)
ae = address errors (odd address parameter)
ofl = pack overflows
pf = power-fail detected
snf = sector not found errors
wpv = write Protect violations
inv = invalid Packet commands "reported by SMD cont~oller
unk = unknown ending status code returned by SMD
controller
diagnostic,
includ-
TOTAL = number of diagnostic detected errors
cmp = compare errors encountered by the diagnostic
when comparing two buffers
htrk = the number of tracks with more than one hard
defect (only SMDFMT will report this)
strk = the number of tracks with soft defects that
cannot be flagged as bad, because there are
multiple soft defects or there is a hard defect
that must be flagged as bad (only SMDFMT will
report this)
resp = SMD controller not responding errors (polled mode
commands only)
sto = SMD controller timeout -- controller did not
interrupt within expected time (polled or interrupt
mode)
2ilog
A-42
HRM
Zi10g
HRM
TEST NAME:
SMDCRC - a non-destructive,
tracks on a SMD disk.
read-only
test
of
all
PARAMETERS:
Parameter 1 = disk unit to be tested (Default:
Th era ng e 0 f val i dun i t n urn be r sis 0 - 3.
unit
=
0) •
DESCRIPTION:
Before the read test begins, SMDCRC goes through the
start-up sequence described in the INTRODUCTION TO SMD
DIAGNOSTICS. Any errors during that procedure cause
SMDCRC to abort the test.
For each repetition, SMDCRC reads the entire disk track
by track.
All READ packet commands are issued in
interrupt mode. For each error encountered, an error
message is displayed and logged to SADIE, and error
status bits are tallied. At the end of each repetition
of the test, SMDCRC displays a lap summary table, which
shows a cumulative tally of error status bits and
packet commands issued to the SMD controller.
SMDCRC repeats the read test n times, where n is the
value in the #REPS field of the test line. If REPS=O,
SMDCRC repeats until the user aborts the test.
ERROR MESSAGES:
SMDCRC displays error messages
with
the
format
described in the INTRODUCTION TO SMD DIAGNOSTICS. During the read test, the possible contents of the Operation Field of error messages is: READING TRACK.
NOTE
SMDCRC reads entire tracks. The disk address in
an error message is the address of the first sector on the track where the error occurred.
The
error may have occurred on any sector on that
track.
A-43
Zilog
A-43
HRM
Zilog
HRM
LAP SUMMARY:
SMDCRC displays a cumulative tally of packet commands
and errors at the completion of each repetition of the
read test. See the INTRODUCTION TO SMD DIAGNOSTICS for
a complete description of the lap summary table.
A-44
Zilog
A-44
HRM
Zilog
HRM
TEST NAME:
SMDFMT - a utility that formats the SMD disk drive
Bad sectors are
after extensive surface analysis.
flagged and will be ignored during subsequent writes
and reads.
PARAMETERS:
Parameter 1 = disk unit to be analyzed and formatted
(Default: unit = 0). The range of units is 0 - 3.
Parameter 2 = number of scans of the disk during surface analysis (Default: scans = 1). The range of scans
is the positive integers.
Parameter 3 = interactive mode.
If interact = 0,
SMDFMT attempts to find the SMD disk size using an
algorithm similar to the one the SMD controller uses in
the SIZE command.
If interact i 0, SMDFMT polls the
user for the disk size.
DESCRIPTION:
SMDFMT goes through most of the standard start-up procedure described in the INTRODUCTION TO SMD DIAGNOSTICS. However, since its purpose is to format a drive,
it does not issue the SIZE packet command. It also
omits the SEEK to CY = -1 step of the start-up procedure.
If interact = 0, SMDFMT will then do some investigation
to find the numbers of cylinders, heads and sectorsper-track present on the drive.
The results of its
investigation are displayed before formatting commences. For the Model 31 80 Megabyte drives, the
correct numbers are:
#
#
#
#
cylinders = 589
heads = 7
total sectors/track = 33
active sectors/track = 32
If interact i 0, SMDFMT prompts the user for the disk
size parameters.
Once the disk size is known, SMDFMT
will format the disk. The disk will initially be formatted with no sectors flagged as bad or spare (i.e.
all sectors will be formatted as active sectors).
A-45
Zilog
A-45
HRM
Z1log
HRM
If the initial disk format succeeds, SMDFMT will do
track-by-track surface analysis on the disk to discover
those sectors with media errors. The first step in the
analysis makes certain that the sector headers are
readable. The sector IDs of all sectors on the track
are read and compared with the data that should be in
each field. This read-and-compare test repeats the
number of times given by Parameter 2. The second step
makes certain that the data fields of the sectors are
good.
For this test, six patterns are used: 'AAAA',
'5555', 'FFFF' '6DB', 'DB6', and 'B6D'.
Each pattern
is written to the track, then read a number of times.
Parameter 2 determines the number of reads per pattern.
Any error during track writes and reads cause SMDFMT to
do writes and reads to each individual sector on the
track.
During surface analysis, SMDFMT keeps track of all sectors
with
hard and soft errors.
After surface
analysis, SMDFMT reformats the disk, flagging the bad
sectors.
During the reformat step, each track has one
sector flagged as either bad or spare, with all other
sectors being active.
If there is an uncorrectable
(hard) error in the header or data portion of a single
sector on the track, that sector is flagged as bad and
all others are active. If there are correctable (soft)
errors on one .or more sectors on the track, and no sectors with hard errors, one of the sectors with a soft
defect is flagged as bad and all others are active.
If
there are no defects on any sectors. on a track,
all
sectors are active except the last, which is flagged as
a spa;re.
If a track has more than one sector with hard error(s) 1
the track, and in fact the entire disk, is unusable. A
message will appear at the conclusion of SMDFMT if this
happens.
After the disk is reformatted, SMDFMT will display a
lap summary table.
The entire format sequence will
repeat n times, wher~ n is the value in the HREPS field
on the SADIE test line. If HREPS = 0, SMDFMT will
repeat the format sequence until the user aborts the
diagnostic.
A-46
Zilog
A-46
HRM
2ilog
HRM
ERROR MESSAGES:
SMDFMT displays and logs error messages with the format
described in the INTRODUCTION TO SMD DIAGNOSTICS. The
possible contents of the Operation Field of error messages are described in the following table:
OPERATION FIELD
Field Contents
Explanation
WRITE FORMAT
REWRITE FORMAT
The error occurred writing the
sector headers for a full track
with the FMT packet command.
SMDFMT rezeroes the drive and
retries the format if it gets
an error status the first time.
READ TRACK IDS
READ SECTOR ID
The diagnostic was reading the
sector headers for a full track
or a single sector with the FRD
packet command. SMDFMT first
tries to FRD an entire track.
If it gets a bad ending status,
it tries FRD sector by sector.
WRITE TRACK-xxxx
WRITE SEC-xxxx
READ TRACK-xxx>c
READ SEC-xxxx
The diagnostic was writing or
a full track or a single
sector. The pattern being written
replaces xxxx (hexadecimal). The
diagnostic will try to write and
read tracks unless an error occurs.
When an error occurs, it will try
to pinpoint bad sector(s) by writing/
reading single sectors.
re~ding
SMDFMT also displays and logs the following error messages:
COMPARE ERROR IN SECTOR ID
DISK:u,cccc,hh,ss
The sector header for the disk address given did
not contain the correct data in the cylinder, head
and sector fields.
This
is
considered
an
uncorrectable error in the sector. "u", "cccc",
"hh" and "'ss" replace the disk unit, cylinder,
head and sector numbers where the compare error
occurred.
A-47
2ilog
A-47
HRM
2ilog
HRM
UNMAPPED SOFT ERROR(S) ON CYL# cccc, HEAD# hh
The diagnostic can flag only one sector on a track
as bad. The presence of more than one soft error
or one hard error and one or more soft errors
means that one or more of the soft defects can not
be flagged.
This is not a fatal error, but
unmapped soft defects may degrade system performance.
BAD TRACK--MORE THAN 1 HARD ERROR ON CYL# cccc, HEAD# hh
The diagnostic can only flag one sector on a track
as bad~ The presence of more than one hard error
means that the track is bad, and hence the disk is
bad.
The cylinder and head numbers of the bad
t r ac k rep 1 ace "c c c c " and "h h" (d e c im a 1) .
LAP SUMMARY:
At the conclusion of the re-format step, SMDFMT is finished formatting the disk.
It displays the lap summary
table of commands and errors described in the INTRODUCTION TO SMD DIAGNOSTICS before exiting or repeating the
format sequence.
SMDFMT follows the lap summary table with a list of all
defects. For each defect the cylinder, head and sector
numbers are given as well as the severity (SOFT or
HARD) and whether the defect was mapped or unmapped.
NOTES:
SMDFMT does extensive surface analysis in an attempt to
find all defects on the disk. This analysis takes
time, and the time depends upon the number of scans
indicated by Parameter 2. It is recommended that the
number of scans be at least two.
SMDFMT will take
apprOXimately 2 hours to format an 80 Megabyte drive
with 2 scans.
A-48
2ilog
A-48
Zilog
HRH
HRM
TEST NAME:
SMDMEDIA - a thorough write-read-compare
drive, using various data patterns.
test
of
a
PARAMETERS:
Parameter 1 = the disk unit to be tested (Default: unit
= 0). Th era n ge 0 fun i t n urn be r s are
3.
°-
Parameter 2 indicates whether the test should compare
source and destination buffers after write and read.
If compare = 0, the compare step is skipped.
Otherwise, the compare is done. With the compare step, the
test is more thorough, but it takes considerably more
time to execute. (Defaul t: compare = 1)
Parameter 3 indicates whether the test should use all
data patterns or only the worst-case data pattern. If
allpat = 0, only the worst-case pattern ('B6D') is
used.
Otherwise, all patterns ('AAAA',
'FFFF' and
'B6D') are used. (Default: allpat = 1)
DESCRIPTION:
SMDMEDIA begins with the start-up procedure described
in the INTRODUCTION TO SMD DIAGNOSTICS. Any errors
during the start-up procedure cause SMDMEDIA to abort
the test.
During each repetition of the media test, the following
steps are done for each data pattern to be used:
1)
A source buffer the size of a full track is filled
with the data pattern.
2)
For every track on the medium:
a)
The source buffer is written to the track.
b)
The track is read into a destination buffer.
c)
The source and destination buffers
pared.
are
com-
SMDMEDIA repeats the media test n times, where n is the
value in the HREPS field in the SADIE test line. If
#REPS=O, SMDMEDIA repeats until the user aborts the
test.
A-49
Zilog
A-49
HRM
Zilog
HRM
ERROR MESSJlGES:
SMDMEDIA displays and logs error messages with the format described in the INTRODUCTION TO SMD DIAGNOSTICS.
The possible contents of the Operation Field are:
OPERATION FIELD
Field Contents
Explanation
WRITE TRK,xxxx
Error occurred while writing
a track. The data pattern written
replaces "xxxx" (hexadecimal).
READ IRK, xxxx
Error occurred while reading
a track. The data pattern
l"ead replaces "xxxx" (hexadecimal).
SMDMEDIA will also display the following message:
COMPARE WR:<ws>woff:wd RD:<rs>roff:rd DISK:u,cccc,hh,ss
A mismatch was found between a buffer written and
a buffer read from the same disk a~dress. The
mismatch was found at t~e write and read .buffer
addresses given by "ws", . "woff" (write segment
(decimal) and offset (hex» and "rs", "roff" (read
segment and offset).
The data written replaces
"'wd" (hexadecimal).
The mismatch.ing data read
t'eplaces "rdu (also hexadecimal).
LAP SUMMARY:
At the conclusion of each complete repetition of
SMDMEDIA, a lap summary table is displayed. This table
is described in the INTRODUCTION TO SMD DIAGNOSTICS.
A-50
Zilog
A-50
Zilog
HRM
TEST
HRM
NAME:
SMDTEST
two write-read-compare tests of
random
single-sector disk accesses and random-length disk
transfers.
PARAMETERS:
Parameter 1 = disk unit to be tested (Default:
The range of valid unit numbers is 0 - 3.
0).
unit
=
Parameter 2 = test to be performed. (Default: testnum
1).
If testnum = 1, the random single-sector seek
test is done. If testnum = 2, the random-length disk
transfer test is done.
=
DESCRIPTION:
Before the test begins, SMDTEST goes through the
start-up sequence described in the INTRODUCTION TO SMD
DIAGNOSTICS. Any errors during that procedure cause
SMDTEST to abort.
SMDTEST is actually a pair of random tests. Which test
is performed during any invocation of SMDTEST depends
upon the value of P?rameter 2.
TEST 1:
The single-sector ~est is a good test of random seeks.
Initially, a queue is formed of 128 elements. Each
element is initialized to a random,· unique
disk"
address.
Associated with each queue element is a
unique source buffer and a unique destination buffer.
The source buffers are initialized with random data.
Each lap proceeds as follows:
])
For each of the 128 queue elements, the source
buffer for that element is written to the disk
address. This is a single-sector write.
2)
For each of the 128 queue elements:
a)
the sector address is read into the destination buffer associated with that queue element~
A-51
Zilog
A-51
HRM
2ilog
HRM
b)
the source and destination buffers
pared.
are
c)
the queue element is re-randomized, and the
new disk address is compared with all other
addresses in the queue for uniqueness.
d)
the source buffer is filled with
data.
new
com-
random
TEST 2:
The random-length transfer test tests random-length
writes and reads.
In this test, the source and destin~tion buffer addresses are random, and the buffers may
cross segment boundaries (not allowed in the singlesector test). The buffer sizes are random.
During initialization of the random-length transfer
test, segments 1 - 3 are filled with a background pattern ('AAAA'). For each lap, there are 64 repetitions
of the following:
1)
A randomly chosen source'
random
.3.
data.
Th~
buffer is filled wi th
buffer must be in segments 1 -
2)
The source buffer is
address.
written
to
a
random
disk
3)
The disk address is read into a random destination
buffer.
The destination buffer must be in segments 1 - 3.
4)
The source and destination buffers are compared.
5)
The source and destination buffers are filled with
background data.
Then the entire background is
checked to be sure there has been no corruption of
memory outside of the source and destination
buffers.
SMDTEST repeats test 1 or test 2 n times, where n is
the value in the HREPS field of the SADIE test line.
If HREPS = 0, SMDTEST repeats the test until the user
aborts it.
SMDTEST always begins with the same random-number seed
rat each invocation, but it does not reset the seed
between laps. Therefore, running SMDTEST 100 times is
not the same as running SMDTEST with HREPS = 100.
A-52
Zilog
A-52
Zilog
HRM
HRM
ERROR MESSAGES:
SMDTEST displays and logs error messages with the format described in the INTRODUCTION TO SMD DIAGNOSTICS.
The possible contents of the Operation Field are:
OPERATION FIELD
Field Contents
Explanation
WRITE SECTOR
The diagnostic was writing
a single sector in test 1.
READ SECTOR
The diagnostic was reading
a single sector in test 1.
WRITE xxxx BYTES
The diagnostic was writing
a random-length buffer in
t est 2. Th e 1 eng t h in by t e s
replaces "xxxx" (hexadecimal).
READ xxxx BYTES
The diagnostic was reading
a random-length buffer in
t est 2. Th e 1 eng t h in b yt e s
replaces "xxxx" (hexadecimal).
SMDTEST will also display the following messages:
CMP ERR IN BUFFERS: SRC<ss>soff=sd DST<ds>doff=dd
ORIG BUFS: WR<ws>woff RD<rd>roff L=llll DISK:u,cccc,hh,ss
A mismatch was found comparing the buffer written
to the buffer read. The addresses and data where
the data mismatch occurred are given by SRC and
DST.
The address and data in the write buffer
where the mismatch occurred replace "ssft (segment,
decimal), "soff" (offset, hex) and "sd" (data,
hex). The address and data in the read buffer
where the mismatch was found replace "ds" (segment, decimal), "doff" (offset, hex) and "dd"
(data, hex).
Similarly, the beginning addresses
of the write and read buffers are given by' the
values following WR and RD. The buffer length in
bytes replaces "1111" (hexadecimal).
A-53
Zilog
A-53
HRM
Zilog
HRM
CMP ERR IN BACKGR: SRC<ss>soff=sd DST<ds)doff=dd
ORIG BUFS: WR<ws>woff RD<rd>roff L=llll DISK=u,cccc,hh,3s
A mismatch was found in the background (all memory
locations outside the write and read buffers are
the background). The data given in this message
ls the same as that described for the compare
errors within the read and write buffers (see
above). Only test 2 does a background check after
a write and read.
LAP SUMMARY::
At the end of each complete lap of SMDTEST, a table of
command and error statistics is displayed. This lap
summary table is described in the INTRODUCTION TO SMD
DIAGNOSTICS.
A-54
Zilog
A-54
Zilog
HRM
HRM
TEST NAME:
SMDMON - an interactive monitor for the storage
Drive (SMD) Controller.
Module
PARAMETERS:
SMDMON has no parameters.
DESCRIPTION:
SMDMON is a diagnostic tool useful for troubleshooting
and executing custom tests. For maximum utility, it
requires knowledge of the host interface. Refer to the
INTRODUCTION TO SMD DIAGNOSTICS for a brief description
of the SMD Controller interface. More detailed information is included in Section 5.
The user interacts with SMDMON by entering command
lines into the console keyboard. SMDMON interprets and
executes commands. SMDMON takes care of setting up
packets, issuing WAKEUP, waiting for command completion
and error handling.
SMDMON begins with a start-up sequence similar but not
identical to the other diagnostics. The differences
are:
1)
SMDMON issues a warning, but does not abort if
error occurs during the start-up seqeunce.
2)
SMDMON is based on the use of four disk units.
Therefore, it issues the SELECT and SIZE commands
to all four units and keeps a table of the drive
size parameters for all four· units.
3)
SMDMON does not issue the SEEK to CY
drives during start-up.
= -1
to
an
any
After SMDMON has gone through its start-up procedure,
it prompts with: Command?
SMDMON accepts and executes
command lines until the user enters the QUIT command. A
HELP command is included, which displays the command
names and parameters.
To enter command lines to SMDMON, the
the following:
A-55
Zilog
user
must
know
A-55
Zilog
HRM
HRM
1)
Command names are entered in upper case.
2)
Repeat factors and numeric parameters are interpreted by SMDMON as decimal unless the digits are
followed by an H, which indicates the number
should be interpreted as a hexadecimal number.
Ex ampl e:
a) 256 is interpreted as 256 decimal.
b)
100H is interpreted as 100 hexadecimal, which i
equivalent to 256 decimal.
3)
A simple command is defined as a command name followed
by
zero
or more numeric parameters,
separated by blanks. (Command names and parameters
are
defined under COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
below) .
Ex ampl e:
4)
The
a)
b)
c)
d)
following are s im pI e command s :
EINT
SUNIT 1
RD 1 0 512 400 3 27
WR 2 0 512 400 3 27
A complex command is one of the following:
A)
An optional repeat factor followed by a
ple command
B)
An optional repeat factor
parenthesized complex command
C)
A parenthesized complex command followed by
any number of parenthesized complex commands
followe~
simby
a
Ex ampl e:
All of the following are complex commands:
(Note: (a) and (b) are also simple commands!)
a) DINT
b) RD 1 0 1024 400 3 27
c)
10 RD 1 0 1024 400 3 27
d)
(WR 2 0 512 400 3 27)(RD 1 0 512 400 3 27)
e)
10((WR 2 0 512)(RD 1 0 512)(CMP 2 0 1 0 512)
(ISEC 1»
5)
A-56
A command line is a simple or complex command followed by a carriage return.
It can include up to
127 characters.
A-56
.HRM
Zilog
6)
7)
HRM
Unless other-wise specified in
the
COMMAND
DESCRIPTION section below, all parameters are
optional.
Omitted parameters take on their previous values.
Most parameters have default values, shown in the
COMMAND DESCRIPTION section.
Example:
Command?
RD 1 0
Command?
RD
512
400
3
27
The first RD (read) command reads 512 bytes,
beginning at disk cylinder 400, head 3, sector 27
into memory segment 1, offset O.
The second RD
command does the same thing, because the omitted
parameters have the previous values.
8)
In some commands SMDMON checks for boundary conditions.
Commands that increment the disk address
(ICYL, IHEAD, ISEC) or the memory address (IROFF,
IWOFF) check for overflows of the disk pack and
available memory. If the increment would cause
overflow, a warning message appears and the command is ignored.
9)
SMDMON does not, in general protect the user from
commands that could be destructive. For example,
SMDMON allows the SMD controller to do a DMA
transfer into segment O. This can to cause SMDMON
or SADIE to be overwritten.
j
ERROR MESSAGES
SMDMON displays and logs error messages with the format
described in the INTRODUCTION TO SMD DIAGNOSTICS. The
Operation Field of packet command error messages shows
the packet command opcode (CM:CMD) in hexadecimal.
SMDMON can also display and log the following message:
COMPARE WR:<ws>woff:wd RD:<rs>roff:rd DISK:u,cccc,hh,ss
A mismatch occured comparing two buffers. The
buffers are called the write and read buffers,
because that is what is typically being compared.
The addresses and data where the mismatch occurred
replace WS, woff, wd (write segment, offset and
data) and rs, roff, rd (read segment, offset and
A-57
Zilog
A-57
2ilog
HRM
data). The current disk unit, cylinder, head
sector address replace u, cccc, hh and ss.
HRM
and
LAP SUMMARY
SMDMON does not execute in laps in the same sense as
the other SMD diagnostics. However, it maintains the
same packet command and er~or statistics as the other
diagnostics. This lap summary table is displayed whenever the REC command is entered. Refer to the INTRODUCTION TO SMD DIAGNOSTICS for a description of the lap
summary table contents.
A separate lap summary table is maintained for each
disk unit. REC displays the summary for the currently
selected unit.
COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS:
The following notes apply to the descriptions of SMDMON
commands:
1)
Command names are shown in upper-case letters,
exactly as they must be entered. Parameter names
are shown in lower-case letters, and represent
noted,
parameters are
numbers.
Except
as
optional. All parameters are positional.
Example:
a)
b)
c)
RCYL
SUNIT unit
RAND rndseg rndoff rlnth
Example ( a) is a command with no parameters.
Example ( b) has command name SUNIT and a
single numeric parameter, a unit number.
Example ( c) has command name RAND and
three positional numeric parameters.
2)
Command names may be abbreviated to the shortest
character string that uniquely identifies the command.
Example:
The following names are all equivalent:
WR, WRI, WRIT, WRITE
A-58
2ilog
A-58
HRM
Zilog
3)
HRM
Some commands are discussed together for convenience.
In these cases, a slash (I) separates the
commands.
Ex ampl e :
a)
b)
DINT 1 EINT
SWSEG wseg 1 SWOFF woff
In each example, there are two distinct
They are discussed together because
related in function.
commands.
they are
4)
Memory addresses may be shown with the segment
enclosed in < and >, with the offset immediatly
following. <1>0 refers to segment 1, offset o.
5)
Command parameter values retain their previous
values
until
changed.
Most parameters have
default values, described in the command descriptions below.
Some parameters are shared by more
than one command.
Example:
The following commands all share the
write buffer start address parameters,
wseg and wo ff:
a) WR wseg woff Inth cyl head sec
b) SWSEG wseg
c) SWOFF wo ff
6)
Parameter defaults are:
rseg .- 1
wseg = 2
desseg = 1
srcseg = 2
rramseg = 1
wramseg = 2
fseg .- 2
roff .- 0
woff = 0
deso ff = 0
srcoff = 0
rramoff = 0
wramoff = 0
foff .. 0
fpat = ffff
Inth .- 512
rlnth = 512
unit _. 0
cyl = 0
sec = 0
maxseg = 3
intvee = 0
fstart = 0
rramlnth = 2048
wramlnth = 1280
7)
A-59
dseg =
rndseg = 2
putseg = 2
doff = 0
rndoff -= 0
putoff = 0
cmplnth = 512
head = 0
offset val = 0
fintvl-= 1
Some parameters are dependent upon the current
disk unit.
SMD disks have different numbers of
Zilog
A-59
HRM
Zilog
HRM
cylinders, heads and sectors/track.
During the
3tart-up procedure SMDMON attempts to select and
size each of the four possible SMD units.
The
size
parameters are stored in a table, and
~estored whenever
a SUNIT command changes the
current unit number.
To override the drive size
parameters use the SORIVE command. New parameters
entered with the SDRIVE command are stored in the
~able.
Example:
After SMDMON start-up, the drive
size parameters for unit# 0 are:
#cyls = 589, #heads=7,
#Active sectors/track = 32
To override these values,
e~ter:
SDRIVE 600 8 34
The values 600, 8 and 34 are stored
in the drive-size table.
8)
Format parameters are closely tied to drive-size
parameters~
Whenever the drive-size changes, the
format parameters are changed to make sense for
the new drive parameters. The format parameter
values are:
fmtsec = max sec + 1
(total number of sectors/track,
including spare and bad sectors)
nsec = max sec + 1
(number sectors/track to be formatted
with FMT, FVOL or read with FRO
command)
fspare = max sec
(spare sector number)
fbad = ffffH
(bad sector number; defaults to an
invalid number, so there will not
be a sector flagged as bad during
FMT or FVOL commands)
Drive size parameters may change if:
1)
2)
3)
A-60
User enters a unit number (SUNIT).
User enters new size parameters (SDRIVE).
User enters the SIZE command.
Zilog
A-60
HRM
Zilog
HRM
The following commands are recognized by SMDMON:
COMMAND: CEC / REC / ILC
DESCRIPTION:
CEC clears the
counters.
lap
summary
command,
error
and
lap
REC displays the lap summary counters in tabular form.
Refer to the description of the ;ap summary in the
INTRODUCTION TO SMD DIAGNOSTICS.
ILC increments the current lap counter by 1.
This is
useful in command lines with large repetition counts.
EXAMPLE:
CEC 9999((RAND)(RALL)(WR)(RD)(CMP)(ILC))
REC
The first command clears all fields in the lap summary.
The second line repeats a random write-read-compare
test 9999 times, each time incrementing the lap counter
by 1. The REC command displays the lap summary.
COMMAND:
COMPARE
CMP
DESCRIPTION:
s~eseg sreoff desseg desoff cmplnth
srcseg srcoff desseg desoff cmplnth
If NO parameters are entered:
Compares the current write buffer and read buffer
beginning at <wseg>woff and <rseg>roff.
lnth
bytes are compared.
If ANY parameters are in the command string:
Compares the buffer at <srcseg>srcoff with
buffer at <desseg>desoff for cmplnth bytes.
A m~ssage tells if and
found.
where
the
first
mismatch
the
is
CMP is a special abbreviation of COMPARE.
EXAMPLE:
WR 3 0 1024
RD 2 0
CMP 2 0 -1 0 5 1~~
CMP
A-61
Zilog
A-61
HRM
Zilog
HRM
The first CMP command compares the buffer at <2>0 with
the buffer at <1>0 for 512 bytes. The second eMP command compares the current write buffer with the current
read buffer.
In this case, the write buffer is at <3>0
and the read buffer is at <2>0.
1024 bytes are compared.
COMMAND: DISPLAY
DESCRIPTION:
dseg doff dlnth
If NO parameters are entered:
Displays the current read buffer at <rseg>roff for
Inth bytes.
If ANY parameters are in the command string:
Displays the contents of memory at <dseg>doff
dlnth bytes.
for
EXAMPLE:
RD 2 0 512
DIS? 1 0 20H
DISP
The first DISP command displays 32 (20 hex) bytes
beginning at <1>0. The second DISP displays the read
buffer at <2>0 for 512 bytes.
COMMAND: DOPKT
DESCRIPTION:
The current unit packet-status in the dispatch table is
set to GO, and WAKEUP is sent to the SMD controller.
SMDMON will ~ot alter the packet in any way.
A packet can be set up manually with the PUTMEM command.
First, the packet address is found by entering
the STATUS command, then PUTMEM is used repeatedly to
set each byte in the packet.
EXAMPLE:
DOPKT
The current unit packet is issued to the SMD controller
as is.
A-62
Zilog
A-62
HRM
Zilog
HRM
COMMAND: EABORT / DABORT
DESCRIPTION:
EABORT enables an abort-on-<CR> feature.
If the user
enters a carriage-return on the console, the current
command line s aborted. This the default for SMDMON.
DABORT disables the abort-on-<CR> feature.
EXAMPLE:
EABORT
1000((READ 1 0 512)(IBLK 1))
During the second command line, entering.a <CR> on
console aborts the line.
the
COMMAND: ECORR / DCORR
DESCRIPTION:
ECORR enables error correction
commands.
The CM:NC bit is
mode for SMDMON.
on
o.
sub~equent
packet
This is the default
DCORR disables error correction on subsequent
commands. The CM:NC bit is set to 1.
packet
EXAMPLE:
ECORR
READ
DCORR
READ
During the first READ error correction is enabled.
Duririg the second READ, no error correction takes
place.
COMMAND: EINT / DINT
DESCRIPTION:
EINT enables interrupts at the completion of paQket
commands.
CR:EI is set whenever WAKEUP is sent to the
controller. This is the default in SMDMON.
DINT disables interrupts at the completion of packet
commands. CR:DI is set whenever WAKEUP is sent.
A-63
Zilog
A-63
Zilog
HRM
HRM
EXAMPLE:
DINT
READ
The READ command is issued in polled mode.
COMMAND: EOFFSET I DOFFSET
DESCRIPTION:
EOFFSET enables use of head offsets during
CM:NO is set to 0 on all subseqeunt packet
This is the default mode for SMDMON.
DOFFSET disables head offsets during retries.
set to 1 on all subsequent packet commands.
retries.
commands~
CM:NO is
EXAMPLE:
DOFFSET
READ
During the READ and all subsequent packet commands,
offsets are used during retries.
no
COMMAND: EPAUSE I DPAUSE
DESCRIPTION:
EPAUSE enables a pause-on-error mode in SMDFMT.
If
SMDFMT detects an error upon command completion or a
compare error, it will pause and request entry of a
<CR> to continue. This is useful when a command line
with a large repetition count is entered, and the test
is to halt temporarily when an error is detected.
DPAUSE turns off the PAUSE feature.
condition in SMDMON.
It is the
default
EXAMPLE:
EPAUSE
1000 (SALL 0 0 0)(589(7(32«READ 1 0 512)(ISEC 1»»»
The second command line reads the entire disk sectorby-sector 1000 times. The user wants the test to halt
if an error occurs during the READ, and so EPA USE is
entered before the command line.
A-64
Zilog
A-64
Zilog
HRM
HRM
COMMAND: EPRINT / DPRINT
DESCRIPTION:
EPRINT causes SMDMON to be
default condition in SMDMON.
verbose.
This
is
the
DPRINT causes SMDMON to be quiet except when errors
occur.
Error and warning messages are not disabled by
entering DPRINT.
DPRINT is useful when subsequent commands have
tion counts.
repeti-
EXAMPLE:
DP
1000«WR)(RD)(CMP»
The second command line does 1000 writes, reads and
compares. Since the verbose option was disabled by the
DP command, only errors are displayed.
COMMAND: ERETRY / DRETRY
DESCRIPTION:
ERETRY enables retries on all subsequent packet commands. CM:NR is set to o. This is the default mode in
SMDMON.
DRETRY inhibits retries on all subsequent
mands. CM:NR is 1.
packet
com-
EXAMPLE:
DRETRY
READ
The READ is done without retries.
If SOFFSET was
issued earlier to set the OF field in the packet, the
user strobe and offset values are used by the controller when reading.
COMMAND: FBLK
DESCRIPTION:
The write buffer beginning at <wseg>woff is filled with
the current disk address logical block number. The
logical block number is unique for each sector on the
disk, and has this formula:
A-65
Zilog
A-65
HRM
Zilog
log. block
+ (head
+ sec
*
= cyl * (maxhead
maxsec)
HRM
*
maxsec)
Logical block numbers may exceed 64K; they
words.
are
double
This command is useful for filling each sector on the
disk with data that is both unique and identifies the
sector.
EXAMPLE:
«SALL 0 0 O)(SWS 3)(SWO O)(SLNTH 512))
589(7(32«FBLK)(WRI)(IBLK 1))))
The second command line writes the unique logical block
number to each sector on an 80 megabyte disk with 589
cylinders, 7 heads and 32 active sectors/track.
COMMAND: FILL fseg foff flnth fpat
DESCRIPTION:
If NO parameters are entered, this command fills the
current write buffer beginning at <wseg>woff with lnth
bytes of the word pattern: fpat.
If ANY parameters are entered, this command fills the
buffer at <fseg>foff with flnth bytes of the word pattern: fpat.
EXAMPLE:
WR 3 0 3000
FILL 1 0 512 AAAAH
FILL
The first FILL fills <1>0 with 512 bytes of 'AAAA's.
The second FILL fills <3>0 with 3000 bytes of 'AAAA's.
COMMAND: FMT osec cyl head sec
DESCRIPTION:
Formats nsec sectors beginning at the disk address:
cyl, head, sec. FMT uses the format parameters set in
the SFMT command: fmtsec, fspare,
fbad, fstart and
fintvl.
A sector can be flagged as spare or bad if its
A-66
Zilog
logical
A-66
HRM
Zilog
HRM
sector number equals fspare or fbad.
Sector numbers can be interleaved. The default format
does not interleave sectors (physical sector# N on a
track is also logical sector# N).
By setting fstart
(starting logical sector number) and fintvl (logical
sector number difference between physically contiguous
sectors) appropriately, sectors can be interleaved.
EXAMPLE:
SFMT 33 32 ffffH 0 3
FMT 33 2 3 0
The first line sets up the format parameters: fmtsec =
sectors/track, fspare = 32, fbad = ffffH, fstart =
0, fintvl = 3. The second line formats 33 sectors on
the track at cylinder 2, head 3. The sectors are
interleaved (0, 3, 6, 9 and so on) and the last logical
sector (sector# 32) is flagged as a spare sector.
No
sectors are flagged as bad.
33
COMMAND: FVOL
DESCRIPTION:
Formats the entire vo~ume, track by track. The format
parameters of the SFMT command determine how the disk
is formatted.
EXAMPLE:
SFMT 33 32 FFFFH 0 1
FVOL
The first line sets up the format specificatio~s for an
80 Megabyte drive with 33 total sectors per track.
The
last sector (sector 32) is designated as a spare.
No
sectors are designated as bad. Logical sector numbers
start with 0, and the interleave factor is 1 (there is
no interleaving of sectors).
The second line formats the current disk unit track by
track using the format parameters defined in the SFMT
command.
COMMAND: FRD
DESCRIPTION:
A-67
rseg roff nsee eyl head sec
2ilog
A-67
HRM
Zilog
HRM
133ues the FRD (format read) packet command.
This reads only the header portions of sectors beginning at: cyl,head,sec. Dsec sector headers are read.
Six words of data are returned for each sector read,
and that data begins at <rseg>roff.
The six words returned for each sector
o
15 14 13
+--+--+--+----------------------------+
o lET:ECIEPl
:
+--+--+--+----------------------------+
2 :
CYLINDER
:
r-------------------------------------+
4 l
HEAD
:
+--+--+-------------------------------+
6 lFLlSPl
SECTOR
:
+--+--+-------------------------------+
8 :
ECC M.S.H.
:
+-------------------------------------+
10 I
ECC L.S.H.
:
+-------------------------------------+
where,
ET flags the last sector on a track
EC flags the last sector on a cylinder
EP flags the last sector on a pack
FL flags a bad sector
SP flags a spare sector
ECC M.S.H. and ECC L.S.H. are the
high and low parts of the
ECC (checksum) for the
header portion of the sector.
EXAMPLE:
FRD 1 0 33 400 3 0
The headers of 33 sectors beginning
head#3, sector# 0 are read into <1>0.
word s long.
wit hey 1 iF 4 Q0 ,
Each header is 6
COMMAND: HELP
DESCRIPTION:
Displays a list of command names and their parameters.
A-68
2ilog
A-68
HRM
Zilog
HRM
EX:\f.'lPLE:
HELP
COMMAND: ICYL incval / IHEAD incval / ISEC incval
DESCRIPTION:
ICYL, IHEAD and ISEC increment the current
cyl, head, and sec by incval, respectively.
values
of
An increment of sec up to or greater than maxsec causes
SMDMON to increment head and cyl by the correct
amounts. An increment of head up to or greater than
maxhead causes SMDMON to increment cyl the correct
amount. If cyl will be equal or greater than rnaxcyl,
however, SMDMON ignores the command.
EXAMPLE:
SALL 588 0 0
ISEC 45
IHEAD 8
Assuming the drive is an 80 Megabyte drive with maxcyl
: 589, max head :
7, maxsec : 32, the ISEC command
causes SMDMON to set cyl:588, head:1, sec:12.
The
IHEAD command is ignored, because it would set cyl to
589, which is equal to maxcyl.
COMMAND: ILNTH offinc / IROFF offinc / IWOFF offinc
DESCRIPTION:
ILNTH increments the current read/write
by offinc.
buffer
IROFF increments the current read buffer offset,
by offinc.
length
roff,
IWOFF increments the current write buffer offset, woff,
by affine.
offinc is the parameter value supplied, or takes on its
previous or default value, if absent. It must always
be an even number.
EXAMPLE:
A-69
Zilog
A-69
Zilog
HRM
HRM
IROFF 512
IWOFF
The first line increments the read buffer offset by 512
bytes.
The second line increments the write buffer
offset, also by 512, because the last value assigned to
affine was 512.
COMMAND: INIT
DESCRIPTION:
Reinitializes the controller.
.
The sequence
of
events
'" •
1· .;)
1) Write CR:INIT to the command port. Wait for SR:BZ
to clear.
2) Reinitialize all packets to zeroes.
3) Reinitialize the dispatch table
4) Send the segment number and offset bytes for the
dispatch table to the controller.
5) Send the interrupt vector" in
intvec to the controllE~r .
6) Send the read-packet-addresses command to the controller.
EXAMPLE:
. INIT
COMMAND: NOP / PRISEL / PRIREL / RESET / SELECT
DESCRIPTION:
Each of these commands issues the packet command of the
same name in the current unit packet. SMDFMT waits for
command completion and reports any
error
status
returned by the SMD controller.
EXAMPLE:
NOP
RESET
SELECT
COMMAND:
PUTMEM
P
putval putseg putoff
putval putseg putoff
DESCRIPTION:
A-70
Zilog
A-70
HRM
Zilog
HRM
PUTMEM sets the 8-bit value in putval into the byte
addressed by <putseg>putoff. It also sets putoff up by
1. Using PUTMEM sets putseg and putoff the first time
the command is used, then repeats it with only the putval for subsequent memory bytes.
P is a special abbreviation for PUTMEM.
EXAMPLE:
P 7fH 2 10aOH
P 00
P OcH
Sets 7f into <2>10aO,
<2>10a2.
00
into
<2>10a1
and
Oc
into
COMMAND: QUIT
DESCRIPTION:
Exits SMDMON. Returns to the program
SMDMON (SADIE or the PROM monitor) .
that
invoked
EXAMPLE:
QUIT
COMMAND: RAND rndseg rndoff rndlnth
DESCRIPTION:
If NO parameter~s are present, this command fills t_he
current write buffer beginning at <wseg>woff with Inth
bytes of random data.
If ANY parameters are present, this command fills the
buffer beginning at <rndseg>rndoff with rndlnth bytes
of random data .
EXAMPLE:
«SWSEG 3) (SWOFF 0) (SLNTH 1024))
RAND 2 0 512
RAND
The first RAND command randomizes the buffer beginning
at <2>0 for 512 bytes. The second RAND command randomizes the write buffer at <3>0 for 1024 bytes.
A-71
Zilog
A-71
HRM
Zilog
HRM
COMMAND: RCYL / RHEAD / RSEC / RALL
DESCRIPTION:
RCYL randomizes the current disk cylinder number
number between 0 and maxcyl-1, inclusive.
to
a
RHEAD randomizes the current disk head number
number between 0 and maxhead-1, inclusive.
to
a
RSEC randomizes the current disk sector number
number between 0 and maxsec-1, inclusive.
to
a
RALL randomizes the current disk address.
cyl, head
and sec are all ra~domized as if the user had entered
RCYL, RHEAD and RSEC commands.
EXAMPLE:
RCYL
Assuming maxcyl = 589, this command sets cyl to a value
in the range (0, 588).
COMMAND:
READ
RD
DESCRIPTION:
rseg roff Inth cyl head sec
rseg roff Inth cyl head sec
Issues the READ packet command. The read buffer begins
at <rseg>roff. The disk address that will be read is:
cyl, head, sec. Inth bytes will be read.
RD is a special abbreviation for READ.
EXAMPLE:
'READ 1 0 200H 5 2 0
reads 512 (200 Hex) bytes into memory beginning
<1>0, from cylinder# 5, head# 2, sector# O.
COMMAND: RLONG
DESCRIPTION:
at
rseg roff Inth cyl head sec
Issues the RLONG (read long) packet command. The read
buffer begins at <rseg>roff.
The disk address that
will be read is: cyl, head, sec. Inth bytes will be
read.
A-72
Zilog
A-72
HRM
Zilog
HRM
EXAMPLE:
RLONG 1 0 516 3 2 20
Reads 512 data bytes plus 4 checksum bytes into memory
beginning. at <1>0. The disk address' is cylll 3, head#
2, sector# 20.
COMMAND: RSTATUS
DESCRIPTION:
The SMD controller status port is read and displayed.
EXAM.PLE:
RSTAT
COMMAND:
SEEK cyl
:
.D ESC RIP TION
Issues the SEEK packet command to the SMD controller.
If cyl = FFFFH (minus one), the controller rezeroes the
drive and resets any drive fault q • If cyl is >= 0, the
controller seeks to that cylinder.
Ex"AMPLE:
SEEK FFFFH
SEEK 300
The first SEEK rezeroes
resets a drive fault.
The second SEEK
positi~ns
the
current
disk
drive
and
the heads to cylinder 300.
COMMAND: SIZE
DESCRIPTION:
Issues the SIZE packet command to the SMD controller.
The drive size values returned by the controller
replace maxcyl, maxhead, and maxsec. These values are
stored in the table of drive size parameters for the
current unit. In addition, the format parameters are
changed to correspond to the new size values. See the
SUNIT command for a description of how the format
parameters change.
A-73
Zi10g
A-73
HRM
Zilog
HRM
EXAMPLE:
SIZE
COMMAND: SMEM maxseg
DESCRIPTION:
SMEM sets the number of memory segments (i~ this case,
segment means 64K of memory) available to SMDMON.
Several commands check against maxseg to see.- if an
address increment would cause a memory address to go
beyond the available memo~y (IROFF and IWOFF commands) .
EXAMPLE:
SMEM 16
maxseg is set to 16. An IROFF or IWOFF command
ignored only if the buffer segment number is >: 16.
is
COMMAND: SRSEG rseg / SROFF roff
DESCRIPTION:
SRSEG shows the cur~ent read buffer addreas if no
parameter is given. If a parameter is given, the read
.buffer segment is changed to that value.
SROFF shows the current read buffer addres if ~o parameter is given.
Otherwise, the read buffer offset is
changed to the parameter value.
EXAMPLE:
SRSEG
((SRSEG 2)(SROFF 8eeOH))
The first line does not affect the read-buffer address,
but displays its current value.
The second line sets the read-buffer segment to
the offset to 8000 hex.
2
and
COMMAND: STATUS
DESCRIPTION:
Complete status is displayed for the current disk unit,
including:
the Status Register value after the lastcompleted command, the packet status (O=IDLE,
1=GO,
2=BUSY, 3=DONE), the packet address and the packet
A-74
Zilog
A-74
HRM
Zilog
HRM
contents.
EXANPLE:
READ
STATUS
The STATUS shows the current unit status.
COMMAND: SUNIT unit
DESCRIPTION:
If NO parameter is given, this command shows the
current unit number.
If a parameter is given, SUNIT
sets the current disk unit to the parameter value as
well as retrieving the drive-size parameters stored in
a table. The format parameters are also changed.
The
drive-size and format parameters change as follows:
maxcyl = # of cylinders on drive (per table)
maxhead = # of heads on drive (per table)
maxsec = # Active sectors/track (per table)
fmtsec = new max sec value + 1
nsec = new max sec value +
fspare = new maxsec value
fbad = ffffH
maxcyl, maxhead and max sec are used to do boundary
checking on commands that increment the disk address.
fmtsec, nsec, fspare & fbad are parameters used during
FMT, FVOL and FRD commands.
EXAMPLE:
SUNIT
SUNIT
The first line does not change the current unit,
because
there is no parameter given.
It simply
displays the current disk unit. No drive-size or format parameters are affected.
The second line sets the current unit to 1.
The
drive-size and format parameters change according to
the values stored in a table in SMDMON.
COMMAND: SWSEG wseg / SWOFF woff
DESCRIPTION:
A-75
Zilog .
A-75
HRM
Z110g
HRM
SWSEG shows the cur~ent write buffer add~ess if ~o
parameter is given.
If a parameter is given, th~ write
buffer segment is changed to that value.
SWOFF shows the current write buffer address if no
parameter is given. Otherwise, the write buffer offset
is changed to the parameter's value.
EXAMPLE:
SWOFF
((SWSEG 3) (SWOFF 0))
The first line does not affect the
address, but displays its current value.
write-buffer
The second line sets the write-buffer segment to 3
the offset to o.
and
COMMAND: SLNTH Inth
DESCRIPTION:
If no parameter is given, the length of the
read buffers is shown in bytes.
write
and
If a parameter is given, the length of
read buffers is set to its value.
write
and
the
EXAMPLE:
SLNTH 1024
SLNTH
-
The first line sets the read/write buffers to be 1024
bytes
long.
The second line shows the current
read/write buffer length, but does not change .its
value.
COMMAND:
SCYL cyl / SHEAD head / SSEC sec /
SALL cyl head sec
DESCRIPTION:
SCYL sets the current cylinder number to cyl, if the
parameter is supplied; otherwise, it shows the current
disk address.
SHEAD sets the current disk head number if the parameter is supplied; otherwise, it shows the current disk
address.
A-76
Zilog
A-76
HRM
Zilog
HRM
SSEC sets the current· sector number on the current
track if the parameter is given; otherwise, it shows
the current disk address.
SALL sets the current cylinder, head and
sector
numbers, if parameters are given. Otherwise, it shows
the current disk address.
EXAMPLE:
SHEAD 5
SALL 300 4 23
SCYL
The first line sets the head number to S.
The second
line sets the current disk address to: cyl=300, head=4,
sec=23 The third line shows the current disk addre3s.
It will be 300,4,23.
COMMAND:
SDRIVE
SDRV
DESCRIPTION:
maxcyl maxhead maxsec /
maxcyl maxhead maxsec
If NO parameters appear, the current drive-size parameters are displayed, and no valu~s are affected.
If any parameters are given, SDRIVE replaces the
default ~alues for the maximum numbers of cylinders,
heads, and active sectors/track to maxcyl, maxhead and
m~xsec.
The format parameters: fmtsec, nsec, fspare
and fbad. are a1 so changed.
The commands that increment the disk address (ICYL,
IHEAD and ISEC) check against these values to prevent a
non-existent disk sector from
being
accidentally
addressed.
SDRV is a special abbreviation of SDRIVE.
EXAMPLE:
SDRIVE 1024 8 32
SDRV
The first line sets the drive-size' parameters for the
current unit to 1024 cylinders, 8 heds and 32 Active
sectors/track. The format parameters are also changed.
The second line does not change any values, but causes
SMDMON to display the current drive-size values.
A-77
Zilog
A-77
Zilog
HRM
HRM
CO~MAND:
SFMT fmtsec fspare fbad fstart fintvl
DESCRIPTION:
If NO parameters are entered, the current format parameters are displayed.
If ANY parameters are entered, these parameter3 replace
the format parameters.
Subsequent FMT, FRD and FVOL
commands use the newly entered parameters.
See the
descriptions of these commands for the functions of the
format parameters.
Entering some commands implicitly resets the format
parameters to values based upon the drive size. The
commands that may change these pa~ameters are: SDRIVE,
SIZE, SUNIT.
EXAMPLE:
SFMT 33 FFFFH 20
This command sets the number of sectors/track to 33,
the spare sector to ffffH (out of range) and the bad
sector number to 20. A subsequent FMT command flags
sector 20 as a bad sector.
COMMAND: SOFFSET offset
DESCRIPTION:
If a parameter is given, its value replaces the current
drive offsets in the current unit packet. This value
remains there until the packet is cleared (by issuing
the INIT command) or until a subsequent SOFFSET command
changes it. If no parameter is given, the current
offsets are shown.
EXAMPLE:
OFFSET CH
OOOC (hex) replaces the current value in the
in the current unit packet.
OF
field
COMMAND: WCMD cmdval
DESCRIPTION:
Writes cmdval to the SMD Controller's command register.
A-78
Zilog
A-78
HRM
Zilog
HRM
EXAMPLE:
WCMD 47H
Writes 47 (hexadecimal) to the command port.
This
corresponds to CR:CMD = 7 (set interrupt vector) and
CR:DATA = 4. This instructs the controller to use
interrupt vector 4.
COMMAND:
WRITE
WR
DESCRIPTION:
wseg woff Inth cyl head sec
wseg woff Inth cyl head sec
Issues the WRITE packet command.
The write buffer
begins at <wseg>woff. The disk address written to is:
cyl, head, sec. Inth bytes are written.
WR is a special abbreviation of WRITE.
EXAMPLE:
WRITE 2 0 512 10 0 2
Writes 512 bytes from memory
cyl# 10, head# 0, sector# 2.
COMMAND: WLONG
DESCRIPTION:
beginning
at
<2>0
into
wseg WQff Inth cyl head sec
Issues the WLONG (write long) packet command.
The
write buffer begins at <wseg>woff. The disk address
that is written to is: cyl, head, sec.
Inth is the
number of data bytes to be written.
EXAMPLE:
WLONG 2 0 516 550 7
°
Writes 512 data bytes plus 4 checksum bytes from memory
at <2>0 into cyl# 550, head# 7, sector# o.
A-79
Zilog
A-79
HRM
HRM
2ilog
TEST NAME
TCUMON
PARAMETERS
None
DESCRIPTION
This program is an interactive exercise monitor for the Tape
Controlle!' unit.
All commands must be entered in uppercase letters.
Some
commands require no parameters; but those that do, interpret
the values entered as decimal numbers, unless followed by an
H (h ex n urn b e r) .
Ex ampl e
200H
= 512
For some commands to execute properly, other commands must
be issued first.
These dependencies are described in the
command descriptions.
The command line may contain multiple c86m~~d3.
3epetition
counts can be specified for the commands, and parenthe3es
are used to force command groupirigs.
Some parameters are
maintained from command to command.
NOTES
TCUMON allows almost complete control of the Tape Controller
Unit.
It is possible to transfer data into segment 0, and
crash the current invocation of SADIE.
EXAMPLES
(1)
LOAD
This command loads the tape
from
the
physical
beginning-of-tape to the logical beginning-of-tape.
(2)
STRK
This command performs
A-80
a
rewind
2ilog
and
select
track
A-80
HRM
Zilog
HRM
(tracks are numbered 0-3).
(3)
WRITE 1 AOOOH 1000H
If this command is executed after examples 1 and 2,
it
writes 1000 hex bytes of data, starting from location
AOOO of segment 1, onto track 1 of the tape.
(4)
4((1WOFF 1000H) (WRITE)) (WFM)
If this command is executed after examples 1, 2, and 3,
locations BOOO through EFFF of segment 1 are written as
the second through fifth blocks of track 1.
Ea.ch block
is 1000 hex bytes long, and there is a file mark terminating this file.
This illustrates the use of
parentheses, implied parameters, and repetition counts.
COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS
The following list of command3 are used in TCUMON.
All
parameters, when applicable, are indicated as lowercase
variable names.
All variables are assumed to be hexadecimal
numbers.
If the conditions described under dependencies are
not met, the command will be rejected.
COMMAND:
CEe
Description
CEe clears all command, lap, and error
cou~ters.
Dependencies
None
COMMAND:
ece
Description
eec clears all command counters.
Dependencies
None
A-81
Zilog
A-81
HRM
Zilog
COMMAND:
HRM
CLC
Description
CLC clears the lap counter, and displays the
nand and erra~ summary.
com-
Dependencies
None
Ex ample
CLC
COMMAND:
D(~
CM? srcseg srcoff de3seg de30ff count
3c!"'i pt iO!1
This command compares two buffers.
The memory
locations are addressed by segments (srcseg) and
(desseg), and offsets within segments (srcoff) and
(desoff).
The
number of words compared is
(count). The addresses and contents of th~ first
nonmatching locations, if any, are displayed.
Dependencies
None
Example
eM? 1 0 1 100H 100H
.1\-82
Zilog
A-82
·Zilog
HRM
HRM
COMMAND: DIAG1
Description
DIAG1 performs a quick check of the I/O ports
interface with the TCU.
~hat
Dependencies
None
Ex ampl e
DIAG1
COMMAND:
DISPRT
Description
DISPRT disables the echoing of commands, and
prevents the displaying of the command and error
summaries .
De pend enc ies
No ne
Example
DISPRT
COMMAND:
EGP
Description
EGP erases a three inch gap on the tape. The purpose is to get past a defect in the media.
De pend enc ies
The tape must be at, or
ning of tape.
beyo~d,
th~
logical begin-
Example
EGP
A-83
Zilog
A-83
HRM
Zilog
COMMAND:
HRM
ENPRT
Description
ENPRT enables the echoing of commands,
and
prevents the displaying of the command and error
summaries.
Dependencies
NO:1e
Ex ample
EN?RT
COM~AND:
F f3eg foff
fle~
pat
Description
This command fil13 memory from 3egment (fseg),
address (foff), for a length of (flen) words, with
data pattern (pat).
Dependencies
None
Ex ampl e
F 1 8 50 1234H
COMMAND:
HELP
Description
HELP displays the available commands with their
parameters, and gives terse explanations of th~ir
use.
Depe~dencies
None
Ex ampl e
A-84
Zilog
A-84
Zilog
HRM
HRM
HELP
COMMAND:
ILC
Description
ILC increments the lap counter, and
command and error summaries.
displays
the
This command Increme'1ts ~~h;~ le:13tl1 ':;Junte'"
read or write operations by (addval) words.
length must be less than Ox8000.
fo('
The
Dependencies
None
Ex ampl e
ILC
COMMAND:
ILNTH add val
Description
De pend enc i es
None'
Ex ampl e
ILNTH 1000H
COMMAND:
INV invcom
Description
This command forces any 2 digit hex number into
the command register. This verifies that invalid
commands are properly rejected.
Dependencies
None
A-85
Zilog
A-85
Zilog
HRM
HRM
E;{ a:npl e
INV 2A
COMMAND:
IROFF addval
Descr:Lption
This command i~crement3 the de3tination offset for
read operations by (addval) words.
It also increments across segment values.
The segment value
must ~e 3 or less.
Dependencie3
None
Ex ampl e
IROFF SOH
COMMAND:
ITRK
Description
ITRK increments the track on which succeeding commands will operate, and sets the track.
If on
track 3, it sets track.to O.
Dependencies
Tape must be
point.
at,
or
beyond,
the
logical
load
Ex ample
ITRK
COMMAND:
IVNT
Description
IVNT increments the unit on \vhich succeeding comnands will operate.
If on unit 3, unit 0 is
selected.
A-86
Zilog
A-86
Zilog
HRM
HRM
Dependencies
None
Ex ampl e
IVNT
COMMAND:
IWOFF addval
Description
This command increments the source offset address
It also
for
write operations by (addval) words.
increments acr033 memory segment values.
The segment value must be 3 or less.
Dependencies
None
Ex ampl e
IWOFF 64
COMMAND:
LOAD
Description
. LOAD moves the tape from the physical beginningof-tape to the logical beginning-of-tape.
Dependencies
Tape must be at the physical beginning-of-tape.
Ex ampl e
LOAD
COMMAND:
MODE m
Description
A-87
Zilog
A-87
Zilog
HRM
This command changes the mode
troller to 0 or 1.
HRM
of
the
tape
con-
Dependencies
None
Ex ampl e
MODE
COMMAND:
MRTRY rtrycnt
De3cr:Lption
This command sets the ~aximum
allowed for read3 and writes.
i3 10 (rtrycnt = 0-15).
number of retries
Def3ult at power-up
De pend enc ie 3
None
Ex ampl e
lVJRTRY 8
COMMAND:
Q
Description
This command quits TCDMON and returns to SADIE.
De pendenc ies
NO!le
Ex ampl e
COMMAND:
RAND r!ldseg rndoff rlnth
Description
A-88
Zilog
A-88
HRM
Zilog
HRM
This command fil13 memory \-oJi'ch
('3ndom data from
segment
(rndseg),
address (rndoff), for a length
of (r 1 en) wo r d 03 •
Dependencies
None
Ex ampl e
RAND 3 0 1000H
COMMAND:
READ rhad rlad rlen
Description
This command reads a block of data frDrn
l,::ip'2
3.:1d
transfers
it
to
segment (rhad), address (""lad).
The (1."1 en) bytes are tra nsfer-red tJ mem.:);'" y.
Dependencies
Tape must
be
at,
beginning-of-tape.
or
beyond,
the
logical
Ex ampl e
READ 0 B800H 2000H
COMMAND:
REC
Description
REC displays all error counters, lap
command counters.
counte~3,
and
Dependencies
None
Ex ampl e
REC
A-89
Zilog
A-89
, HRM
Zilog
HRM
COMMAND:
REWIND
DB3cription
This command 1"ewi~ds
beginning of tape.
the
tape
to
the
logical
Dependencies
The tape must be at, or beyond, the logical beginning of tape.
Examp1 e
REWIND
COMMAND:
SEL
selent
Description
Controller selects
selcnt=O-3) .
A
new
drive
(address
selent,
Dependencies
None
Ex ampl e
SEL
COMMAND:
SKBF skpcnt
Descriptio~
This command skips Cskpcnt) blocks forward on the
tape, or until either a file mark or the end of
tape is detected.
Dependencies
Tape must be at,
beginning-of-tape.
or
beyond,
the
logical
Ex ampl e
A-gO
Z110g
A-gO
HRM
HRM
Zilog
SKBF 12
COMMAND:
SKBR skpc1t
Description
This command skips (skpc~t) blocks backward on the
or until either a file mark or the logical
beginning-of-tape is detected.
t~pe,
Depe~dencies
Tape must be beyond the logical
b3gi~~i~g-of-tape.
Ex ampl e
SKB R 14
COMMAND:
SKFF skpcnt
Description
Th i 03 comman d ski ps (:3 ;( pc n t ) f i 1 e s for war d 0
tape, or until the end of tape is detected.
'1
the
Dependencies
Tape must be at,
beginning-of-tape.
Ex ampl
or
beyond,
the
logical
e
SKFF 4
COMMAND:
SKFR skpcnt
Description
Skips (skpcnt) files backward on
until the end of tape is detected.
the
tape,
Dependencies
Tape must be beyond the logical beginning of tape.
A-91
Zilog
A-91
Zilog
HRM
HRM
Example
SKF R 5
COMMAND:
STAT
Description
STAT displays all tape
ters.
co~trolle~ i~terface
regis-
Dependencies
None
Ex ampl e
STAT
COMMAND:
STRK trkcnt
Desc:"iption
Controller rewinds the tape
track. (trkcnt = 0-3.)
and
selec~ts
a
new
Dependencies
Tape must be at,
beginning-of-tape.
or
beyond,
the
logical
Ex ampl e
STRK 3
COMMAND:
UNLOAD
Description
UNLOAD moves the tape to the
of-tape.
physical
beginning-
Dependencies
A-92
Zilog
A-92
HRM
HRM
Zilog
Tape must be at,
beginning-of-tape.
Ex ampl
or
beyond,
the
logical
e
UNLOAD
COMMAND:
WFM
Description
WFM writes a file mark on the tape.
De pend enc i e3
The tape must be
beginning-of-tape.
at,
or
beyond,
the
logical
Ex ampl e
WFM
COMMAND:
WRITE whad wlad wlen
Description
This command writes one bloc~ of (wle~l) ~yt23
the tape, from segment Cwhad), address C"tJlad).
tJ
Dependencie3
Tape must be at,
beginning-of-tape.
or
beyond,
the
logical
Ex ampl e
WRITE 3 4000H 1AOOH
COMMAND:
WUP
Description
WUP moves tape to the end-of-tape, and back to the
beginning, to establish tape ten3ion.
A-93
Zilog
A-93
HRM
Zilog
HRM
Zilog
A-94
Dependencie3
None
Ex ampl e
WUP
A-94
Zilog
HRM
HRM
TEST NAME
TCOM- Tape Command Exerciser
PARAMETERS
Start= The first module of tape commands to be executed
(default=O) .
End = The last module of tape commands to be executed
(default=O) .
Unit = The unit number of the tape ::"J j2 ex·ercised
(default=O)
NOTE
The default values cause all modules between start
and End to be executed.
DESCRIPTION
The following TCOM modules exercise the tape controller call
command s:
Module 1: LOAD and UNLOAD commands
Module 2: REWIND and SKBR commands in Mode 0 and Moja
Module 3: READ, WRITE, and STRK com~a~ds
Mod u 1 e4: SKBF and SKB R ,:) ,) ;1,; nan J .)
Module 5: SKFF, SKFR, and WFM commands
Module 6: SEL, MRTRY, and EGP commands
The DIAG1 command i3
Modul e.
executed
before
entering
the
start
ERROR MESSAGES
TCOM issues warnings for correctable errors (e.g., no tape
in drive, tape write-protected, etc.), and self-explanatory
error messages if a tape operation fai13.
In addition to
error messages, the TCU registers are also displayed.
LAP SUMMARY
Each module includes an introductory statement, a running
commentary on the test progress, and a message signalling
successful completion. There is no lap summary for the
entire TCOM test.
A-95
Z110g
A-95
HRM
Zilog
HRM
NOTES
TeOM halt3 execution when a tape operation fai13.
A-96
Zilog
A-96
HRM
TEST
HRM
Zilog
NAME
TEX - tests magnetic tape
ca~tridges
PARAMETERS
datpat: Entered in hexadecimal.
on the tape (default =OxSS55).
The data
pat~t~r:1
'·r·Ltt,~:1
pr_wr_rr: Entered in hexadec imal. The fir'st t'"",o nibbl-=3,
pr, are the number of times the pattern written to tape is
read and verified (default:Ox1Q). The second nibble, wr, is
the number of retries used in writing the ~ata (default=O).
The third nibble, rr, i3 the number of retries permitted
during a read ope~ation (default:OxA).
numblk: Entered in hexadecimal. The number of Ox10 byte
blocks which are written, read, and verified as a group.
u st et w:
Entered in hexadecimal.
Tha fi~3t
nibble
selects which unit will test the tape.
The second nibble
specifies the track where testing begins. The third nibble
is the track where testing ends.
The four'th digit, if ~on­
zero, causes a tape warmup. A tape warmup moves the tape to
the logical end-of-tape, and then rewinds.
Def3ult values
are 0, 0, 3, and 1, respectively.
DESCRIPTION
This test
pe~far~s
the following:
(1)
Retries are set to wr.
(2)
Write numblk blocks of 1000H bytes (starting
st) with a data pattern of datpat.
(3)
Retries are set to rr.
Reads the blocks just
pr times, and compares to ensure valid data.
(4)
If EaT is encountered,
return to step 1 •
(5)
Rewind and move to next track; if at track
test; if not, return to step 1 .
proceed
to
step
at
tr'ack
written
if
not,
et+ 1 ,
3top
5;
Counters and error totals are displayed at the end of each
read and write.
A detailed log of the last 17 errors
r e cor d ed, i.3 a v ail ab 1 e b y P r" e .3 .3 i !1 g S TAR T a:1 den t e r i ng ft E" to
the menu prompt.
A-97
Zilog
A-97
HRM
2ilog
HRM
ERROR MES8AGES
The U3er is warned if the unit selected does not exi3t, is
not loaded with tape, or if the tape is write protected. If
a tape operation fails, the TeU registers are displayed.
Normal error messages from the test are displayed if a
verification yields a compar3 e~~or. The track, block, and
data are di3played~
LAP SUMMAlf.y
At the end
0 f e a c h rea dan d
·,VV' it e
0 f
" n urn b 1 k"
b J. 0 c k s ;
a
table is displayed containing lap and parameter information,
number of retries attempted, and errors cla3sifi~d as read
or write, or hard or soft. This information is cumulativ:3.
NOTES
This test is based on
gram.
A-98
tap~
distributor's tape screening pro-
Zilog
A-98·
HRM
Zilog
HRM
TEST NAME
NEWMEM1
PARAMETERS
maxseg=maximum segment nwnber to be tested (Jefaul t=3)
minseg=minimum segment number to be tested (default=O)
DESCRIPTION
NEWlVIEM1 does a random data test on the memory segments given
in the par ameter s .
Eac h memor y segmen t i s 64 K byte.3.
Tl1 e
test gets repeated n times, where n=#REPS in the test line.
NEWMEM1 must relocate the test code if 3egme~t J is t23t2i.
If minseg=maxseg=O,
the code is relocated to segme~t 1 and
the test runs from segment 1. If minseg=O and maxseg>O,
the
code rotates through the segments to be tested. On the first
lap, the code is in segment 0; on the second lap, it is in
segment 1, and so on. On each lap all the segments from 0 to
maxseg are tested except, of course, the segment where the
code resides currently.
This implies that at least tAO
repetitions must be done for thorough testing.
The test fills each segment with random data, then reads
back for verification.
it
ERROR MESSAGES
If the data found in a memory location is not correct, a
RANDOM TEST ERROR message appears.
It gives the address
where the error occurred, what the data should be (DATA=),
and what was found In memory (BAD=),.
All NEWMEM1 errors are reported as HARD errors.
LAP SUMMARY
After each repetition of NEWMEM1, the last 19 error messages
are displayed.
The errors are accumulated from one repetition to the next.
A-99
Zilog
A-99
HRM
Zilog
HRM
NOTES
NEWMEM1 turns the MMUs ON during the test. If NEWMEM1 indicates errors, SADIE diagnostic MMUTST5 or the SYSTEM POWERUP DIAGNOSTICS (SPUD) s:1ould be t'un tD e~13\.F·e c':1e MHU' 3
integrity.
A-100
Zilog
A-100
, Zi log
HRM
HRM
TEST NAME
NEWMEM2 - a quick memory test of memory segments
PARAMETERS
maxseg:maximum
segment
to
be
tested
minseg=minimum segment to be tested (default:O)
(default=3)
DESCRIPTION
NEWMEM2 does three (3) w~ice-read-compa;e tests on each segment tested.
The three tests repeat n times, where n:#REPS
in the test line. The tests are:
Te st 1:
Test 2:
Te st 3:
A simple data line test.
A simple address line test.
A block test where the segment is filled
with x5555s; read and verified; filled
with AAAAs; and read and verified.
Like NEWMEM1, NEWMEM2 relocates the code segment.
ERROR MESSAGES
The tests described abJve,
err-a?" occurs:
display
these
messages
if
a~
DATA ERROR (test 1)
AODR -LINE TEST ERROR (test 2)
BLOCK ERROR (test 3)
Each message gives the address and data which is written
(GOOD=xxxx), and the incorrect data which i3 read back
(BAD=xxxx) .
All NEWMEM2 errors are reported to SADIE as HARD error3.
LAP SUMMARY
After each repetition of NEWMEM2, the last 19 errors are
displayed in tabular form.
The errors accumulate from ~ne
repetition to the next.
A.-101
Zilog
A-101
HRM
Zilog
HRM
NOTES
NEWMEM2 turns the MMUs ON during the test. If NEWMEM2 indicates errors, SADIE diagnostic MMUTST5 or the SYSTEM POWERUP DIAGNOSTICS (SPUD) should be run ta ensure the MMU's
integrity.
A-102
Zilog
A-102
HRM
Zilog
HR~1
TEST NAME
NEWMEM3 - a thorough n-cell-coupling test of memory segments
PARAMETERS
maxseg=maximum segment number to be tested (default:3)
minseg=minimum segment number to be tested (default=O)
DESCRIPTION
NEWMEM3 is a slow, but thorough, n-cell-cQupling test.
It
fla"gs problems the other memory tests may not reveal. The
test takes approximately 20 minutes per segment tested.
NEWMEM3 repeats n times, wheren=#REPs in the tA3t li~e.
NEWMEM3 relocates the code segm.ent the salne a3 NE\n-1Ei-11.
ERROR MESSAGES
NEWMEM3 displays a DATA ERROR message for each error.
T~e
error me s sage g i ves th e add re s s whe r e th e t: r rl);" ,)C (~d:-:-ed ,
the value written (GOOD=xxxx), and the incorrect value read
back (BAD=xxxx).
All NEWMEM3 errors are
repor~ed
to SADIE
33
HARD errors.
LAP SUMMARY
At the conclusion of e8ch test repetition, the last 19 error
messages are displayed. The errors accumulate from one
repetition to another.
NOTES
NEWMEM3 turns the MMUs ON during the test. If NEWMEM3 indicates errors, SADIE diagnostic MMUTST5 or the SYSTEM POWERUP DIAGNOSTI CS (S PUD) shaul d be run to en sure i:,h e ~r'1U::;
int8g~ity.
A-103
Zilog
A-103
Zilog
HRM
HRM
TEST NAME
MMUTST5 - a series of tests of the MMUs
PARAMETERS
None
DESCRIPTION
MMUTST5 performs a series of tests on the MMUs.
For each
test, MMUTST5 displays a message informing the user that it
i 03 abo ut to beg in the t est. Th e t est s a r ~ per f 0 2'" ~n ed ,) (l e r:1 ,~ I1
of the three MMUs (CODE, DATA and STACK) unless ot~e~~i3~
specified.
(1)
A block random data test, where 256 bytes of random
data are written to memory, read back, 8nd compared.
(2)
A SDR test, where random data is written to
then read and ·verified.
(3)
A "55 135" and "AAAA" data test on all MMUs.
(~)
A CONTROL register test, where random data is written
to each control register, then read and verified.
(5)
A test of the read-only flag, in the DATA and STACK MMU
SDR'.3 .
(6)
A test of the LIMIT register, in the DATA and STACK MMU
3DR'3 .
(7)
A test of the DIRW flag, in
SDR"s.
(8)
A test of address translation using each SDR.
ERROR
the
DATA
and
each
SDR,
STACK
MMU
MESSJ~GES
MMUTST5 displays messages whenever an access violation
causes a segment trap. The messages indicate where the ~MU
error occurred.
All MMUTST5 errors are reported to SADIE as HARD errors.
A-104
2ilog
A-104
Zilog
HRM
HRM
LAP SUMMARY
On completion of each repetition of the 3erie3 of tests,
MMUTST5 displays the lap number, error count, and for ·each
MMU:
('1 )
The number of block data error3
( :2)
The number of r' a:1dom SDR errors
(3)
The number of fV5555" and " AAAA" data
( 4)
The number of eor1t:"ol
HODE registers)
(5)
The number of acce3S
a.
read only
b •
limit
c.
direction
d.
translation
,""egi3t(~:' '2.
4
vi01~tL~~3
_",)
~
3
er~:)r3
.
( 3 ~ri
,
D3C,
a:1d
of the following types:
For information about"the MMUs, refer to:
Z8010 Z-MMU Memory Management Unit Product
Specification, March, 1981
(Product Number 00-20 1+6-A)
NOTES
None
A-105
Zilog
A-105
HRM
HRM
Zilog
TEST NAME
CENT.PRT (CENTRONICS pri~ter interface test)
DP.PRT (DATA PRODUCTS printer i~terface test)
PARAMETER8
None
DESCRIPTION
CENT.PRI and DP.PRT are interactive tests of the Centronics
and Data Products printer interface, respectively.
The
pr in t e r po r 'c t e 3 t 3, p:" \.")dlP;~ t. h e ~ 3 ~:" C ) V 2 ., i.f y :,; :13 t
t. ~1 .-;
printer is online.
If the printer is online, the tests 3e~j
the printable character set to the PIO Channel B, n times,
where n is the number of repetitions in the test line.
During these tests, PIO interrupts are disabled; the PIO
polled by the test.
is
ERROR MESSAGES
A message 13 displayed if the proper connection does not
between the System 8000 and the printer, or if the
printer port is busy too long.
exi~t
other error messages are self explanatory.
LAP SUMMARY
None
NOTES
None
A-106
Zilog
A-106
HRM
Zilog
HRr~
TEST NAME
S'16SIO
PARAMETERS
None
DESCRIPTION
S16310 is an interactive, menu-driven test of t.he 3103 and
CTCs not used by the console.
(SADIE uses SIO no, Cha~nal
B, to communicate with the co~sole. The test aS3umes that
SIO II 0, Channel B, i. s func t ion ing . )
A c 1'10 ice 0 nth e t e 3 t rn e n u J..3 t:) \~;( _~, :.:,; 1'~ ~ - ~ ') ~~ •
T~l i 3 i 3
the
only way the test ;;;hould be exited; DO NOT PRESS "START" TO
EXIT.
This test requires an auxiliary terminal,. referred to by the
test as AUX. The user selec ts .the SIO to be tested, a:l::l t~1e
test prompts the user to plug AUX into a specified port on
the system rear panel. Entering <CR> on the console signals
the test to proceed~
The AUX terminal must not be connected to TTYO until
-transfers control to 816310.
SADIE
The test proceeds by displaying the entire set of ASCII
printable characters continuously, until any key is pressed
on the con sol e . Th en the t est i s i !1 nee h 0 In 0 d G " , and any
character pressed on AUX is echoed back to AUX by the test.
Pressing any key on the CONSOLE termi'1ates "echo mode", and
returns to the 316SIO menu.
ERROR MESSAGES
None
LAP SUMMARY
Not applicable.
A-107
Zilog
A-107
HRM
HRM
Zilog
NOTES
3 16 3 IO t urn 3 OFF i n t err up t .3 f (' 0 rn t. £1 (~ \~ . J n .3 J 1 -;, 1,1: H~ '1 ~~ 11 ·2
signals for the test to proceed.
Therefore, DO NOT
" 3 TAR T" TOE X ITt his t e .3 t, a.3 i (} t e Y" ~ U pc .3 'N i 1 l.~ .J '1 tin 1..1 e
disabled when the PAUSE menu i3 displayed.
·j.3':::"
P~:::)3
J..
v;J
•
o!~
If 316310 does not respond after the U.3e~ sign813 for the
test to proceed, check that AUX is connected to the correct
port. To recover, hit several keys i~ succession a~ the
c0l1so1 e .
The test of SIO no, Channel A, is slightly different from
the at her SI ate 3 t 3 • Th e fir ;5 t key pre 3 3 e.j \) '1 "~h e con.3ole ,
returns control to the menu. There i.3 no "echo mode" test
on SIO #0, Channel ~.
A-1G8
Zilog
A-10B
Zilog
HRM
HRM
TEST NAME
SIOMODEM - a test of the SIOs, including modem signals
PARAMETERS
SIOrvlODEM is an inter'active te::;\':'; it
fr-om SADIE.
re\~eives
no
parameters
DESCRIPTION
SIOMODEM tests the following SIO functions:
$
Character transmission, polled mode .
.g
Ch a r act e r t ran 3m i
vectors" false).
-9
Ch a r act e r t ran sm iss ion, i !1 t e r up t, m,) de (" s tat, d.3
vectors" trlj.~).,
~
SIO modem signals (RTS,DCD,DTR,CTS), polled mode.
~
SIO modem signals,
~
Tra~smit
~
External status interrupts.
~
Character transmissions, mismatched baud rates.
~
Character transmission at all standard baud rates.
3;3
LJ:1, in t err u p t mod e (It S tat usa f f
l"
inter~upt
:3
f
~c
':"'~.~
t
s
::'.3
moje.
interrupts.
The tests are arranged in three different test seq u e !1': e 3 ,
each of which is performed for each pair of tty ports . T~1e
tests are:
(1)
Polled mode character/modem t83t. Performs a
character transmission and SIO modem signals.
(2)
Interrupt mode character test.
Performs a test of
character transmission in interrupt mode where "status
a f f e c t s v e c tor s" fa 1 s e; t est s c h a 1" act e r t ran sm iss i \) n 0 f
mismatched baud rates; and te3ts all standard baud
rates.
(3)
Modem/character interrupt test.
Performs a test of
character transmission in interr'upt mode where" status
affects vectors" true; tests SIO
modem
signals;
A-10g
Zilog
test
of
A-109
Zilog
HRM
transmit interrupts; and
HRM
exter~al
status interrupts.
Each test continues indefinitely, until the user ter~irr~te3
it by pressing a key on the c·J'1so1e.
(D.) ·1.)~ "~j~~'~ ,:~~12c~,.j·'
during the test, or unexpected/unintended choices might be
made accidentally.)
All errors result in an audible "beep", and a message on the
console screen explaining the error. Beeps also occur when
the program expects input from the consQle.
All SID ports, includin3 the console port, ~emote line port,
and CPU expansion ports, can be tested. SIOMODEM (also
kno~n as SIO Test #3) performs all tests
that are in the
earlier version (SID Test #2, or 316SIO).
SIOMODEM requires a special interconnecting cable to carry
the modem signals between SID ports (for example, port TTY2
might be looped back to TTY6). The test is interactive, and
gives instructions to the user concerning how the SIOs are
to be interconnected.
It also explains what input is
expected and at what time.
The interconnecting cable consists of two standard RS232, 25-pin male connector3., wired
a3 follows:
A
xmitted data
rcvd data
RTS
CTS
DCD
signal ground
DTR
2
3
J·
f
5
--------------------------
B
3
2
received data
tr3D3:nitted data
/"
J':8
20
DTH
HIS
signal ground
r)
It
6
7
7
20 ----- h..I
crs
The other signals should not be wired. The length of the
interconnecting cable should be about 8 feet.
If the cable
is not available, modem tests cannot be performed, and diagnostic test 316SIO should be run.
SIOMODEM offers the capability of moving the console port,
so the standard console chan~el (TTY1, labelled "CONSOLE")
can be tested the same as all other SIO channels.
The console may be moved to any SID channel which has already been
tested. The remote line (TTYO) can also be tested when the
console is moved.
Testing of any pair of SIO ports may be
skipped if desired.
The
test continues in a circular
fashion, testing pairs of SID channels,
until the U3er
responds to a prompt, wi i~h "Q!1, to e~d all tests.
A-110
Zilog
A-110
HRM
Zilog
HRM
Console interrupts are disabled during the te3t, so NMI is
not to be utilized to terminate the test. The NMI fun('ti~:l
does not normally operate ~..jhile the cesc i3 ex:e,:;u.,il,:!;.
ERROR MESSAGES
All error messages are preceded by an audible "beep" on
console.
ERROR: NO CHARACTER RECEIVED, POLLED MODE, TTY#
ON CHARACTER XX
the
FAILED
This is the first test performed.
No character
was transmitted between the ports in a polled-mode
transmissi.on. All possible ASCII characters f:.--om
00 to FF are transmi.tted, in both direction::;, and
the error' tex t reveal..:; ,,,11 iC~1
'::1-:t('::3::: Ge"~
:/'3 >
attempting to be transmitted.
If the f d i 1 ;.~ d; '" l ; ~.
acterwas 00, check the cable.
This message
occurs if one of the connectors is loose, a wire
is bra ken, a pin has com e I 0003 e, 0 r- 1 f
the :~ a b I e
is connected to the wrong port.
POLLED TTY# ###CHARS, ## ERRS, POLLED TTY# ##YCHARS,
fl#
SR~S
This message is displayed on th,~ co~npll~::.io'1 ·.)f
each cycle of the polled mode test (af~0- ?~5
c h a r act e r s h a v e bee n s uc c e s :3 f IJ 1 1 Y t. ~'" ::1 :1 .3' n i 'c, 'c- ~= j
i n
e a c h d 1r e c t ion) . Th e n um be r 03 rep res e n t c urn III 17:, 1·J e
totals since the test for the current pair of 310
ports was initiated.
If the error count 103 ze:o
in both directions, the test i3 successful.
The
error count represents the number of times that
the character received differed from the character
transmitted."
The interrupt mode test contin~~3
until a character is input on the console.
TTY# RECEIVE MODEM ERROR STATUS1
SET
=
##, DCD
AND/OR
CTS
An error occurred in polled-mode testing of the
transmit modem signals. RTS and DTR were reset in
the receive modem, but DCD and/or CTS failed to be
reset in the transmit modem.
Check the 1~terconnecting cable for broken wires or loose pins.
A-111
Zilog
A-111
Zilog
HRM
TTYO TRANSMIT MODEM ERROR STATUS1 : ##, DCD AND/OR
SET
CIS
HRM
An erro~ has occurred in polled-mode testing of
the t~ansmit modem signals.
RTS and DTR were
reset in the receive modem, but nCD and/or CTS
failed to be reset in the transmit modem.
Check
the interconnecti~g cable.
TTY# RECEIVE MODEM ERROR STATUS2 : ##, DCD
BACK ON
NOT
TURNED
Error in polled-mode testing of medem signals.
RTS and DTR were set high in the transmit modem,
but the expected statu3 in the ~ec~i{e modem,
CT3
low and DeD high, did not occu~.
TTY# TRANSMIT MODEM ERROR STATUS2 :
BACK ON
on,
CTS
Nor
TURNED
Error in polled-mode te3ti~g ~f modem sig:1a13.
DTR was set in the receive modem, b~t the expected
status in the transmit modem,
CTS high aDd DCD
low, did not occur.
SPEED: #### BAUD, TEST CYCLE U#
Displayed at the beginning of each interaction of
the interrupt mode test.
The interrupt mode test
is similar to the polled mode te3t,
ex~ept
t~~~
SIO character received interrupts are used tJ 3i3~
nal the receipt of each character. All characters
from 00 to FF are transmitted in ~ach direction
for each of the standard line speeds: 19,200,
9600,
4800,
1200, 300, and 110 baud.
The interrupt mode test continues until a character is
Input 0"(1 the console. When a character is L1:J~::-',
the test terminates on completion of the current
oyala.
Th8 LAST CYCLE display appears after the
test cycle number, indicating that no ne~ cycle
\o1il1 be started.
ERROR: INTERRUPT NOT RECEIVED, TTY#, FAILED ON
CHARAC-
TER tIff
Character-received interrupt failed
to occur in
interrupt mode testing ("status affects vectors" :
A-112
Zilog
A-112
Zilog
HRM
HRM
f a 1 s e, i n t err u p t v e c t;) r =0 x 2 0 ) •
the ~eceive port i3 given.
INTERRUPT TEST ON
#tlCHARS, ##ERRS
TTY#,
###CHARS,
The TTY n urn b e r
##ERRS,
ON
0
f
TTY#,
This message is di3played at the end of each
iteration of each cycle of the interrupt mode
test, and is analagou3 to the 3i'nilar display of
the polled mode test.
Character and erro~ counts
are cumulative for all t23t cycles.
Zero er-or
counts in both directions indicate a successf~l
test.
The error count is the number of times that
the tran:5mitted character failed to :l1atch the
received character.
ERROR: CHARACTERS MATCH WITH MIS-MATCHEJ BAUD RATES!!
Indicates that 256 characters were succes3fully
transmitted despite differing baud rates in the
transmit and receivr~ PO('ts.
T~1e bau,j ratc~
cl;Jcks
are not correctly set.
ERROR: DCD INTERRUPT NOT RE:EIVE0,
TTY~,
SfATJ3= ##
An error occurred in inter~upt-moJe ~e3ti1g af
modem signals.
RTS and DTR were reset in the
transmit modem, which should have gene~at8j an
interrupt in the receive modem when nCD .and STS
are reset.
If both polled mode and interrupt mode
modem tests fail, the interconnecting cable should
be carefully checkedi however, if only one modern
test fails, the SIO LS probably at fault.
ERROR: DCD AND/OR CTS NOT
CLEARED, TTY#, STATUS: #11
CLEARED
AFTER
RTS/DTR
The interrupt described in the previous er~or
occurred in the receive SIO modem; however, the
expected status of zero for both DCD a~j CTS did
not occur.
ERROR: DCD INTERRUPT NOT RECEIVED, TTY#, STATUS: UU
RTS was set on the transmit modem, which should
have caused an interrupt on the receive madem when
A-113
Zilog
A-113
2ilog
HRM
HRM
DCD i3 set.
ERROR: TTY# DCD NOT SET AND
STATUS = if:;'}
ers CLEARED AFTER RIS
SET,
The inter~upt described in the pre'" ious el"ror
occurred; however, the expected sta!cI13, DCD 3et
and CTS reset, did not occur.
ERR 0 R: CTSIN TERR UPT N() T REeEL ./ SD, r r Yit, S r { T"j S= il #
DTR was set on the receive po~t, whi~h should have
caused an interrupt on the transmit port when crs
was set true.
ERROR: TTY# CTS NOT SET AND DCD RESET
STATUS= XX
AFTER
DTR
SET,
The interrupt described in the previous error
occurred, but the expected status, eTS true and
DCD false, did not occur.
ERROR: NO CHAR RECEIVED, MODEM INTERRUPT TEST ON TTY#,
RECEIVE STATUS: ## FAILED ON CHARACTER= ##, TRANSMIT
STATUS= /Iff
A character-received interrupt failed to occur on
the receive SID during interrupt-mode ~odem te3ting.
The interrupt-mode
character
test
is
}"epeated, except that It status affects vectors" is
true, and interrupt vectors Qx24 and Ox2C are used
for character interrupts, instead of 0 x;20. The
status of the transmit and receive modems and the
c h a r act era t t em ptin g tab e t ran sm itt edar e :.; ~l 'h';!1 •
ERROR: MODEM LINES HAVE DROPPED BETWEEN TTY# AND
RECEIVE STATUS= ##, TRANSMIT STATUS= ##
TIYO,
An external/status interrupt, indicating a change
in one of the states of the modem signals,
occurred during the transmission of characters.
The status of the receive and transmit modems is
given. It may not be possible to recover from
this error in which case the test is restarted.
A-114
2ilog
A-1 1 1l
HRM
Zilog
HRr~
ERROR: NO TRANSMIT INTERRUPTS OCCURRED, MODEM INTERRUPT
TEST, TTY#, STATUS= ##
No tr~nsmit buffer empty interrupts have occurred
on the transmit modem during the transmission 0f
256 characters.
MODEM INTERRUPTS
##CHRS, ##ERRS
ON
TTY#,
##CHRS,
##ERRS,
ON
TTY#,
Displayed on completio~ of each iteration of the
modem interrupt test (after 256 characters 3re
successfully transmitted in
each
jirection) .
Analagous to the messages during the polled ~oja
and interrupt mode character testing. The charact e r a !1 d err 0 r co U!1 t s a re c uen U 1 3 ~:. _L .J ':~ ::. ~ u -.1 t !'} 2
beg inn in g 0 f the t est . Th e err () r
C :J U:1 C.
i..~
[, i1l~
number of times the character transmitted did ~ot
match the character received. The test is succ e s s f u 1 when the err;) r
.J 0 U 11 t i s
z e r 0 L'1 bot h
direction.3.
ERROR: SPECIAL RECEIVE CONDITION INTERRUPT
No test currently implemented
should caU3e this
interrupt
to
occur.
The receive SIO mo,jem
believes it is detecting a serious error cJndltion, such as a parity or framing e~ror.
LAP SUMMARY
This is an interactive test and does not use a lap cou1t Jr
summary.
The test continues until the user responds t j a
prompt with "Q", to quit (or terminate) all tests.
NOTES
A special
SIO interconnecting cable,
Description of this test, is required.
described
in
the
Console interrupts are disabled during this test.
START
(NMI ) is not to be used totermina te the test, and should
not be pressed. The test will terminate upon responding to
a prompt with a "on.
A-115
Zilog
A-115
HRM
Zilog
HRM
Errors which occur during polled-mode oharacter, or modem
signal testing, are usually caused by broken wires or loose
pins in the cable, or by a connector which is either loose
or connected to the wrong I/O port.
Th e m0 s t a 11- inc 1 u s i vet est i.3 the L1 t e;, ... '..l;> t·- >1 ,) L~ :,1) j~::l CY1 ~
trol test.
This test is recommended for extendej t33ti~3,
since it tests for the greatest number of p03sib1e errors.
A-116
Zilog
A-116
HRM
Zilog
HRM
TEST NAME
ECCTEST - tests of ECC error correction
ECC memory
and
detection
and
PARllMETERS
Parameter 1 = segment -- the segment where the 1-bit and 2bit error tests will take place. Default = 1. Range is 1 to
127.
Parameter 2 - offset. The offset where the 1-bit and 2-bit
error test will take place. Default = o.
Range is 0 to
FFFC (hex).
Parameter 3 - maxseg. The maximum segment to be tested in
the ECC memory test. Defaul t = 3. Range is 0 to 127. (If
maxseg = 0, however, no ECC memory test will occur.)
DESCRIPTION
ECCTEST is a series of three tests. The series repeats n
times, where n is the number of repetitions specified in the
SADIE test line.
Test 1 tests the ability of the ECC to correct and report
1-bit memory errors.
A single-bit error is forced into
memory by writing a 32-bit pattern that is corrupted in one
bit.
The correct check byte for the uncorrupted data is
written to the check-byte register. Then error correction
is enabled and the memory location is read. The data read
should match the original, uncorrupted data.
If not, an
"uncorrected" error message is displayed. If error correction occurred, the ECC error count register is checked to be
sure
the
ECC has recorded the error.
If not, and
"unreported" error message appears.
Test 1 repeats 64 K times during each lap. Each repetition
is done using a different data pattern and different corrupted bit.
Test 2 tests the ECC's ability to detect and report 2-bit
errors. A 2-bit error is forced by corrupting any 2-bits in
a 32-bit data pattern ~nd 7-bit check byte.
The corrupted
data pattern is written to memory 'and the corrupted check
byte is written to the check byte register. Error detection
is enabled and the System Configuration Register is set so
that ECC errors generate a Non-Maskable Interrupt (NMI).
Then the memory location is read. If no NMI occurs, an
A-117
Zilog
A-117
HRM
HRM
2ilog
"undetected" error message is displayed.
If the NMI occurs,
the ECC error count register is checked to verify that the
ECC recorded the 2-bit error. If not, an "unreportl=d" error
message is displayed.
Test 2 repeats 64 K times during each lap of ECCTEST.
Each
repetition is done using a different data pattern and a different pair of corrupted bits.
Test 3 is an ECC memory test. Every double-word location in
segments 1 through maxseg is tested using three patterns.
The patterns are:
0, Ox01090000 and Ox00000106
For each pattern, the correct pattern is written to the
location and the correct check byte is written to the
check-byte register. Then the location is read with memory
correction enabled.
If the data read does not match the
data written, a data error message is displayed.
If the
data matches the original, the ECC error count register is
checked to see if the ECC recorded error
correction
occurred. If so, a "corrected" error message is displayed.
ERROR MESS,AGES
Te st 1:
SB--orig: xxxxxxxx-cc, wrote: xxxxxxxx-cc, read: xxxxxxxx-cc
where xxxxxxxx = the data pattern (hex)
cc = the check-byte (he~)
SB = "SINGLE BIT"
;
SB--Corrected 1-bit error unreported: count
= xxxx
where cccc
xxxx
=
=
=
cccc, report
the test's count of 1-bit errors (hex)
the error count register content (hex)
Test 2:
TB--orig: xxxxxxxx-cc, wrote: xxxxxxxx-cc, read: xxxxxxxx-cc
= the data pattern (hex)
= the check-byte (hex)
= "TWO BIT"
error unreported: count = cccc,
where xxxxxxxx
cc
TB
Detected 2-bit
A-118
2ilog
rE~port
= xxxx
A-118
HRM
Zilog
HRM
where eccc = test'.s error count (hex)
xxxx = the error count register (hex)
Test 3:
MEM--<sss>ooooH
where sss
0000
xxxxxxxx
cc
MEM
wrote: xxxxxxxx-cc read: xxxxxxxx-cc
_
_
_
..
segment number (decimal)
the offset (hex)
the data pattern (hex)
the check-byte (hex)
"MEMORY TEST"
MEM--correction at <sss>ooooH
pattern = xxxxxxxx-cc
where sss - segment (decimal)
0000 _ offset (hex)
xxxxxxxx - data pattern (hex)
cc _ check-byte (hex)
LAP SUMMARY
At the completion of each lap of ECCTEST, a table of statistics is displayed. It shows:
1)
For single-bit errors:
a)
number of 1-bi t errors forced
b)
number of 1-b it errors corrected & reported
c)
number of 1-b it errors uncorrected
d)
number of 1-bit errors corrected, but unreported
If the number of forced errors = the number corrected
re por·ted ( a= b) , then no errors have occurred.
2)
A-119
and
For two-bi t errors:
a)
number of 2-bit errors forced
b)
number of 2-bit errors detected & reported
c)
number of 2-bit errors undetected
d)
number of 2-bit errors detected but unreported
Zilog
A-119
HRM
If the number of errors forced = the number
reported, no ECC errors have occurred.
3)
HRM
2ilog
detected
and
Memory test:
a)
number of trials the memory test has completed
b)
numbers of data errors (data read does
data written)
c)
number of 1-bit errors reported by
the ECC.
(data read = data written, but error count register indicates an error was corrected).
not
equal
NOTES
Test 3 may show spurious errors if memory has not been initialized after power on. To be sure memory is initialized,
enter the T command to the Prom Monitor before booting SADIE
with the Z T command. Alternately, memory can be initialized by running NEWMEM2 on segments 0 through maxseg.
A-120
2ilog
A-120
HRM 21
Zilog
HRM 21
APPENDIX B
WINCHES1'ER DISK CON'TROLLER COMMANDS
B.. 1.
General
Appendix C describes all the commands that the host CPU
sends to the controller through the command registers. Each
de~cription indentifies the
registers that the host CPU
uses.
Bits 0 through 4 of the command byte form the command field.
Refer to Section 4 for additional iiformation.
The term CP (Command Port) means command register as used in
Section 4. For example, CPO is command register xxOO and
CP1 is command register xx01.
B.. 2.
Format / UNIT /
The controller formats an entire disk drive with a single
controller command. The CPU sends the FORMAT command to the
controller by writing the unit number of the
drive to be
formatted as CP1 and by issuing the Format command to the
.command port, CPO. Format writes the data field of each
sector with a pattern of alternating ones and zeros (OAA
hexadecimal) and rewrites each sector's header. After formatting the target unit, the entire format is read back and
the header field of each sector is validated. If an invalid
header is found, the Unrecoverable Error bit in the operation ending status byte is set, together with the Verify
Failure bit in the Operation Error Status Byte.
I UNIT I Unit is written to the controller through CP1.
value between zero and three is valid.
B.3.
Any
Read Sector
/ UNIT I HEAD I CYLINDER I SECTOR I WORD COUNT I ADDRESS
The Read Sector command requires both a disk address [unit,
head, .cylinder, sector] and a host system buffer address
[word count, address]. Less than one sector of information
is transferred if the word count is less than a sector (512
bytes) in length. The controller command for multiple sector reads and single sector reads is equivalent with the
word count determining the number of sectors for the
transfer.
B-1
Zilog
B-1
Zilog
HRM 21
HRM 21
/ UNIT / Unit is written to the controller through CP1.
value between zero and three is valid.
I
Any
HEAD / Head is written to the controller through CP2.
/ CYLINDER / The target cylinder number is written to the
controller through command ports CP3 and CP4. The low or~er
eight bits of the ten-bit cylinder address are issued to the
controller through CP3 and the high order two bits are
issued through CP4 bits zero and one.
SECTOR / The sector number of the sector to be read is
passed to the control~er through the sector register, CP5.
I
/ WORD COUNT / The number of words to read from the disk is
sent to the controller through the word count control register pair, CP8 and cpg. A word count greater than a single
sector length is interpreted as a request for a multiple
sector read.
ADDRESS / The 24-bit address of the host data buffer is
passed to the controller through a register triplet; CP10,
CP11, and CP12.
I
8.4.
I
Write Sector
UNIT / HEAD / CYLINDER / SECTOR / WORD COUNT / ADDRESS/
The Write Sector command requires both a disk address· [unit,
head, cylinder, sector] and a host system buffer address
[word count, address]. Less than one sector of data is read
from host memory if the word count is less than a sector in
length. The controller command for multiple sector writes
and . single sector writes is equivalent to the word count
determining the number of sectors for the transfer.
/ UNIT / Unit is written to the controller through CP1.
value between zero and three is valid.
Any
/ HEAD / Head is written to the controller through CP2.
/ CYLINDER / The target cylinder number is written to the
controller through command ports CP3 and CP4. The low order
eight bits of the ten-bit cylinder address are issued to the
controller through CP3 and the high order two bits are
issued through CP4 bits zero and one.
SECTOR / The sector number of the sector to be read
sent to the controller through the sector register, CP5.
I
B-2
Zilog
is
B-2
HRM 21
Zilog
HRM 21
/ WORD COUNT / The number of words to be written to the disk
is sent to the controller through the word count control
register pair, CP8 and cpg. A word count greater than a
single sector length is interpreted as a request for a multiple sector write.
/ ADDRESS / The 24-bit address of the host data buffer is
sent to the controller through a register triplet; CP10,
CP11, and CP12.
B.5.
Read Detailed status / UNIT / ADDRESS /
The Read Detailed Status command transfers three words of
the detailed disk status for unit number UNIT to the host
system memory beginning at location ADDRESS.
The act of
reading detailed status clears the operation error status
byte unless the read status command itself times out.
In
this case the time-out error will be set. See Table 11 for
the error status byte definition.
/ UNIT / Unit is written to the controller through CP1.
value between a and 3 is valid.
Any
/ ADDRESS / The 24-bit addre~s of the host data buffer is
sent to the controller through a register triplet; CP10,
CP11, and CP12.
B.6.
Restore / UNIT /
The Restore command recalibrates the drive seek circuitry by .
positioning the heads at track zero, and clears the fault
status bit in the drive. The restore operation executes at
a slower rate than a seek to track zero. Recalibrate should
only be used in response to a drive fault.
The controller
automatically provides a restore and command retry when a
drive fault occurs unless that option has been reselected.
/ UNIT / Unit is written to the controller through CP1.
value between zero and three is valid.
B·.7.,
Any
Null
The null command presents an operation ending status code
"operation completE~" and performs no disk or controller
operation.
B-3
Zilog
B-3
B.8.
HRM 21
Zilog
HRM 21
Seek / UNIT / CYLINDER /
The controller generates an automatic seek before disk read
and write operations. This feature can be deselected 'under
host software control. The host system can opt to defeat
the automatic seek before read/write and issue its own seek
commands. Deselection of the automatic seek facility has
the side affect of deselecting overlapped seeks in the
troller.
/ UNIT / Unit is written to the controller through CP1.
value between zero and thr~e is valid.
conAny
/ CYLINDER / The target cylinder number is written to the
controller through command ports CP3 and CP4. The low order
eight bits of the ten-bit cylinder address are issued to the
controller through CP3 and the high order two bits are
issued through CP4 bits zero and one.
B.9.
Set Strobe/Offset
/ UNIT / SO /
The Set Strobe/Offset command is used to select a value for
either or both the data strobe timing or the head positioning during data read operations. Both the data strobe and
head offset are reset during disk write operations as
required by the disk drive circuitry. This command reduces
the sector read time dramatically on media that require a
strobe/offset value to recover
the
data.
The
set
strobe/offset command is useful with removable media since
it can correct small differences between head alignment
and/or data strobe times between drives.
It is of questionable merit for use with fixed media.
The Strobe/Offset
value is input to the controller through the low byte of
CP1,the HEAD select register.
/ UNIT / Unit is written to the controller through CP1.
value between zero and three is valid.
/ SO / The Strobe/Offset value is issued to
the
Any
controller
by command register CP2.
8.10.
Set Write Protect
/ UNIT / SURFACES /
The Set Write Protect command allows each unit to be selectivelywrite-protected at the controller. Write commands to
a protected surface are inhibited at the controller.
8-4
Zi10g
8-4
HRM 21
Zilog
HRM 21
/ UNIT / Unit is written to the controller through CP1.
value between zero and three is valid.
B.11~
Format Read
ADDRESS I
I UNIT / HEAD / CYLINDER /
/
SECTOR
Any
/
When the Format Read command is issued, the host diagnostics
can read an entire sector, both sector header information
and data.
/ UNIT / Unit is written to the controller through CP1.
value between zero and three is valid.
Any
/ HEAD / Head is written to the controller through CP2.
/ CYLINDER / The target cylinder number is written to the
controller through command ports CP3 and CP4. The low order
eight bits of the ten bit cylinder address are issued to the
controller through CP3 and the high order two bits are
issued through CP4 bits zero and one.
SECTOR / The sector number of the sector to be read
sent to the controller through the sector register, CP5.
I
is
I ADDRESS / The 24-bit address of the host data buffer is
pas s e'd t o t h e con t roll e r t h r 0 ugh are g i s t e r t rip 1 e t; CP1 0 ,
CP11, and CP12.
B.12.
Set Interrupt Aqdress. / SECTOR I
The Set Interrupt Address allows the host system to speciry
the low order eight bits of the address for interrupt
transfer. That.address and an eight-bit Operation Ending
Status byte are sent to the address bus lines when the controller issues an interrupt. Typically, the Set Interrupt
Address command is issued once shortly after the controller
is powered up.
SECTOR I The sector number of the sector to be read
sent to the controller through the sector register, CP5.
I
B.. 13.
is
Self Test
This command forces the controller to execute its self diagnostics.
Both the command reject and the command accepted:
bits are set in the command status byte if a self test error
is detected.
It is possible that the self test error will
preclude the setting of the bits in the command status byte.
B-5
Zilog
B-5
2ilog
HRM 21
B.14.
Format Verify
HRM 21
/ UNIT / HEAD / CYLINDER /
This is a diagnostic command that verifies the integrity of
the disk format on a track. The controller reads each individual sector of the track and ensures that its header is
good. If a format error is detected, the Verification Error
bit is set in the Operation Error status Byte and the Unrecoverable Error on Operation bit in the Operation Ending
Status. byte is set.
/ UNIT / Unit is written to the controller through CP1.
value between zero and three is valid.
Any
/ HEAD / Head is written to the controller through CP2.
/ CYLINDER / The target cylinder number is written to the
controller through command ports CP3 and CP4. The low order
eight bits of the ten-bit cylinder address are issued to the
controller through CP3 and the high order two bits are
issued through CP4 bits zero and one.
B.15.
Unit Format Verify
/ UNIT /
This is a diagnostic command. It is used to verify the format of an entire unit. If a format error is detected, the
Verification Error bit is set in the Operation Error Status
Byte, and the Unrecoverable Error on Operation bit in ~he
Operation Ending Status Byte is also set.
The cylinder
where the failure occurred is read back by the Read Detailed
Status command.
/ UNIT / Unit is written to the controller through CP1.
value between zero and three is valid.
B. 16.
Any
Commclnd Notes
An explicit format write command is not provided in the
controller's command repertoire. All disk write operations
write the sector address field as well as the data.
Therefore, a write sector command performs a format write operation.
B-6
2ilog
B-6
Zilog
HRM 21
HRM 21
APPENDIX C
CARTRIDGE TAPE ERROR CONDITIONS
C.1.
General
Table C-1 lists the error conditions that can result from
the commands that the tape controller receives from the host
CPU. The table lists the commands, the resulting conditions, and the status bits that the conditions set.
Table C-1
Cartridge Tape Error Conditions
COMMAND RECEIVED
CONDITION
STATUS BITS SET
Initialization
Tape (if present)
rewinds for more
than 88 sec
INTV and HWERR
DIAG
ROM checksum error
INTV and HWERR
DIAG
Fifo test error
INTV and HWERR
DIAG
Handshake test
failed
INTV and HWERR
Any command
Host wrote to
ports in byte or
double word mode
CMDREJ
Any undefined
command
CMDREJ and INVAL
Any command except
DIAG
Drive busy, or
drive not selected
CMDREJ, INTV,
INAP, and HWERR
Any command except
DIAG, MRTRY, SEL,
MODE
No tape
CMDREJ, INTV, and
NOTAP
Any command except
DIAG, MRTRY, SEL,
LOAD, MODE
Tape not logically
loaded
CMDREJ and INAP
WRITE, WFM
Tape write-protected
CMDREJ, INAP, and
PROT
C-·1
EGP
Zilog
C-1
Zilog
HRM 2\
HRM 21
LOAD
Tape already
logically loaded
CMDREJ and INAP
~EAD,'
WRITE; SKBF,
SKFF, EGP
Tape at logical end
of tape
CMDREJ, INA?, and LEO
SKBR, SKFR, REWIND
Tape at logical
beginning of tape
CMDREJ, INA?, and LBO
HEAD,WRITE
DMA buffer length
greater than
or equal to 32K
bytes (k=1024
bytes)
CMDREJ and BPARM
READ, WRITE
DMA start address
and DMA length
greater than 24 bits
CMDREJ and BPARM
READ
DMA buffer length
not even (bit 0=0)
CMDREJ and B?ARM
READ
Blank tape (more than
48 inches) encountered
DATERR and BLKTAP
READ
Attempted .buffer
overflow during DMA
OVERFL
Bad read (read after
write for WRITE and
WFM) as indicated by
a bad CRCC after retrying the operation
the maximum permissible number of times
DATERH
'. READ
File mark encountered
CMDREJ and FMDET
'READ, WRITE'
Fifo error (overflow
or underrun) after
retrying the operation the maximum
permissable number
of times
FFERR
WRITE
Deck stopped taking
data during write
INTV and HWERR
READ, WRITE, WFM
One or more retry
attempts made
RTRYAT and number
of retries in low
byte of status 1
'RE AD,
C-2
WRI TE:, WFM
Zilog
C-2
HRM 21
Zilog
HRM21
register
Any command except
READ, WRITE, WFM
. Numbe,rof retries
in lb'~; byte of.
status 1
r ,e,g i s t e r.= 0
WRITE, WFM
Encountered end
of tape before
WRITE began or
retry after error
pushes the beginning
of the block past
the end of tape.
CMDREJ, INAP, and LEO
(and RTRYAT and numbe
of retries in low byt
of status 1 register
if retries attempted)
SKBF, SKFF
Encounterd logical
end of tape
SKNDE and LEOT and
number of blocks!
files skipped in
high byte of status
1•
SKBR, SKFR
Encountered logical
beginning of tape
SKNDNE and LBOT. and
number of blocks!
files skipped in high
byte of status 1.
SKBF, SKFF
Blank tape (more
than 48 inches)
encountered
SKNDNE and BLKTAP an
number 0 f blocks!
files' sk'ipped in high
byte of status 1
register.
SKBF, SKBR
File ma'rk
encountered SKNDNE
and FMDET and
and'number of blocks
skipped in high byte
of status 1 register.
SKBF, SKBR, SKFF,
SKFR
Number'of'block~!
files skipped' 1.n high
byte of status 1
register.
High byte of status
register = o.
Any command except
SKBF, SKBR, SKFF,
SKFR
READ, WRITE, SKBF,
SKFF, UNLD, REWIND,
STRK
C-3
Rewind takes more
than 88 seconds.
Rewind occurs
whenever track
boundaries are
Zilog
INTV and HWERR
C-3
Zilog
HRM 21
HRM 21
crossed.
SKFR
During forward
motion (after FM
detected) blank
tape or end of
tape encountered
INTV and HWERR
SKBR, SKFR, READ
WRITE, WFM
During forward
motion (after track
boundary) tape
failed to move off
BOT for greater
than 166 MS.
INTV and HWERR
Any command
Tape write-protected
PROT
Any command
Tape at logical load
point
LLP
Any command
Tape at end of tape
LEOT
Any command
UNITO, 1 and TRKO, 1
set to indicate unit
and track selected.
TRKO, 1 = 0 if drive
not logically loaded
READ, WRITE, WFM,
SKBF, SKBR, SKFF,
SKFR
>
Data detected for
40" (32K bytes)
INTV and HWERR
REWIND, STRK,
READ, WRITE, WFM,
EGP, SKBF, SKBR,
SKFF, SKFR
Tape moves forward
2.1 sec and fails
to move" from Bot to
LPS
INTV and HWERR
READ, WRITE, WFM,
SKBR, SEL, MODE
No block found where
one is know to exist
INTV and HWERR
READ, WRITE, WFM
During retry blank
tape found while
moving in reverse
INTV and HWERR
C-4
>
Zilog
C-4
03-0244-01
NOTE TO USER FOR SADIE VER. 3.2
April 20, 1983
Purpose:
This note describes some major changes between SADIE
3.1 and SADIE 3.2. It also fills in some gaps between
the release date of SADIE 3.2 and the release of the
latest SADIE documentation in the System 8000 Hardware
Reference Manuals~for Models 11 and 21/31 •. ,
Item 1:
NEWHEMl, NEWMEM2 and NEWMEM3 memory diagnostics have
been replaced by a new diagnostic, MEMTEST. MEMTEST
supports all memory array boards currently available
for the System 8000. The version of MEMTEST in SAOIE
3.2 does not, however, test the Iep 8/02s1ave memory.
The boards supported are:
PARITY -- 256K and 512K
Eee
-- 256K and 1 Megabyte
f.1EMTEST is ~ctually a s:eries of tests. Included are a
segment unlqueness te:st, an addr~ss bus test, a data
bus test, several boarOl trace and pin continuity tests
and a' ram 'test. If these tests go smoothly, parity ram
or checkbyte ram~~e also tested. All tests are done
with mmuls disabred.
~
f-1EMTEST i s ' a subse'ant.ial improvement over previous
memory .. ,te!?ts.. It -is: muc~.better at narrowing m~mory
problems:: ~tb .~ single cPtiP. or,:)L; a small reg~j;'On~ ,of' the
memoryatray board. "~llqm,,~r~ors are uIl~ikelY"·l".o escape
from,MEbl11EST as they ~Q~uld
earlie,rtests •. ' But the
primary ~!~,mprovemen~.,~,'.:of l-IEMTEST',. ~ is , . .in its. error
displays, itwhich .". Clre:"'.y.isual,· represeritations'.,of the
memot·Y: array ~1q~rd \'l,r~h. ba;d .chip·(po'slitiori~f· clearly
marked.~;:
'. .......
.
'.,i •. ,l.
in
,
..
~
:
I'
.1
MEIIiITES-[tidoes have it.s limitations.
Its primary goal
was to bea fast bq,t~ thoro~gp rjllll. test, with secondary
emphas,is',':placed" 'on o.'tJ1E!r memory ,ar'ray board functions.
vlhile!,:~t
'is ·veryg'o,O.dI at finding bad ram chips, it is
not as~'.·,gooa at naJ:'rowlng down other types of errors.
This is~··particularly true when it is used with ECC
memory· array bd~rqs.
-
2 -
Item 2:
ECCTEST test J,.' the . c·heckby~te ram t.e6t"')~lhas, been
removed.
The:" chec'kby'l:E ~" ram test. ,ia now,·included .in··
ME~[TEST.
Item. 3:
Two new diagnostics test the new 9-track magnetic tape
controller board (MTC).
They are l-1TCOM and MTCMON.
MTCOM runs through the controller's repertoire of commands.
It is divided into 7 modules, of which modules
1 through 4 are run by default.
Parameters control
which modules are run as well as the tape unit number
tested.
MTCOM modules are:
Module 1:
WRITE and WFM (write file mark only)
Module 2: READ, SFF (skip file forward),
(read reverse) and SFR (skip file reverse)
READR
Module 3: SBF (skip block forward), and SBR (skip
block revE~rse)
Module 4: SFFR (skip file forward,
SFRR (skip file reverse, reading)
Module 5: EFL (erase fixed length
(erase variable length gap)
Module 6: SE (security erase)
unload and offline)
and
reading)
gap)
RUO
and
and
EVL
(rewind,
- Module 7: An interactive test of the drive's handling of the write enable ring
l-ITCl-10N is an interactive monitor that enables the user
to issue single commands or strings of commands to the
MTC. A HELP command allows the user to see a menu of
the available commands. MTCMON commands have the same
basic syntax rules as the other interactive monitors in
SADIE: TCDMON, WDCMON, MDCMON and SMDMON.
l-ITCMON and MTCOM documentation is included in the
NINE-TRACK TAPE SUBSYSTErtl O&M fwtANUAL. The "WUP" (tape
warmup) command described in the documentation of
MTCJttION is no longer a valid command.
- 3 -
Item 4:
8165IO test has been.'renanted ito·/8.IOTEST. - It now.. sup.ports a 24-user syst.em.,";- SLOl-10DEM ,also ,:supports. 24
users.
;01'
Systems Publications
Reader's Comments
. Your feedback about this document helps us ascertain your needs and fuUill them in the future. Please
take the time to fill out this questionaire and return it to us. this information will be helpf!U to us anel, in
time, to future users lof Zilog products.
Your Name:
.
----------------
Company Name:
Address:
......,;;._ _........,;..:,..i-'i.'\.:...;·~... _~........,;.
'"""'___
Title of this document:
Briefly describe application:
Does this publication meet your needs?
0 Yes 0 No If not, why not?
How are you using Uus publication?
o
o
o
As an intrc:x:luction to the subject?
As a
referl~nce
manual?
As an instlructor or student?
How do you find thEI material?
Excellent
Good
Poor
Organization
o
o
o
o
Completeness
o
o
o
o
Technicality
o
What would have improved the material?
Other comments and suggestions:
If you found any mil3takes in this document, please let us know what and where they are:
_
111111
•
BUSINESS REPLY MAIL
- .
FIRST CLASS PERMIT NO. 35 CAMPBELL, CA.
POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY ADDRESSEE
Zilog
Systems Publications
1315 Dell Avenue
Cam:pbell. California 95008
Attn: Publications Manager
NO POSTAGE
NECESSARY
IF MAILED
IN THE
UNITED STATES
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertising